SBR Revision Notes

NOTES
(Association of Chartered Certified Accountants)
www.ACCAGlobalBox.com
Downloaded From "http://www.ACCAGlobalBox.com"
SBR – STRATEGIC
x
Bo
BUSINESS REPORTING
(INT)
b al
lo
G
A
STUDY NOTES
C
AC
1|Page
TABLE OF CONTENTS
x
Bo
b al
lo
G
A
C
AC
2|Page
ox
lB
ba
lo
G
A
C
AC
3|Page
THE CONCEPTUAL AND REGULATORY FRAMEWORK FOR
FINANCIAL REPORTING
CONCEPTUAL FRAMEWORK
The IFRS Framework describes the basic concepts that underlie the preparation and presentation of
financial statements for external users. A conceptual framework can be seen as a statement of generally
accepted accounting principles (GAAP) that form a frame of reference for the evaluation of existing
practices and the development of new ones.
Purpose of framework
It is true to say that the Framework:
x
 Seeks to ensure that accounting standards have a consistent approach to problem solving and do
not represent a series of ad hoc responses that address accounting problems on a piece meal basis
Bo
 Assists the IASB in the development of coherent and consistent accounting standards
 Is not a standard, but rather acts as a guide to the preparers of financial statements to enable
them to resolve accounting issues that are not addressed directly in a standard
 Is an incredibly important and influential document that helps users understand the purpose of,


and limitations of, financial reporting
al
Used to be called the Framework for the Preparation and Presentation of Financial Statements
b
Is a current issue as it is being revised as a joint project with the IASB's American counterparts
the Financial Accounting Standards Board.
lo
Advantages of a conceptual framework

G
 Financial statements are more consistent with each other

 Avoids firefighting approach and a has a proactive approach in determining best policy
 Less open to criticism of political/external pressure
A
 Has a principles based approach

 Some standards may concentrate on effect on statement of financial position; others on statement
C
of profit or loss
AC
Disadvantages of a conceptual framework

 A single conceptual framework cannot be devised which will suit all users
 Need for a variety of standards for different purposes
 Preparing and implementing standards may still be difficult with a framework
The purpose of financial reporting is to provide useful information as a basis for economic decision
making.
OVERVIEW OF THE CONTENTS OF THE FRAMEWORK
The starting point of the Framework is to address the fundamental question of why financial statements
are actually prepared. The basic answer to that is they are prepared to provide financial information about
the reporting entity that is useful to existing and potential investors, lenders, and other creditors in
making decisions about providing resources to the entity.
In turn this means the Framework has to consider what is meant by useful information. In essence for
information to be useful it must be considered both relevant, i.e. capable of making a difference in the
4|Page
decisions made by users and be faithful in its presentation, i.e. be complete, neutral and free from error.
The usefulness of information is enhanced if it is also comparable, verifiable, timely, and understandable.
The Framework also considers the nature of the reporting entity and the basic elements from which
financial statements are constructed. The Framework identifies three elements relating to the statement
of financial position, being assets, liabilities and equity, and two relating to the statement of profit or loss,
being income and expenses. The definitions and recognition criteria of these elements are very important
and these are considered in detail below.
THE FIVE ELEMENTS
An asset is defined as a resource controlled by the entity as a result of past events and from which future
economic benefits are expected to flow to the entity.
Assets are presented on the statement of financial position as being non-current or current. They can be
intangible, that is, without physical presence – for example, goodwill. Examples of tangible assets include
property plant and equipment and inventory.
x
Bo
While most assets will be both controlled and legally owned by the entity it should be noted that legal
ownership is not a prerequisite for recognition, rather it is control that is the key issue. For example IFRS
16, Leases, with regard to a lessee, is consistent with the Framework's definition of an asset. IFRS 16
requires that the lessee should recognise a leased asset on the statement of financial position in respect of
the benefits that it controls, even though the asset subject to the lease is not the legally owned by the
asset, and so the accounting is a faithful presentation.

b al
lessee. So this reflects that from lessee‘s perspective the economic reality of a lease is a loan to buy an
A liability is defined as a present obligation of the entity arising from past events, the settlement of which
lo
is expected to result in an outflow from the entity of resources embodying economic benefits.
G
Liabilities are also presented on the statement of financial position as being non-current or current.
Examples of liabilities include trade payables, tax payable and loans.
A
It should be noted that in order to recognise a liability there does not have to be an obligation that is due
on demand but rather there has to be a present obligation. Thus for example IAS 37, Provisions,
C
Contingent Liabilities and Contingent Assets is consistent with the Framework's approach when
considering whether there is a liability for the future costs to decommission oil rigs. As soon as a company
AC
has erected an oil rig that it is required to dismantle at the end of the oil rig's life, it will have a present
obligation in respect of the decommissioning costs. This liability will be recognised in full, as a non-
current liability and measured at present value to reflect the time value of money. The past event that
creates the present obligation is the original erection of the oil rig as once it is erected the company is
responsible to incur the costs of decommissioning.
Equity is defined as the residual interest in the assets of the entity after deducting all its liabilities.
The effect of this definition is to acknowledge the supreme conceptual importance of identifying,
recognising and measuring assets and liabilities, as equity is conceptually regarded as a function of assets
and liabilities, i.e. a balancing figure.
Equity includes the original capital introduced by the owners, i.e. share capital and share premium, the
accumulated retained profits of the entity, i.e. retained earnings, unrealised asset gains in the form of
revaluation reserves and, in group accounts, the equity interest in the subsidiaries not enjoyed by the
parent company, i.e. the non-controlling interest (NCI). Slightly more exotically, equity can also include
the equity element of convertible loan stock, equity settled share based payments, differences arising
when there are increases or decreases in the NCI, group foreign exchange differences and contingently
5|Page
issuable shares. These would probably all be included in equity under the umbrella term of Other
Components of Equity.
Income is defined as the increases in economic benefits during the accounting period in the form of
inflows or enhancements of assets or decreases of liabilities that result in increases in equity, other than
those relating to contributions from equity participants.
Most income is revenue generated from the normal activities of the business in selling goods and services,
and as such is recognised in the Income section of the statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive
income, however certain types of income are required by specific standards to be recognised directly to
equity, i.e. reserves, for example certain revaluation gains on assets. In these circumstances the income
(gain) is then also reported in the Other Comprehensive Income section of the statement of profit or loss
and other comprehensive income.
The reference to ‗other than those relating to contributions from equity participants‘ means that when the
entity issues shares to equity shareholders, while this clearly increases the asset of cash, it is a transaction
with equity participants and so does not represent income for the entity.
x
Again note how the definition of income is linked into assets and liabilities. This is often referred to as ‗the
Bo
balance sheet approach‘ (the former name for the statement of financial position).
Expenses are defined as decreases in economic benefits during the accounting period in the form of
outflows or depletions of assets or incurrences of liabilities that result in decreases in equity, other than
those relating to distributions to equity participants.
b al
The reference to ‗other than those relating to distributions to equity participants‘ refers to the payment of
dividends to equity shareholders. Such dividends are not an expense and so are not recognised anywhere
lo
in the statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income. Rather they represent an
appropriation of profit that is as reported as a deduction from Retained Earnings in the Statement of
G
Changes in Equity.
Examples of expenses include depreciation, impairment of assets and purchases. As with income most
A
expenses are recognised in the profit or loss section of the statement of profit or loss and other
comprehensive income, but in certain circumstances expenses (losses) are required by specific standards
C
to be recognised directly in equity and reported in the Other Comprehensive Income section of the
statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income. An example of this is an impairment loss, on
AC
a previously revalued asset, that does not exceed the balance of its revaluation reserve.
The recognition criteria of elements of financial statements
The Framework also lays out the formal recognition criteria that have to be met to enable elements to be
recognised in the financial statements. Recognition is the process of incorporating in the statement of
financial position or statement of profit or loss an item that satisfies the following criteria for recognition:
 An item that meets the definition of an element

 It is probable that any future economic benefit associated with the item will flow to or from the
entity and
 The item‘s cost or value can be measured with reliability.
Recap: Application of recognition criteria
 An asset is recognised in the statement of financial position when it is probable that the future
economic benefits will flow to the entity and the asset has a cost or value that can be measured
reliably.
6|Page
 A liability is recognised in the statement of financial position when it is probable that an outflow
of resources embodying economic benefits will result from the settlement of a present obligation
and the amount at which the settlement will take place can be measured reliably.
 Income is recognised in the statement of profit or loss when an increase in future economic
benefits related to an increase in an asset or a decrease of a liability has arisen that can be
measured reliably.
 Expenses are recognised when a decrease in future economic benefits related to a decrease in an
asset or an increase of a liability has arisen that can be measured reliably.
Measurement issues for elements
Finally the issue of whether assets and liabilities should be measured at cost or value is considered by the
Framework. To use cost should be reliable as the cost is generally known, though cost is not necessary
very relevant for the users as it is past orientated. To use a valuation method is generally regarded as
relevant to the users as it up to date, but value does have the drawback of not always being reliable. This
conflict creates a dilemma that is not satisfactorily resolved as the Framework is indecisive and
acknowledges that there are various measurement methods that can be used. The failure to be
x
prescriptive at this basic level results in many accounting standards sitting on the fence how they wish to
measure assets. For example, IAS 40, Investment Properties and IAS 16, Property, Plant and Equipment
Bo
both allow the preparer the choice to formulate their own accounting policy on measurement.
Measurements of elements in financial statements
follows:
b al
The IFRS Framework acknowledges that a variety of measurement bases can be used. Examples are as
 Historical cost
lo
 Current cost (Assets are carried at the amount of cash or cash equivalents that would have to be
paid if the same or an equivalent asset was acquired currently)
G
 Net realisable value (The amount of cash or cash equivalents that could currently be obtained by
selling an asset in an orderly disposal)
 Present value (A current estimate of the present discounted value of the future net cash flows in
A
the normal course of business)

 Fair value (As per IFRS 13)
C
HISTORICAL COST ACCOUNTING

AC
The application of historical cost accounting means that assets are recorded at the amount they originally
cost, and liabilities are recorded at the proceeds received in exchange for the obligation.
Advantages
 Simple to understand
 Figures are objective, reliable and verifiable
 Results in comparable financial statements
 There is less possibility for manipulation by using 'creative accounting' in asset valuation.
7|Page
Disadvantages
 The carrying value of assets is often substantially different to market value
 No account is taken of inflation meaning that profits are overstated and assets understated
 Financial capital is maintained but not physical capital
 Ratios like Return on capital employed are distorted
 It does not measure any gain/loss of inflation on monetary items arising from the impact
 Comparability of figures is not accurate as past figures are not restated for the effects of inflation
FINACIAL AND PHYSICAL CAPITAL MAINTENANCE
The IASB Conceptual Framework identifies two concepts of capital:
1. A financial concept of capital

2. A physical concept of capital
Financial capital maintenance
ox
A financial concept of capital is whereby the capital of the entity is linked to the net assets, which is the
equity of the entity.
lB
When a financial concept of capital is used, a profit is earned only if the financial amount of the net assets
at the end of the period is greater than the net assets at the beginning of the period, adjusted of course for
ba
any distributions paid to the owners during the period, or any equity capital raised.
The main concern of the users of the financial statements is with the maintenance of the financial capital
lo
of the entity.
Assets – Liabilities = Equity

G
Opening equity (net assets) + Profit – Distributions = Closing equity (net assets)
A
Physical capital maintenance

C
A physical concept of capital is one where the capital of an entity is regarded as its production capacity,
AC
which could be based on its units of output.
When a physical concept of capital is used, a profit is earned only if the physical production capacity (or
operating capability) of the entity at the end of the period is greater than the production capacity at the
beginning of the period, adjusted for any distributions paid to the owners during the period, or any equity
capital raised.
QUALITATIVE CHARACTERISTICS OF USEFUL FINANCIAL INFORMATION
They identify the types of information likely to be most useful to users in making decisions about the
reporting entity on the basis of information in its financial report.
Fundamental qualitative characteristics

 Relevance
Relevant financial information is capable of making a difference in the decisions made by users if
it has predictive value, confirmatory value, or both.
Materiality is an entity-specific aspect of relevance based on the nature or magnitude (or both) of
the items to which the information relates in the context of an individual entity's financial report.
8|Page
 Faithful representation
Information must be complete, neutral and free from material error
Enhancing qualitative characteristics

 Comparability
Comparison with similar information about other entities and with similar information about the
same entity for another period or another date.
 Verifiability
It helps to assure users that information represents faithfully the economic phenomena it
purports to represent. Verifiability means that different knowledgeable and independent
observers could reach consensus, although not necessarily complete agreement
 Timeliness
It means that information is available to decision-makers in time to be capable of influencing
their decisions.
 Understandability
Classifying, characterising and presenting information clearly and concisely. Information should
not be excluded on the grounds that it may be too complex/difficult for some users to understand
x
The IFRS framework states that going concern assumption is the basic underlying assumption.
Bo
RESTRUCTURING OF CONCEPTUAL FRAMEWORK BY IASB
The International Accounting Standards Board (IASB) is coming towards the end of its own renovation
b al
process on the Conceptual Framework for Financial Reporting 2010.
Chapter 1, The objective of general purpose financial reporting

lo
The only major change to ‗Chapter 1, The objective of general purpose financial reporting‘ is that the IASB
proposes the reintroduction of the term ‗stewardship‘ into the objective of general purpose financial
G
reporting. This is a relatively minor change and a nice gentle ease-in to the process.
As many respondents to the consultation highlighted, stewardship is not a new concept. The importance
A
of stewardship by management is inherent within the existing framework and within financial reporting,
so this statement may largely be reinforcing what already exists.
C
Chapter 2, The reporting entity

AC
The 2010 framework has had ‗Chapter 2, The reporting entity‘ classified as ‗to be added‘ since inception.
The major additions here relate to the description and boundary of a reporting entity. The IASB has
proposed the description of a reporting entity as an entity that chooses or is required to prepare general
purpose financial statements.
The proposed boundaries outline that the financial statements of a reporting entity whose boundary is
based on direct control only are called unconsolidated financial statements, whereas one with direct and
indirect control are called consolidated financial statements.
Whilst these have been tentatively confirmed by the IASB, the terms ‗direct‘ and ‗indirect‘ control are
likely to be changed and clarified, meaning that there may still be some time before the extension is ready
to be inhabited.
9|Page
Chapter 3, Qualitative characteristics of useful financial information
Originally, the IASB had not planned on making any changes to ‗Chapter 3, Qualitative characteristics of
useful financial information‘, but following many responses to the discussion paper, there have been some
changes that have tentatively been accepted by the IASB.
Primarily, the qualitative characteristics are unchanged. Relevance and faithful representation will remain
as the two fundamentals. The four enhancing qualitative characteristics will continue to be timeliness,
understandability, verifiability and comparability.
However, while the qualitative characteristics remain unchanged, the IASB has tentatively decided to
reinstate explicit references to prudence and substance over form.
In the Conceptual Framework for Financial Reporting 2010, these were removed. The conclusion
reached was that substance over form was not considered to be a separate component of faithful
representation, because it would be redundant. It was decided that representing a legal form that differed
from the economic substance could not result in a faithful representation.
ox
Whilst that statement is true, the IASB felt that the importance of the concept needed to be reinforced and
so a statement has now been included outlining that faithful representation provides information about
lB
the substance of an economic phenomenon rather than its legal form.
In the 2010 framework, faithful representation was defined as information that was complete, neutral and
ba
free from error. The basis for conclusions in the 2010 framework stated that prudence was not included,
as including it would be inconsistent with neutrality. However, the removal of the term led to confusion
and many respondents to the IASB‘s discussion paper urged the Board to reinstate prudence.
lo
Therefore, an explicit reference to prudence has now been included, stating that ‗prudence is the exercise
of caution when making judgments under conditions of uncertainty‘.
G
As is often the case with a building project, making one minor change may lead to others, and everyone
wants a building that is on the level. The problem with adjusting the building blocks here, even slightly,
A
was that by adding in the reference to prudence, the IASB encountered the further issue of asymmetry.
C
Many standards, such as IAS 37, Provisions, Contingent Liabilities and Contingent Assets, apply a system
AC
of asymmetric prudence. In IAS 37, a probable outflow of economic benefits would be recognised as a
provision, whereas a probable inflow would only be shown as a contingent asset, disclosed in the financial
statements. Therefore, two sides in the same court case could have differing accounting treatments
despite the likelihood of the payout being identical for either party. Many respondents highlighted this
asymmetric prudence as necessary under some accounting standards and felt that a discussion of the term
was required. Whilst this is true, the IASB believes that the framework should not identify asymmetric
prudence as a necessary characteristic of useful financial reporting.
The IASB has tentatively decided to state that the concept of prudence does not imply a need for
asymmetry, such as the need for more persuasive evidence to support the recognition of assets than
liabilities. It has included a statement that such asymmetry may sometimes arise in financial reporting
standards as a consequence of requiring the most useful information.
Chapter 5, Recognition and derecognition
In terms of recognition, the current framework specifies three recognition criteria that apply to all assets
and liabilities:
10 | P a g e
 The item meets the definition of an asset or liability;

 It is probable that any future economic benefit associated with the asset or liability will flow to or
from the entity; and
 The asset or liability has a cost or value that can be measured reliably.
The IASB has confirmed the new approach to recognition, which requires decisions to be made by
reference to the qualitative characteristics of financial information. The IASB has tentatively confirmed
that an entity recognises an asset or a liability (and any related income, expense or changes in equity) if
such recognition provides users of financial statements with:
 Relevant information about the asset or the liability and about any income, expenses or changes
in equity;
 A faithful representation of the asset or liability and of any income, expenses or changes in equity;
ox
and
 Information that results in benefits exceeding the cost of providing that information.
lB
A key change to this is the removal of a ‗probability criterion‘. This has been removed, as different
financial reporting standards apply a different criterion, with some applying ‗probable‘, some ‗virtually
certain‘, some ‗reasonably possible‘. This also means that it will not prohibit the recognition of assets or
ba
liabilities with a low probability of an inflow or outflow of economic resources.
The final major change in Chapter 5 relates to derecognition. This is an area not previously covered by the
lo
framework. The IASB tentatively accepted the principles in the exposure draft relating to derecognition,
namely that accounting requirements for derecognition should aim to represent faithfully both:
G
 The assets and liabilities retained after the transaction or other event that led to the derecognition
A
(including any asset or liability acquired, incurred or created as part of the transaction or other
C
event); and
 The change in the entity‘s assets and liabilities as a result of that transaction or other event.
AC
These are some of the changes with significant work being done to many aspects of the framework.
NOTE: The revised Conceptual Framework for Financial Reporting (Conceptual Framework) issued in
March 2018 is effective immediately for the International Accounting Standards Board (Board) and the
IFRS Interpretations Committee. The details are included in exposure drafts at the end of these notes.
STANDARD SETTING PROCESS
The due process for developing an IFRS comprises of six stages:
1. Setting the agenda

2. Planning the project
3. Development and publication of Discussion Paper
4. Development and publication of Exposure Draft
5. Development and publication of an IFRS Standard
6. Procedures after a Standard is issued
11 | P a g e
REGULATORY FRAMEWORK
International Financial Reporting Standards Foundation (IFRS Foundation)
Responsible for governance of standard setting process. It oversees, funds, appoints and monitors the
operational effectiveness of:
x
Bo
b al
lo
G
PRINCIPLES VS RULES-BASED APPROACH

A
Rules-based accounting system

 Likely to be very descriptive
C
 Relies on a series of detailed rules or accounting requirements that prescribe how financial
statements should be prepared
AC
 Considered less flexible, but often more comparable and consistent, than a principles-based
system
 Can lead to looking for ‗loopholes‘
Principles-based accounting system

 It relies on generally accepted accounting principles that are conceptually based and are normally
underpinned by a set of key objectives
 More flexible than a rules-based system
 Require judgment and interpretation which could lead to inconsistencies between reporting
entities and can sometimes lead to the manipulation of financial statements
Because IFRSs are based on The Conceptual Framework for Financial Reporting, they are often regarded
as being a principles-based system.
12 | P a g e
PREPARATION OF FINANCIAL STATEMENTS FOR COMPANIES

IAS 1 Presentation of financial statements
A complete set of financial statements comprises:
 A statement of financial position

 A statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income
 A statement of changes in equity
 A statement of cash flows
 Accounting policies and explanatory notes
Recommended basic formats (no complex treatments included) for financial statements are as follows:
THE STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL POSITION
x
Bo
XYZ Co.
Statement of Financial Position as at 31 December 20X8
b al
lo
G
A
C
AC
13 | P a g e
Current assets include all items which:
 Will be settled within 12 months of the reporting date, or

 Are part of the entity's normal operating cycle.
Within the capital and reserves section of the statement of financial position, other components of equity
include:
 Revaluation reserve
 General reserve
STATEMENT OF CHANGES IN EQUITY
x
The statement of changes in equity provides a summary of all changes in equity arising from transactions
with owners in their capacity as owners.
Bo
This includes the effect of share issues and dividends.
XYZ Co.
al
Statement of changes in equity for the year ended 31 December 20X8
b
lo
G
A
C
AC
14 | P a g e
STATEMENT OF PROFIT OR LOSS AND OTHER COMPREHENSIVE INCOME
A recommended format for the statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income is as follows:
XYZ Co.
Statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income
for the year ended 31 December 20X8
x
Bo
b al
lo
G
A
C
AC
15 | P a g e
IAS 16 – PROPERTY, PLANT AND EQUIPMENT
OBJECTIVE:
The objective of IAS 16 is to prescribe the accounting treatment for property, plant, and equipment.
DEFINITIONS:
Property plant and equipment are tangible assets that:
 Are held for use in the production or supply of goods or services ,for rental to others, or for
administrative purposes; and
 Are expected to be used during more than one period.
ox
Carrying amount is the amount at which an asset is recognized after deducting any accumulated
depreciation and accumulated impairment losses
Depreciation is systematic allocation of the depreciable amount of assets over its useful life.
lB
Depreciable amount is the cost of an asset less its residual value.
ba
Residual Value is the estimated amount that an entity can obtain when disposing of an asset after its
useful life has ended. When doing this the estimated costs of disposing of the asset should be deducted.
There are essentially four key areas when accounting for property, plant and equipment:
lo
 Initial recognition and measurement

G
 Depreciation
 Revaluation
 Derecognition (disposals).
A
C
RECOGNITION CRITERIA
AC
PPE are recognized if
 It is probable that future economic benefits associated with the item will flow to the entity; and
 The cost of the item can be measured reliably.
Note: This criteria is applicable for both initial and subsequent recognition.
Aggregation and segmenting This IAS does not provide what constitute an item of property, plant
and equipment and judgment is required in applying the recognition criteria to specific circumstances or
types of enterprise. That is: -
i. It may be appropriate to aggregate individually insignificant items, such as moulds, tools dies,
etc.
ii. It may be appropriate to allocate total expenditure on an asset to its component parts and
16 | P a g e
iii. Account for each component separately e.g. an aircraft and its engines, parts of a furnace.
MEASUREMENT CRITERIA
Initial measurement:
PPE are initially recognized at the cost.
Elements of costs comprise:
 Its purchase price

 Any costs directly attributable to bringing the asset to the location and condition necessary
for it to be capable of operating,
 The initial estimate of the costs of dismantling and removing the item and restoring the site
on which it is located. The present value of dismantling cost will be added to the cost of asset
and provision will be created and the company will have to unwind this provision at every
year end. The amount will be recognized in statement of profit or loss as finance cost and
provision will be increased in statement of financial position. This treatment is as the
x
accounting for provision as per IAS 37, Provisions, Contingent Assets and Liabilities
 Directly attributable cost of bringing the assets to the location and condition necessary for the
Bo
intended performance, e.g.
 Costs of employees benefits arising directly from the construction or acquisition of property,
plant and equipment


The cost of site preparation
Initial delivery and handling costs
b al
 Installation costs
lo
 Cost of testing whether the asset is functioning properly after the net proceeds from the sale
of any trial production (samples produced while testing equipment)
G
 Professional fees (architects, engineers)

 Borrowing costs in accordance with IAS 23, Borrowing Costs.
A
Where these costs are incurred over a period of time (such as employee benefits), the period for which the
C
costs can be included in the cost of PPE ends when the asset is ready for use, even if the asset is not
brought into use until a later date. As soon as an asset is capable of operating it is ready for use. The fact
AC
that it may not operate at normal levels immediately, because demand has not yet built up, does not
justify further capitalisation of costs in this period. Any abnormal costs (for example, wasted material)
cannot be included in the cost of PPE.
IAS 16 does not specifically address the issue of whether borrowing costs associated with the financing of
a constructed asset can be regarded as a directly attributable cost of construction. This issue is addressed
in IAS 23, Borrowing Costs. IAS 23 requires the inclusion of borrowing costs as part of the cost of
constructing the asset. In order to be consistent with the treatment of ‗other costs‘, only those finance
costs that would have been avoided if the asset had not been constructed are eligible for inclusion. If the
entity has borrowed funds specifically to finance the construction of an asset, then the amount to be
capitalised is the actual finance costs incurred. Where the borrowings form part of the general borrowing
of the entity, then a capitalisation rate that represents the weighted average borrowing rate of the entity
should be used. (IAS 23 discussed in detail later)
17 | P a g e
The cost of the asset will include the best available estimate of the costs of dismantling and removing the
item and restoring the site on which it is located, where the entity has incurred an obligation to incur such
costs by the date on which the cost is initially established. This is a component of cost to the extent that it
is recognised as a provision under IAS 37, Provisions, Contingent Liabilities and Contingent Assets. In
accordance with the principles of IAS 37, the amount to be capitalised in such circumstances would be the
amount of foreseeable expenditure appropriately discounted where the effect is material.
Measurement of self constructed and exchanged assets
 Cost of self-constructed assets will be the cost of its production

 If an asset is exchanged, the cost will be measured at the fair value unless
(a) The exchange transaction lacks commercial substance or
(b) The fair value of neither the asset received nor the asset given up is reliably measurable. If the
acquired item is not measured at fair value, its cost is measured at the carrying amount of the
asset given up.
x
SUBSEQUENT COSTS (SUBSEQUENT RECOGNITION)
Bo
Once an item of PPE has been recognised and capitalised in the financial statements, a company may
incur further costs on that asset in the future. IAS 16 requires that subsequent costs should be capitalised
if:

al
It is probable that future economic benefits associated with the extra costs will flow to the
entity
b
 The cost of the item can be reliably measured.
lo
All other subsequent costs should be recognised as an expense in the statement of profit or loss in the
G
period that they are incurred.
MEASUREMENT SUBSEQUENT TO INITIAL RECOGNITION:

A
C
IAS 16 permits two accounting models:

AC
 Cost Model
 Revaluation Model
Under both models, the assets are reflected in statement of financial position at carrying value.
Carrying value:
Amount at which the asset is recognised after deducting any accumulated depreciation and accumulated
impairment losses.
DEPRECIATION OF PPE
IAS 16 defines depreciation as ‗the systematic allocation of the depreciable amount of an asset over its
useful life‘.
‗Depreciable amount‘ is the cost of an asset, cost less residual value, or other amount.
18 | P a g e
Depreciation is not providing for loss of value of an asset, but is an accrual technique that allocates the
depreciable amount to the periods expected to benefit from the asset. Therefore assets that are increasing
in value still need to be depreciated.
The depreciation method used should reflect the pattern in which the asset's economic benefits are
consumed by the entity; a depreciation method that is based on revenue that is generated by an activity
that includes the use of an asset is not appropriate.
IAS 16 requires that depreciation should be recognised as an expense in the statement of profit or loss,
unless it is permitted to be included in the carrying amount of another asset.
Depreciation begins when the asset is available for use and continues until the asset is derecognised, even
if it is idle.
Depreciation methods
A number of methods can be used to allocate depreciation to specific accounting periods. Two of the more
x
common methods, specifically mentioned in IAS 16, are the straight line method, and the reducing (or
Bo
diminishing) balance method.
 Straight line
• % on cost, or
• Cost – residual value

Useful economic life
Reducing balance
b al
• % on carrying value
lo
G
Useful economic lives and residual value
The assessments of the useful life (UL) and residual value (RV) of an asset are extremely subjective. They
A
will only be known for certain after the asset is sold or scrapped, and this is too late for the purpose of
computing annual depreciation. Therefore, IAS 16 requires that the estimates should be reviewed at the
C
end of each reporting period. If either changes significantly, then that change should be accounted for
over the remaining estimated useful economic life.
AC
Component depreciation
If an asset comprises two or more major components with different economic lives, then each component
should be accounted for separately for depreciation purposes and depreciated over its own useful
economic life.
Impairment:
An item of PPE shall not be carried at more than recoverable amount. Recoverable amount is the higher of
an asset's fair value less costs to sell and its value in use (Discussed in detail later).
MODELS FOR SUBSEQUENT MEASUREMENT
Cost Model
The asset is carried at cost less accumulated depreciation and impairment.
19 | P a g e
Revaluation Model
The asset is carried at a revalued amount, being its fair value at the date of revaluation less subsequent
depreciation and impairment, provided that fair value can be measured reliably.
The change from cost model to revaluation model is a change in accounting policy but is dealt with
prospectively.
REVALUATION MODEL
If the revaluation policy is adopted this should be applied to all assets in the entire category, i.e. if you
revalue a building, you must revalue all land and buildings in that class of asset. Revaluations must also
be carried out with sufficient regularity so that the carrying amount does not differ materially from that
which would be determined using fair value.
 Revalued assets are depreciated in the same way as under the cost model.
x
Accounting for a revaluation
Bo
There are a series of accounting adjustments that must be undertaken when revaluing a non-current
asset. These adjustments are indicated below.
The initial revaluation

b al
You may find it useful in the exam to first determine if there is a gain or loss on the revaluation with a
simple calculation to compare:
lo
G
A
Gain on revaluation should be credited to other comprehensive income and accumulated in equity
C
under the heading "revaluation surplus" unless it represents the reversal of a revaluation decrease of the
same asset previously recognized as an expense, in which case it should be recognized as income.
AC
Double entry:
 Dr Non-current asset cost (difference between valuation and original cost/valuation)

 Dr Accumulated depreciation (with any historical cost accumulated depreciation)
 Cr Revaluation reserve (gain on revaluation)
A loss on revaluation should be recognized as an expense to the extent that it exceeds any amount
previously credited to the revaluation surplus relating to the same asset.
A revaluation loss should be charged against any related revaluation surplus to the extent that the
decrease does not exceed the amount held in the revaluation reserve in respect of the same asset. Any
additional loss must be charged as an expense in the income statement.
20 | P a g e
Double entry:
 Dr Revaluation reserve (to maximum of original gain)

 Dr Statement of profit or loss (any residual loss)
 Cr Non-current asset (loss on revaluation)
Depreciation
The asset must continue to be depreciated following the revaluation. However, now that the asset has
been revalued the depreciable amount has changed. In simple terms the revalued amount should be
depreciated over the assets remaining useful economic life.
Reserves transfer
The depreciation charge on the revalued asset will be different to the depreciation that would have been
charged based on the historical cost of the asset. As a result of this, IAS 16 permits a transfer to be made of
an amount equal to the excess depreciation from the revaluation reserve to retained earnings.
x
Bo
Double entry: Dr Revaluation reserve Cr Retained earnings
This movement in reserves should also be disclosed in the statement of changes in equity.
EXAM FOCUS
b al
In the exam make sure you pay attention to the date that the revaluation takes place. If the revaluation
takes place at the start of the year then the revaluation should be accounted for immediately and
lo
depreciation should be charged in accordance with the rule above.
G
If however the revaluation takes place at the year-end then the asset would be depreciated for a full 12
months first based on the original depreciation of that asset. This will enable the carrying amount of the
asset to be known at the revaluation date, at which point the revaluation can be accounted for.
A
A further situation may arise if the examiner states that the revaluation takes place mid-way through the
C
year. If this were to happen the carrying amount would need to be found at the date of revaluation, and
therefore the asset would be depreciated based on the original depreciation for the period up until
AC
revaluation, then the revaluation will take place and be accounted for. Once the asset has been revalued
you will need to consider the last period of depreciation. This will be found based upon the revaluation
rules (depreciate the revalued amount over remaining useful economic life). This will be the most
complicated situation and you must ensure that your working is clearly structured for this; i.e. depreciate
for first period based on old depreciation, revalue, then depreciate last period based on new depreciation
rule for revalued assets.
DERECOGNITION
Property, plant and equipment should be derecognised when it is no longer expected to generate future
economic benefit or when it is disposed of.
When property, plant and equipment is to be derecognised, a gain or loss on disposal is to be calculated.
This can be found by comparing the difference between:
21 | P a g e
When the disposal proceeds are greater than the carrying value there is a profit on disposal and when the
disposal proceeds are less than the carrying value there is a loss on disposal.
Remove the asset from statement of financial position when disposed of or abandoned. Recognize any
resulting gain or loss in the statement of profit or loss.
Disposal of previously revalued assets
When an asset is disposed of that has previously been revalued, a profit or loss on disposal is to be
ox
calculated (as above). Any remaining surplus on the revaluation reserve is now considered to be a
‗realised‘ gain and therefore should be transferred to retained earnings as:
lB
 Dr Revaluation reserve
 Cr Retained earnings ba
lo
G
A
C
AC
22 | P a g e
IAS 38 - INTANGIBLE ASSETS
OBJECTIVE
The objective of this IAS is to prescribe accounting treatment for intangible assets.
INTANGIBLE ASSET - DEFINITION
An intangible asset is an identifiable non-monetary asset without physical substance held for use in the
production or supply of goods or services, for rental to others, or for administrative purposes.
Thus, the three critical attributes of an intangible asset are:
 Identifiability
 control (power to obtain benefits from the asset)
x
 future economic benefits (such as revenues or reduced future costs)
Bo
Intangible assets are business assets that have no physical form. Unlike a tangible asset, such as a
computer, you can‘t see or touch an intangible asset.
Identifiability:
An intangible asset can be termed identifiable if it:
b al
 is separable or
lo
 arises from contractual or other legal rights
G
An intangible asset needs to be identifiable to be recorded in financial statements. To be separable, the

asset should be capable of being disposed of on its own, with the remainder of the business being retained.
A
Goodwill can only be disposed of as part of the sale of a business, so is not separable. The lack of
identifiability prevents internally generated goodwill from being recognized.
C
Examples of intangible assets include:

AC
o Computer software
o Patents
o Copyrights
o Motion picture films
o Mortgage servicing rights
o Licenses
o Important quotes
o Franchises
o Marketing rights
Level of control
Another aspect of the definition of an intangible asset is that it must be under the control of the entity as a
consequence of a past event. The entity must be able to enjoy the future benefits from the asset and deter
external parties from access to those benefits. A legally enforceable right is an example of such control
but isn‘t a necessary prerequisite for determining control.
23 | P a g e
Some notable points to consider are:
a) Control over technical knowledge only exists if it is protected by a legal right

b) The skill of employees, arising out of the benefits of training costs, are unlikely to be considered as
intangible assets because of the relative uncertainty over the future actions of staff. The problem from
a control point of view is that the staff can leave at any point in time, taking their new skills with
them.
c) Market share and customer loyalty are also fickle by nature and cannot be considered as intangible
assets.
RECOGNITION AND MEASUREMENT
RECOGNITION CRITERIA
The recognition of an intangible asset requires an entity to demonstrate that the item meets:-
x
a) The definition of an intangible asset
b) The recognition criterion that:-
Bo
 It is probable that the expected economic benefits that are attributable to the asset will flow
to the entity; and

MEASUREMENT CRITERIA
b al
The cost of the asset can be measured reliably
lo
An intangible asset shall be measured initially at cost.
G
There are two types of intangible assets: those that are purchased and those that are internally generated.
The accounting treatment of purchased intangibles is relatively straightforward in that the purchase price
is capitalised in the same way as for a tangible asset. Accounting for internally-generated assets, however,
A
requires more thought.

C
Research & Development costs fall into the category of internally-generated intangible assets, and are
therefore subject to specific recognition (Discussed later).
AC
Separate rules for recognition and initial measurement exist for intangible assets depending on whether
they were:
 Acquired separately: At cost

 Acquired as part of a business combination: At fair value
 Acquired by way of a government grant: As per IAS 20
 Obtained in an exchange of assets: At fair value
 Generated internally (Discussed later)
Separate acquisition
The cost of a separately acquired intangible asset can be measured reliably when purchase consideration
is in the form of cash or other monetary assets. The cost comprises:-
24 | P a g e
a) Its purchase price, including import duties and non-refundable purchase taxes after deducting
trade discounts and rebates; and
b) Professional fees arising directly from bringing the asset to its working condition; and
c) Costs of testing whether the asset is functioning properly
Examples of expenditures that are NOT part of cost of an intangible asset are:-
a) Costs of introducing a new product or service (advertising cost)

b) Costs of conducting business in a new location or with a new class of customers (training cost of
staff)
c) Pre-operating losses, Administration and other general overheads
The capitalization of expenses ceases when the asset is ready for its intended use therefore; the
expenditures incurred afterwards are not capitalized.
Deferred payments
x
If the payment for an intangible asset is deferred beyond normal credit terms, its cost will be the cash
Bo
price equivalent. The difference between this amount and the total payments will be recognized as interest
expense or will be capitalized if meets the requirements of IAS-23.
Acquisition as part of business combination b al

An acquirer recognizes an intangible asset, distinct from goodwill, on the acquisition date if the asset‘s fair
value can be measured reliably, irrespective of whether the asset had been recognized by the acquiree
before the business combination (Research and development).
lo
The circumstances when an entity cannot measure the fair value are when the intangible asset arises from
G
legal or other contractual rights and either:-
a) Is not separable; or
A
b) Is separable, but there is no history or evidence of exchange transactions for the same or similar
C
assets, and otherwise estimating fair value would be depended on immeasurable variables.
AC
Acquisition by way of Government Grant
If an intangible asset is acquired through a government grant then the related asset and government grant
will be recognized as per the requirements of IAS-20.
Exchanges of asset
An asset may be acquired in exchange or part exchange for a non-monetary asset or assets, or a
combination of monetary and non-monetary assets.
The cost of such an item is the fair value unless the exchange transaction lacks commercial substance or
the fair value of the asset given up/ acquired is not reliably measureable, in which case the cost of the
asset acquired will be the carrying value of the asset given up.
The entity determines whether the exchange transaction has the commercial substance by considering the
extent to which its cash flows differ as a result of the transaction.
A transaction has commercial substance if:-
25 | P a g e
 The risk, timing and amount of cash flows of the asset acquired differ from the asset transferred.
 The entity specific value of the portion of the entity‗s operations affected by the transaction
changes as a result of the exchange (post tax cash flows).
 The difference in above two is significant relative to the fair value of the assets exchanged.
If the entity is able to measure the fair value of any of the asset given up/acquired then the cost of the new
asset is the fair value of the asset given up unless the fair value of the asset acquired is more reliable.
INTERNALLY GENERATED INTANGIBLE ASSETS
To assess whether an internally generated intangible assets meets the criteria for recognition, an
enterprise classifies the generation of the asset into RESEARCH and DEVELOPMENT.
Reason for spending money on R&D
Many businesses in the commercial world spend vast amounts of money, on an annual basis, on the
ox
research and development of products and services. These entities do this with the intention of developing
a product or service that will, in future periods, provide significant amounts of income for years to come.
lB
DEFINITIONS
Research is original and planned investigation undertaken with the prospect of gaining new scientific or
ba
technical knowledge and understanding.
An example of research could be a company in the pharmaceuticals industry undertaking activities or

lo
tests aimed at obtaining new knowledge to develop a new vaccine. The company is researching
the unknown, and therefore, at this early stage, no future economic benefit can be expected to flow to the
entity.
G
Development is the application of research findings or other knowledge to a plan or design for the
production of new or substantially improved materials, devices, products, processes, systems or services
A
before the start of commercial production or use.

C
An example of development is a car manufacturer undertaking the design, construction, and testing of a
pre-production model.
AC
ACCOUNTING TREATMENT
RESEARCH PHASE
It is impossible to demonstrate whether or not a product or service at the research stage will generate any
probable future economic benefit. As a result, IAS 38 states that all expenditure incurred at the research
stage should be written off to the statement of profit or loss as an expense when incurred, and will
never be capitalised as an intangible asset.
DEVELOPMENT PHASE
An intangible asset arising from development (or from the development phase of an internal project)
should be recognized as asset (capitalized) if, and only if, an enterprise can demonstrate all of the
following:
26 | P a g e
(a) The technical feasibility of completing the intangible asset so that it will be available for use or
sale;
(b) Its intention to complete the intangible asset and use or sell it;
(c) Its ability to use or sell the intangible asset;
(d) How the intangible asset will generate probable future economic benefits. Among other things,
the enterprise should demonstrate the existence of a market for the output of the intangible
asset or the intangible asset itself or, if it is to be used internally, the usefulness of the intangible
asset;
(e) The availability of adequate technical, financial and other resources to complete the
development and to use or sell the intangible asset; and
(f) Its ability to measure the expenditure attributable to the intangible asset during its development
reliably.
If any of the recognition criteria are not met then the expenditure must be charged to the statement of
profit or loss as incurred. Note that if the recognition criteria have been met, capitalisation must take
place.
Internally generated brands, mastheads, publishing titles, customer lists and similar items should not be
ox
recognised as intangible assets.
Treatment of capitalised development costs
lB
Once development costs have been capitalised, the asset should be amortised in accordance with the
accruals concept over its finite life. Amortisation must only begin when commercial production has
ba
commenced (hence matching the income and expenditure to the period in which it relates).
Each development project must be reviewed at the end of each accounting period to ensure that the
lo
recognition criteria are still met. If the criteria are no longer met, then the previously capitalised costs
must be written off to the statement of profit or loss immediately.
G
Past expense not be recognized as an asset

A
Expenditure on an intangible asset that was initially recognized as an expense shall not be recognized as
part of the cost of an intangible asset.
C
Cost of an internally generated intangible asset

AC
The cost comprises all directly attributable costs necessary to create, produce and prepare the asset to be
capable of operating in the manner intended by the management.
a) Costs, of materials and services used or consumed in generating the intangible asset;
b) Costs of employee benefits arising from the generation of intangible assets
c) Fees to register a legal right; and
d) Amortization of patents and licenses that are used to generate the intangible asset
The following are NOT components of the cost of an internally generated intangible asset:
(a) Selling, administrative and other general overhead expenditure unless this expenditure can be
directly attributed to preparing the asset for use;
(b) Clearly identified inefficiencies and initial operating losses incurred before an asset achieves
planned performance; and
(c) Expenditure on training staff to operate the asset.
27 | P a g e
SUBSEQUENT MEASUREMENT OF INTANGIBLE ASSETS
COST MODEL
After initial recognition, an intangible asset shall be carried at its cost less any accumulated amortization
and any accumulated impairment loss.
REVALUATION MODEL
After initial recognition an intangible asset whose fair value can be determined with reference to the
active market shall be carried at revalued amount, less subsequent accumulated amortization and
subsequent accumulated impairment losses.
x
Bo
Classification of intangible assets based on useful life
Intangible assets are classified as having:

al
Indefinite life: no foreseeable limit to the period over which the asset is expected to generate
net cash inflows for the entity.
Finite life: a limited period of benefit to the entity.
b
lo
An entity shall assess whether the useful life of an intangible asset is finite or indefinite and if finite, the
length of, or number of production or similar units constituting, that useful life.
G
An intangible asset shall be regarded by the entity as having an indefinite useful life when, based on an
analysis of all of the relevant factors, there is no foreseeable limit to the period over which the asset is
A
expected to generate net cash inflows for the entity

C
The useful life of an intangible asset that is not being amortized shall be reviewed in each period to
determine whether events and circumstances continue to support an indefinite useful life assessment for
AC
that asset. If they do not, the change in the useful life assessment from indefinite to finite shall be
accounted for as change in an accounting estimate in accordance with IAS 8 Accounting Policies, Changes
in Accounting Estimates and Errors.
Amortisation and Impairment
 The depreciable amount of an intangible asset with a finite useful life shall be allocated on a
systematic basis over its useful life.
 The amortization method should reflect the pattern of benefits
 Amortise when commercial production begins
 The amortization period and the amortization method for an intangible asset with a finite useful
life shall be reviewed at least at each financial year end.
 An intangible asset with an indefinite useful life shall not be amortized but will be tested for
impairment at every reporting date.
 The recoverable amount of the asset should be determined at least at each financial year end and
any impairment loss should be accounted for in accordance with IAS 36.
28 | P a g e
DISPOSAL
Remove from statement of financial position when disposed of or abandoned. Recognize any gain or loss
in the statement of profit or loss.
GOODWILL
Goodwill is not normally recognised in the accounts of a business at all. The reason for this is that
goodwill is considered inherent in a business and it does not have any objective value.
Purchased goodwill
There is one exception to the principle that goodwill has no objective value, this is when a business is sold.
Purchased goodwill is shown in the statement of financial position because it has been paid for. It has no
tangible substance, and so it is an intangible non-current asset. It is dealt with under IFRS 3 Business
x
Combinations
Bo
SUBSEQUENT EXPENDITURE
Due to the nature of intangible assets, subsequent expenditure will only rarely meet the criteria for being
al
recognised in the carrying amount of an asset. Subsequent expenditure on brands, mastheads, publishing
titles, customer lists and similar items must always be recognised in profit or loss as incurred.
b
lo
G
A
C
AC
29 | P a g e
IAS 36 – IMPAIRMENT OF ASSETS
OBJECTIVE
The objective of this IAS is to set rules to ensure that the assets of an enterprise are carried at no more
than their recoverable amount.
DEFINITIONS
 Recoverable amount is the higher of an asset‘s net selling price and its value in use.
 Value in use is the present value of estimated future cash flows expected to arise from the
continuing use of an asset and from its disposal at the end of its useful life.
 Net selling price the amount obtainable from the sale of an asset in an arm‘s length transaction
between knowledgeable, willing parties, less the costs of disposal.
 An impairment loss is the amount by which the carrying amount of an asset exceeds its recoverable
x
amount.
Bo
 A cash-generating unit is the smallest identifiable group of assets that generates cash inflows from
continuing use that are largely independent of the cash inflows from other assets or groups of assets.
 Corporate assets are assets other than goodwill that contribute to the future cash flows of both the
cash-generating unit under review and other cash-generating units.
IMPAIRMENT ASSESSMENT
b al
An enterprise should assess at each reporting date: -
lo
a) Whether there is any indication that an asset may be impaired;

G
b) Irrespective of any indication of impairment, an entity shall also: -

 Test in case of intangible assets having indefinite life or under development; and
 Test goodwill acquired in business combination for impairment annually
A
External sources of information include:

C
 Decline in asset‘s market value significantly more than expected


AC
Significant changes with an adverse effect in the technological, market, economic or legal
environment in which the enterprise operates;
 Market interest rates or other market rates of return on investments have increased during the
period, and those increases are likely to affect the discount rate used in calculating an asset‘s
value in use and decrease the asset‘s recoverable amount materially
Internal sources of information include:

 Obsolescence or physical damage
 Significant changes with an adverse effect in the extent to which, or manner in which, an asset is
used or is expected to be used. These changes include plans to discontinue or restructure the
operation to which an asset belongs.
 Economic performance of an asset is worse than expected.
Other evidence from internal reporting may be: -
 Cash flows for acquiring and maintaining the asset are significantly higher than the originally
budgeted;
 Actual cash flows are worst that the budgeted; and
 Operating losses or net cash outflows when current period amounts are aggregated with the
budgeted amounts for the future
30 | P a g e
MEASURING RECOVERABLE AMOUNT
x
Bo
Entities have to bear in mind the following steps and considerations when evaluating an asset‘s
recoverable amount:
al
1. Recoverable amount is the higher of an asset‘s net selling price and its value in use
2. It is not always necessary to determine both an asset‘s net selling price and its value in use. For
b
example, if either of these amounts exceeds the asset‘s carrying amount, the asset is not impaired
lo
and it is not necessary to estimate the other amount.
3. If asset is held for disposal then present value of cash flow from the use of asset until its disposal
G
are likely to be negligible, in this case recoverable amount shall be equal to the selling price.
4. If it is not possible to determine the fair value less costs to sell because there is no active market
for the asset, the company can use the asset's value in use as its recoverable amount. Similarly, if
A
there is no reason for the asset's value in use to exceed its fair value less costs to sell, then the
latter amount may be used as its recoverable amount.
C
For example, where an asset is being held for disposal, the value of this asset is likely to be the net
AC
disposal proceeds. The future cashflows from this asset from its continuing use are likely to be negligible
5.
Recoverable amount is determined for an individual asset. If the asset does not generate cash
flows independent from other assets. This asset is clubbed to cash generating unit and
impairment loss is calculated of this cash-generating unit.
Measurement of net selling price (Value in sale)
 Price in Binding Sale Agreement less Disposal Cost.
 Cost of disposal includes legal costs, stamp duty and similar transaction taxes, costs of removing
the asset, and direct incremental costs to bring an asset into condition for its sale.
Measurement of Value in Use
Estimating the value in use of an asset involves the following steps:
 Estimating the future cash inflows and outflows to be derived from continuing use of the asset
and from its ultimate disposal; and
 Applying the appropriate discount rate to these future cash flows.
31 | P a g e
It is important that any cashflows projections are based upon reasonable and supportable assumptions
over a maximum period of five years unless it can be proven that longer estimates are reliable. They
should be based upon most recent financial budgets and forecasts.
Discount Rate
 The discount rate should be a pre-tax rate.
 It should reflect the current market assessments of the time value of money and the risks that
relate to the asset for which the future cashflows have not yet been adjusted.
RECOGNITION AND MEASUREMENT OF IMPAIRMENT LOSS
If, and only if, the recoverable amount of an asset is less than its carrying amount, the carrying amount of
the asset should be reduced to its recoverable amount. That reduction is an impairment loss.
x
Bo
b al
An impairment loss should be recognized as an expense in the statement of profit or loss
immediately, unless the asset is carried at revalued amount. An impairment loss on a revalued asset is
recognized directly against any revaluation surplus for the asset to the extent that the impairment loss
lo
does not exceed the amount held in the revaluation surplus for that same asset.
G
After the recognition of an impairment loss, the depreciation (amortization) charge for the asset should be
adjusted in future periods to allocate the asset‘s revised carrying amount, less its residual value (if any),
on a systematic basis over its remaining useful life.
A
C
CASH GENERATING UNIT

AC
A cash generating unit (CGU) is the smallest identifiable group of assets for which independent cash flows
can be identified and measured. For example, for a restaurant chain a CGU might be each individual
restaurant.
Identification of Cash-Generating Unit to which an asset belongs

 If there is any indication that an asset may be impaired, recoverable amount should be estimated
for the individual asset. If it is not possible to estimate the recoverable amount of the individual
asset, an enterprise should determine the recoverable amount of the cash-generating unit to
which the asset belongs (the asset‘s cash-generating unit).
 The recoverable amount of an individual asset cannot be determined if:

o The asset‘s value in use cannot be estimated to be close to its net selling price (for
example, when the future cash flows from continuing use of the assets cannot be
estimated to be negligible); and
o The asset does not generate cash inflows from use that are independent of those from
other asset. In such cases, value in use and, therefore recoverable amount, can be
determined only for the asset‘s cash-generating unit.
32 | P a g e
o An asset‘s cash generating unit is the smallest group of assets that includes the asset and
that generates cash inflows from continuing use that are largely independent of the cash
inflows from other assets or groups of assets.
Recoverable amount and carrying amount of cash generating unit
The recoverable amount of a cash-generating unit is the higher of the cash-generating unit‘s net selling
price and value in use.
The carrying amount of a cash-generating unit includes the carrying amount of only those assets that can
be attributed directly, or allocated on a reasonable and consistent basis, to the cash-generating unit and
that will generate the future cash inflows estimated in determining the cash-generating unit‘s value in use.
Goodwill
 As goodwill acquired in a business combination does not generate cash flows independently of
other assets, it must be allocated to each of the acquirer‘s cash generating units
x
 A CGU to which goodwill has been allocated is tested for impairment annually. The carrying
Bo
amount of the CGU including the goodwill is compared with its recoverable amount.
RECOGNITION OF IMPAIRMENT LOSS OF CASH-GENERATING UNIT
al
An impairment loss should be recognized for a cash-generating unit if, and only if, its recoverable amount
is less than its carrying amount. The impairment loss should be allocated to reduce the carrying amount
b
of the assets of the unit in the following order:
lo
 First to any asset that is impaired (e.g. if an asset was specifically damaged)
 Second, to goodwill in the cash generating unit
G
 Third, to all other assets in the CGU on a pro rata basis based on carrying value
A
These reductions in carrying amounts should be treated as impairment losses on individual assets.
C
In allocating in impairment loss, the carrying amount of an asset should not be reduced below the highest
of:
AC
If this rule is applied then the impairment loss not allocated to the individual asset will be allocated on a
pro-rata basis to the other assets of the group.
33 | P a g e
REVERSAL OF IMPAIRMENT LOSS
An enterprise should assess at each reporting date whether there is any indication that an impairment loss
recognized for an asset in prior years may no longer exist or may have decreased. If any such indication
exists, the enterprise should estimate the recoverable amount of that asset.
Considerations on reversal of an impairment loss for an individual asset:
 The increase in carrying value of the asset due to a reversal on impairment loss can only be up to
should not exceed the carrying amount that would have been determined (net of amortization or
depreciation) had no impairment loss been recognized for the asset in prior years.
 A reversal of an impairment loss been recognized as income immediately in the statement of
profit or loss, unless the asset is carried at revalued amount (for example, under the allowed
alternative treatment in IAS 16, Property, Plant and Equipment). Any reversal of an impairment
loss on a revalued asset should be treated as a revaluation increase as per the respective standard.
 A reversal of an impairment loss on a revalued asset is credited directly to equity under the
x
heading revaluation surplus. However, to the extent that an impairment loss on the same
revalued asset was previously recognized as an expense in the statement of profit or loss, a
Bo
reversal of that impairment loss is recognized, as income in the statement of profit or loss.
After a reversal of an impairment loss is recognized, the depreciation (amortization) charge for the asset
should be adjusted in future periods to allocate the asset‘s revised carrying amount, less its residual value
b al
(if any), on a systematic basis over its remaining useful life.
Considerations on reversal of an impairment loss for a cash generating unit:

lo
A reversal of an impairment loss for a cash-generating unit should be allocated to increase the carrying
amount of the asset of the unit in the following order:
G
 First, reverse on assets other than goodwill on a pro-rata basis based on the carrying amount of
each asset in the unit; and
A
 An impairment loss recognized for goodwill shall not be reversed in a subsequent period.
C
AC
34 | P a g e
IAS 40-INVESTMENT PROPERTY
OBJECTIVE
The objective of this Standard is to prescribe the accounting treatment for investment property and
related disclosure requirements.
DEFINITIONS:
Investment property is property held to earn rentals or for capital appreciation or both, rather than
for:
a) Use in the production or supply of goods or services or for administrative purposes; or
b) Sale in the ordinary course of business.
Owner-occupied property is property held (by the owner or by the lessee under a finance lease) for
x
use in the production or supply of goods or services or for administrative purposes.
Bo
CLASSIFICATION
The following are examples of investment property:
a)
b)
c)
al
Land held for long-term capital appreciation
Land held for a currently undetermined future use
b
Building leased out under operating lease
lo
d) A building that is vacant but is held to be leased out under one or more operating leases.
e) Property that is being constructed or developed for future use as investment property
G
The following are examples of items that are not investment property:
A
a) Property held for use in the production or supply of goods or services or for
administrative purposes
C
b) Property held for sale in the ordinary course of business or in the process of construction
of development for such sale (IAS 2 Inventories)
AC
c) Property being constructed or developed on behalf of third parties

d) Owner-occupied property (IAS 16 Property, Plant and Equipment), including property
held for future use as owner-occupied property, property held for future development and
subsequent use as owner-occupied property, property occupied by employees and owner-
occupied property awaiting disposal
e) Property leased to another entity under a finance lease
Property held under an operating lease.
A property interest that is held by a lessee under an operating lease may be classified and accounted for as
investment property provided that:
 The rest of the definition of investment property is met

 The operating lease is accounted for as if it were a finance lease in accordance with IFRS 16
Leases
 The lessee uses the fair value model set out in this Standard for the asset recognised
35 | P a g e
An entity may make the foregoing classification on a property-by-property basis.
Partial own use
If the owner uses part of the property for its own use, and part to earn rentals or for capital appreciation,
and the portions can be sold or leased out separately, they are accounted for separately. Therefore the part
that is rented out is investment property. If the portions cannot be sold or leased out separately, the
property is investment property only if the owner-occupied portion is insignificant.
Ancillary services
If the entity provides ancillary services to the occupants of a property held by the entity, the
appropriateness of classification as investment property is determined by the significance of the services
provided. If those services are a relatively insignificant component of the arrangement as a whole (for
instance, the building owner supplies security and maintenance services to the lessees), then the entity
may treat the property as investment property. Where the services provided are more significant (such as
in the case of an owner-managed hotel), the property should be classified as owner-occupied.
ox
Intra-company rentals
Property rented to a parent, subsidiary, or fellow subsidiary is not investment property in consolidated
lB
financial statements that include both the lessor and the lessee, because the property is owner-occupied
from the perspective of the group. However, such property could qualify as investment property in the
separate financial statements of the lessor, if the definition of investment property is otherwise met.
ba
RECOGNITION:
lo
Investment property shall be recognized as an asset when
G
(a) It is probable that the future economic benefits that are associated with the investment property will
flow to the entity; and
(b) The cost of the investment property can be measured reliably.
A
MEASUREMENT
C
Initial measurement
 An investment property shall be measured initially at its Cost + Transaction costs.
AC
 The cost of a purchased investment property = Purchase price + any directly attributable
expenditure.
The cost should not include start-up costs, abnormal waste, or initial operating losses incurred before the
investment property achieves the planned level of occupancy.
Subsequent expenditure
This should be added to the carrying amount of the investment property when it is probable that future
economic benefits in excess of the originally assessed standard of performance of the existing investment
property will flow to the enterprise. All other subsequent expenditure should be recognized as an expense
in the period in which it is incurred.
36 | P a g e
Exchanges of assets
An investment property may be acquired in exchange or part exchange for a non-monetary asset or assets
or a combination of monetary and non-monetary assets.
The cost of such an item is the fair value unless the exchange transaction lacks commercial substance or
the fair value of the asset given up / acquired is not reliably measurable. Then the cost of the asset
acquired will be the carrying value of the asset given up
SUBSEQUENT MEASUREMENT
IAS 40 permits entities to choose between
 A fair value model, and

 A cost model.
COST MODEL:
x
Bo
Under cost model, investment property should be measured at depreciated cost, less any accumulated
impairment losses.
FAIR VALUE MODEL

Under the fair value model the entity should:

b al
Revalue all its investment property to 'fair value' (open market value) at the end of each financial
year, and
lo
 Take the resulting gain or loss to profit or loss for the period in which it arises.
G
Fair value is the price that would be received to sell an asset or paid to transfer a liability, in an orderly
transaction between market participants at the measurement date.
A
Investment property is remeasured at fair value, which is the amount for which the property could be
exchanged between knowledgeable, willing parties in an arm's length transaction.
C
Fair value should reflect the actual market state and circumstances as of the reporting date. The best
AC
evidence of fair value is normally given by current prices on an active market for similar property in the
same location and condition and subject to similar lease and other contracts. In the absence of such
information, the entity may consider current prices for properties of a different nature or subject to
different conditions, recent prices on less active markets with adjustments to reflect changes in economic
conditions, and discounted cash flow projections based on reliable estimates of future cash flows.
There is a rebuttable presumption that the entity will be able to determine the fair value of an investment
property reliably on a continuing basis. However:
 If an entity determines that the fair value of an investment property under construction is not
reliably determinable but expects the fair value of the property to be reliably determinable when
construction is complete, it measures that investment property under construction at cost until
either its fair value becomes reliably determinable or construction is completed.
 If an entity determines that the fair value of an investment property (other than an investment
property under construction) is not reliably determinable on a continuing basis, the entity shall
measure that investment property using the cost model in IAS 16. The residual value of the
37 | P a g e
investment property shall be assumed to be zero. The entity shall apply IAS 16 until disposal of
the investment property.
Where a property has previously been measured at fair value, it should continue to be measured at fair
value until disposal, even if comparable market transactions become less frequent or market prices
become less readily available.
COST MODEL
The cost model is the same treatment in IAS 16. Investment property should be measured at cost less
accumulated depreciation less any accumulated impairment losses. An enterprise that chooses the cost
model should disclose the fair value of its investment property.
Adoption and change of models
One method must be adopted for all of an entity's investment property. Change is permitted only if this
results in a more appropriate presentation. IAS 40 notes that this is highly unlikely for a change from a
x
fair value model to a cost model.
Bo
TRANSFERS:
Transfers to, or from, investment property should only be made when there is a change in use, evidenced
by one or more of the following:

al
Commencement of owner-occupation (transfer from investment property to owner-occupied
property)
b
lo
 Commencement of development with a view to sale (transfer from investment property to
inventories)

G
End of owner-occupation (transfer from owner-occupied property to investment property)

 Commencement of an operating lease to another party (transfer from inventories to investment
property)

A
End of construction or development (transfer from property in the course of

construction/development to investment property
C
When an entity decides to sell an investment property without development, the property is not
AC
reclassified as inventory but is dealt with as investment property until it is derecognised.
RULES FOR TRANSFER:
 For a transfer from investment property carried at fair value to owner-occupied property or
inventories, the fair value at the change of use is the 'cost' of the property under its new
classification
 For a transfer from owner-occupied property to investment property carried at fair value, IAS 16
should be applied up to the date of reclassification. Any difference arising between the carrying
amount under IAS 16 at that date and the fair value is dealt with as a revaluation under IAS 16
 For a transfer from inventories to investment property at fair value, any difference between the
fair value at the date of transfer and it previous carrying amount should be recognized in profit or
loss
 When an entity completes construction/development of an investment property that will be
carried at fair value, any difference between the fair value at the date of transfer and the previous
carrying amount should be recognized in profit or loss.
38 | P a g e
When an entity uses the cost model for investment property, transfers between categories do not change
the carrying amount of the property transferred, and they do not change the cost of the property for
measurement or disclosure purposes.
DISPOSAL
An investment property should be derecognized on disposal or when the investment property is

permanently withdrawn from use and no future economic benefits are expected from its disposal.
 The gain or loss on disposal should be calculated as the difference between the net disposal
proceeds and the carrying amount of the asset and should be recognized as income or expense
 Compensation from third parties is recognized when it becomes receivable.
ACCOUNTING TREATMENT DIFFERENCE – Fair value model & Revaluation model
Superficially, the revaluation model and fair value sound very similar; both require properties to be valued
x
at their fair value which is usually a market-based assessment (often by an independent valuer).
Bo
However, any gain (or loss) over a previous valuation is taken to profit or loss if it relates to an investment
property, whereas for an owner-occupied property, any gain is taken to a revaluation reserve (via other
comprehensive income and the statement of changes in equity).
al
A loss on the revaluation of an owner-occupied property is charged to profit or loss unless it has a
previous surplus in the revaluation reserve which can be used to offset the loss until it is exhausted. A
b
further difference is that owner-occupied property continues to be depreciated after revaluation, whereas
investment properties are not depreciated.
lo
G
A
C
AC
39 | P a g e
IAS 2 – INVENTORIES
OBJECTIVE
The objective of this IAS is to prescribe the accounting treatment of inventories.
DEFINITIONS
Inventories are assets; -
a) Held for sale in the ordinary course of business
b) In the process of production for such sale; or (work in progress, finished goods awaiting
to be sold)
c) In the form of materials or supplies to be consumed in the production process or in the
rendering of services
Net Realizable Value is the estimated selling price in the ordinary course of business less the estimated
costs of completion and the estimated cost necessary to make a sale.
x
Bo
MEASUREMENT OF INVENTORIES
Inventory shall be measured at the lower of cost and net realizable value.
COST OF INVENTORIES b al
The cost of inventories will comprise all costs of purchase, costs of conversion and other costs incurred in
bringing the inventories to their present location and condition.
lo
(a) Purchase cost comprise the;
G
i) Purchase price plus;

ii) Import duties and other non –refundable taxes;
iii) Transport, handling and any other cost directly attributable to the acquisition of finished
goods, services and materials; less
A
iv) Trade discounts, rebates and other similar amounts

C
(b) Cost of conversion

i) Costs directly related to the units of production (direct labor); and
AC
ii) Systematic allocation of fixed and variable production overheads that are incurred in
converting materials into finished goods. (Factory rent, depreciation of machinery,
supervisor salary, power consumption)
The allocation of fixed overheads to the costs of conversion is based on the normal capacity of the
production facilities.
(c) Other cost incurred in bringing the inventories to their present location and condition (i.e. non
production overheads or costs of designing products for specific customers).
The Standard excludes the following from the cost of inventories
a) The abnormal amount of wasted material, labor or other production cost;

b) Storage costs unless necessary for production before the further production process/stage;
c) Administrative overheads that do not contribute to bringing inventories to their present location
and condition;
d) Selling cost
40 | P a g e
e) Foreign exchange differences arising directly on the recent acquisition of inventories invoiced in a
foreign currency
f) Interest cost when inventories are purchased with deferred settlement terms
Costs of Inventories of a service provider
The cost of inventories of service providers includes primarily the labour and other cost of the personnel
directly engaged in providing the service including supervisory personnel and directly attributable
overheads.
COST FORMULAS
For items that are interchangeable, IAS 2 allows the FIFO or weighted average cost formulas.
The LIFO formula, which had been allowed prior to the 2003 revision of IAS 2, is no longer allowed.
NET REALIZABLE VALUE
x
As a general rule assets should not be carried at amounts greater than those expected to be realized from
Bo
their sale or use. In case of inventories this amount could fall below cost when items are damaged or
become wholly or partially obsolete, or where the costs to completion have increased in order to make the
sale or the prices have declined. (Prudence Concept).
The principal situations in which NRV is likely to be less than cost, i.e. where there has been:


An increase in costs or a fall in selling price
b al
A physical deterioration in conditions of inventory
lo
 Obsolescence of products
 A decision as part of the company‘s marketing strategy to manufacture and sell products at a loss
G
 Errors in production or purchasing
RULES:
A
 The write down of inventories would normally take place on an item-by-item basis but similar or
C
related items may be grouped together (in case of service provider each service will be treated as
item).
AC
 The NRV should be based on the most reliable evidence available at the time of estimates are
made.
 Fluctuations after reporting date should also be taken into account to the extent they confirm the
conditions existing at the reporting date.
 The estimate of NRV should also take into account the purpose for which the inventory is held
(firm sale / purchase contracts).
 Materials or supplies held for use in the production process should not be written down below
cost if the finished products in which they will be incorporated are expected to be sold at or above
cost. Otherwise, when the decline in the value of materials indicates that the cost of finished
goods exceeds NRV, the materials should be written down to NRV.
 NRV should be reassessed at each reporting date and necessary adjustments such as further
reduction or increase in NRV should be made however, reversal of write down is limited to the
original write down of inventories.
 Material reductions should be disclosed separately
41 | P a g e
RECOGNITION AS EXPENSE
The following treatment is required, when inventories are sold.
a) The carrying amount is recognized as an expense in the period in which the related
revenue is recognized (matching concept)
b) The amount of any write down of inventories to NRV and all losses of inventories are
recognized as an expense in the period in which the related write down or loss occurred
c) The amount of any reversal of any write down of inventories, arising from the increase in
NRV is recognized as a reduction in the amount of inventories recognized as an expense
in the period in which the reversal occurs.
The inventories allocated to other assets i.e. when the inventory becomes the part of cost of self-
constructed assets, the inventories are recognized as an expense over the useful life of those assets.
x
Bo
b al
lo
G
A
C
AC
42 | P a g e
IAS 41 – AGRICULTURE
OBJECTIVE
The objective of IAS 41 is to establish standards of accounting for agricultural activity
SCOPE
Within scope are Biological assets, Agricultural produce at the point of harvest and Government grants
related to biological assets.
Excluded from scope are Land and Intangible assets related to agricultural activity
DEFINITIONS
x
ACTIVE MARKET:
Bo
Exists when; the items traded are homogenous, willing buyers and sellers can normally be found at any
time and prices are available to the public.
AGRICULTURAL ACTIVITY:
b al
lo
The management of the transformation of a biological asset for sale into agricultural produce or another
biological asset.
G
Biological asset: A living animal or plant.
Agricultural produce: The harvested produce of the entity‘s biological assets.

A
C
Biological transformation: The process of growth, degeneration, production, and procreation that
cause an increase in the value or quantity of the biological asset.
AC
Harvest: The process of detaching produce from a biological asset or cessation of its life.
Bearer plant: A living plant that:
a. Is used in the production or supply of agricultural produce

b. Is expected to bear produce for more than one period, and
c. Has a remote likelihood of being sold as agricultural produce, except for incidental scrap sales.
Costs to sell: The incremental costs directly attributable to the disposal of an asset, excluding finance
costs and income taxes
43 | P a g e
RECOGNITION
Biological assets or agricultural produce are recognised when:
 Entity controls the asset as a result of a past event

 Probable that future economic benefit will flow to the entity; and
 Fair value or cost of the asset can be measurement reliably.
MEASUREMENT
Biological assets
Biological assets within the scope of IAS 41 are measured on initial recognition and at subsequent
reporting dates at fair value less estimated costs to sell, unless fair value cannot be reliably measured.
x
If no reliable measurement of fair value (no quoted market price in an active market and alternative fair
Bo
value measurements unreliable), biological assets are stated at cost less accumulated depreciation and
accumulated impairment losses.
If circumstances change and fair value becomes reliably measurable, a switch to fair value less costs is
required.
Agricultural produce
b al
lo
Agricultural produce is measured at fair value less estimated costs to sell at the point of harvest.
G
Unlike a biological asset, there is no exception in cases in which fair value cannot be measured reliably.
According to IAS 41, agricultural produce can always be measured reliably because harvested produce is a
A
marketable commodity.
C
Point of-sale costs include brokers‘ and dealers‘ commissions, any levies by regulatory authorities and
commodity exchanges, and any transfer taxes and duties. They exclude transport and other costs
AC
necessary to get the assets to a market.
Treatment of gain/loss
 The gain on initial recognition of biological assets at fair value less costs to sell, and changes in
fair value less costs to sell of biological assets during a period, are included in profit or loss.
 A gain on initial recognition (e.g. as a result of harvesting) of agricultural produce at fair value
less costs to sell are included in profit or loss for the period in which it arises.
 All costs related to biological assets that are measured at fair value are recognised as expenses
when incurred, other than costs to purchase biological assets.
44 | P a g e
Government grants
An unconditional government grant related to a biological asset measured at fair value less estimated
point-of-sale costs is recognised as income when, and only when, the government grant becomes available
A conditional government grant, including where a government grant requires an entity not to engage
in specified agricultural activity, is recognised as income in profit or loss when and only when, the
conditions of the grant are met.
OTHER ISSUES
 The change in fair value of biological assets is part physical change (growth, etc) and part unit
price change. Separate disclosure of the two components is encouraged, not required.
 Agricultural produce is measured at fair value less costs to sell at harvest, and this measurement
is considered the cost of the produce at that time (for the purposes of IAS 2 Inventories or any
other applicable standard).
 Agricultural land is accounted for under IAS 16 Property, Plant and Equipment.
x
However, biological assets (other than bearer plants) that are physically attached to land are
measured as biological assets separate from the land. In some cases, the determination of the fair
Bo
value less costs to sell of the biological asset can be based on the fair value of the combined asset
(land, improvements and biological assets).
 Intangible assets relating to agricultural activity (for example, milk quotas) are accounted for
under IAS 38 Intangible Assets. b al
lo
G
A
C
AC
45 | P a g e
IAS 23-BORROWING COST
OBJECTIVE:
To prescribe the accounting treatment for borrowing cost.
DEFINITIONS:
Borrowing costs are interest and other costs, incurred by an entity in connection with the borrowing of
funds in order to construct an asset.
Borrowing cost includes
 Interest on bank overdraft and short term borrowing;

 Finance lease charges in respect of finance lease; and
x
 Exchange differences arising from foreign currency borrowings to the extent that they are
Bo
regarded as an adjustment of interest cost
 Issuance costs
 Discount on issuance and premium on redemption
b al
Qualifying asset: A qualifying asset is an asset that necessarily takes a substantial period of time to get
ready for its intended use or sale (e.g. inventories, manufacturing plants, power generation facilities,
intangible assets, investment properties etc.). However, financial assets, inventories produced over short
lo
period of time and assets ready for intended sale are not qualifying assets.
G
ACCOUNTING TREATMENT:
Recognition
A
An entity should capitalize the borrowing costs that are directly attributable to the acquisition,
C
construction or production of a qualifying asset as part of the cost of that asset and, therefore, should be
capitalized.
AC
Other borrowing costs are expensed in statement of profit or loss when occurred.
Return on any surplus funds invested is first deducted from the amount of interest and then the
remaining amount is capitalized.
Specific Funds
The borrowing cost of funds, borrowed specifically for the qualifying asset, is the actual cost incurred on
the funds during the period less any investment income on the temporary investment of funds.
General funds
The borrowing cost of funds, borrowed generally, will be determined by applying a capitalization rate to
the expenditures incurred on those assets. The capitalization rate is the weighted average rate of the
borrowings cost applicable to the borrowings of the entity outstanding during that period other than
specific borrowings. The amount of borrowing cost capitalized during a period should not exceed the
borrowing costs incurred during the period. (Group borrowings)
46 | P a g e
Excess of carrying amount of the qualifying asset over recoverable amount
When the carrying amount exceeds the recoverable amount of that asset, the asset should be written down
to its recoverable value. (IAS 36)
PERIOD OF CAPITALIZATION
Commencement of capitalization
The capitalization commences: -
 Expenditures for the assets are being incurred;

 Borrowing costs are being incurred; and
 Activities necessary to prepare the asset for its intended use/sale are in progress
Expenditures on a qualifying asset include only those expenditures, which have resulted in transfer of
cash/other asset or assumption of interest bearing liabilities and will be reduced by any Government
x
Grant (IAS –20).
Bo
The activities necessary to complete the qualifying asset include beside physical construction the
technical/administrative work such as obtaining permits prior to physical construction. However, such
activities exclude the holding of an asset when no production or development that changes the asset‘s
condition is taking place (e.g. borrowing cost incurred while land is under development are capitalized
Suspension of capitalization
b al
during the period when activities related to the development are in progress).
lo
Capitalization should cease when during the extended period the active development is interrupted.
Examples are:-
G
 Borrowing costs incurred during extended periods when activities to prepare an asset for
its intended use/sale are interrupted (costs of holding partially completed assets)
A
 On temporary delays the capitalization is not suspended (Geographical region involved -

delays due to high water levels, inventories to mature for sale, due to bad weather, strikes
C
etc)
AC
Cessation of capitalization
The capitalization should cease, when substantially all the activities necessary to complete the qualifying
asset for its intended use/sale are complete (physical construction is complete, administrative or
decorative work may continue).
When the construction of a qualifying asset is in parts the capitalization of borrowing cost should cease,
when the relevant part is complete for its intended use/sale (building park).
DISCLOSURE
 The accounting policy adopted.
 Amount of borrowing cost capitalized during the period.
 Capitalization rate used.
47 | P a g e
IAS-20 ACCOUNTING FOR GOVERNMENT GRANTS AND
DISCLOSURE OF GOVERNMENT ASSISTANCE
OBJECTIVE
To prescribe the accounting for, and disclosure of, government grants and other forms of government
assistance.
SCOPE
IAS 20 applies to all government grants and other forms of government assistance. However, it does not
cover government assistance that is provided in the form of benefits in determining taxable income. It
does not cover government grants covered by IAS 41 Agriculture, either. The benefit of a government loan
at a below-market rate of interest is treated as a government grant.
x
DEFINITIONS
Bo
Government refers to government, government agencies and similar bodies whether local, national or
international.
Government assistance is provision of economic benefits by government to a specific entity or range

al
of entities which meet specific criteria. Government assistance for the purpose of this Standard does not
include benefits provided only indirectly through action affecting general trading conditions, such as the
b
provision of infrastructure in development areas or the imposition of trading constraints on competitors.
lo
Government grants are transfer of resources to an entity, from government, in return for compliance
with certain conditions.
G
It is the assistance by government in the form of transfers of resources to an entity in return for past or
future compliance with certain conditions relating to the operating activities of the entity. They exclude
A
those forms of government assistance which cannot reasonably have a value placed upon them and
transactions with government which cannot be distinguished from the normal trading transactions of the
C
entity (subsidies, subvention, or premiums).

AC
RECOGNITION
A government grant is recognized only when there is reasonable assurance that
 The entity will comply with any conditions attached to the grant
 The grant will be received.
The grant is recognised as income over the period necessary to match them with the related costs, for
which they are intended to compensate, on a systematic basis.
Non-monetary grants
Non-monetary grants such as land or other resources, are usually accounted for at fair value, although
recording both the asset and the grant at a nominal amount is also permitted.
48 | P a g e
Assistance without conditions
Even if there are no conditions attached to the assistance specifically relating to the operating activities of
the entity (other than the requirement to operate in certain regions or industry sectors), such grants
should not be credited to equity.
Compensation of already incurred costs
A grant receivable as compensation for costs already incurred or for immediate financial support, with no
future related costs, should be recognised as income in the period in which it is receivable.
GRANT RELATED TO ASSET
Grant related to depreciable assets are recognized over the useful life of the assets in the proportion of
depreciation charge.
Grant related to non-depreciable assets are also recognized over the period in which related expenses are
x
made.
Bo
If grants are received as a package of financial or fiscal aids to which a number of conditions are attached
then reasons giving rise to costs and expenses should be identified and it may be appropriate to allocate
part of grant on one basis and part on another basis.
Presentation of grant related to asset

b al
A grant relating to assets may be presented in one of two ways:
lo
 As deferred income, or
 By deducting the grant from the asset's carrying amount.
G
GRANT RELATED TO INCOME

A
Such grants are recognized over the period and matched with the related expenses.
C
Presentation of grant related to income

AC
A grant relating to income may be reported separately as 'other income' or deducted from the related
expense.
Repayment:
 If the conditions of a grant are breached, it may need to be repaid.

 A government grant that becomes repayable shall be accounted for as a revision to an accounting
estimate (IAS –8).
 Repayment of a grant related to income shall be applied first against any un-amortized deferred
credit and if repayment exceeds the deferred credit the rest will be recognized immediately as
expense.
 Repayment of grants related to assets shall be recorded by increasing the carrying amount of the
asset or reducing the deferred income balance by the amount payable. The cumulative additional
depreciation that would have been recognized to date as an expense in the absence of the grant
shall be recognized immediately as an expense.
49 | P a g e
Disclosure:
The following must be disclosed:
 Accounting policy adopted for grants, including method of statement of financial position
presentation
 Nature and extent of grants recognized in the financial statements
 Unfulfilled conditions and contingencies attaching to recognized grant
GOVERNMENT ASSISTANCE
Government grants do not include government assistance whose value cannot be reasonably measured,
such as technical or marketing advice.
The government grants are not recognized because no value can be assigned to them or they are not
x
distinguishable from the other transactions of the entity if material shall be disclosed.
Bo
b al
lo
G
A
C
AC
50 | P a g e
IAS-8
ACCOUNTING POLICIES, CHANGES IN ACCOUNTING
ESTIMATES AND ERRORS
OBJECTIVE
The objective of this Standard is to prescribe the criteria for selecting and changing accounting policies,
the accounting treatment and disclosure of changes in accounting policies, accounting estimates and
corrections of errors.
ACCOUNTING POLICIES
Definitions:
x
Accounting Policies are the specific principles, bases, conventions, rules and practices applied by an
entity in preparing and presenting financial statements.
Bo
Material Omissions or misstatements of items are material if they could, influence the economic
decisions that users make on the basis of the financial statements.
SELECTION OF ACCOUNTING POLICIES

b al
Management selects accounting policies by applying accounting standards or using judgment:
lo
Compulsory - Where a specific standard relates to a transaction or event, the accounting policy applied
to that item shall be determined by applying that standard.
G
Voluntary - Where there is no specific standard to deal with a particular transaction, event or condition,
management shall develop and apply accounting policies resulting in reliable .and more relevant
A
information.
C
In developing accounting policy management should consider:

AC
a) The requirements and guidance of accounting standards dealing with similar and related issues;
and
b) The contents of the Accounting Framework for the Preparation and Presentation of Financial
statements (The Framework).
CHANGE IN ACCOUNTING POLICIES
The management can change accounting policy under the following circumstances:
Compulsory - Where a change is required by a specific standard or interpretation (external).
Voluntary - Management determines that a change in policy will result in the financial statements
providing reliable and more relevant information (internal).
51 | P a g e
Consistency in accounting policies
Although accounting policies can and sometimes must be changed in order to achieve comparability there
is an underlying requirement to be consistent in the selection and application of accounting policies.
To improve comparability, consistency requires that the same accounting policies should be applied to
similar items within each period, and from one period to the next.
Meaning of Relevant and Reliable
Relevant information helps the user to make economic decisions.
Reliable financial statements:
 Present faithfully the effects of transaction on financial position, financial performance and cash
flows;
x
 Reflect the economic substance or transactions, other events and conditions
 Be neutral (no bias or error)
Bo
 Be prudent
 Be complete in all material respects.
Application of Changes in Accounting Policy

al
The change in accounting policy is applied retrospectively
b
Compulsory/Specific - Where a new standard/Interpretation forces a change in accounting policy and
lo
that standard has specific transitional provisions then the entity must apply those provisions in
accounting for the change.
G
Compulsory/Non-Specific - Where the change in accounting policy is compulsory but with no specific
A
transitional provisions, the change shall be applied retrospectively.

C
Voluntary - Where the change is voluntary, the change shall be applied retrospectively.
AC
Retrospective application
It is applying a new accounting policy to transactions and other events as if that policy had always been
applied, i.e. make prior period adjustments.
This means restating the opening balance of equity for the earliest prior period presented and the other
comparative amounts disclosed for each prior period presented as if the new accounting policy had always
been applied.
Items NOT changes in accounting policy
IAS 8 states that the introduction of an accounting policy to account for transactions where circumstances
have changed are not a change in accounting policy.
Similarly, a policy for transactions that did not occur previously or that were immaterial is not a change in
policy and therefore would be applied prospectively.
52 | P a g e
Limitations of Retrospective Application
IAS 8 does not permit the use of hindsight when applying a new accounting policy, either in making
assumptions about what management's intentions would have been in a prior period or in estimating
amounts to be recognised, measured or disclosed in a prior period.
When it is impracticable to determine the effect of a change in accounting policy on comparative

information, the entity is required to apply the new policy to the carrying amounts of the assets and
liabilities as at the beginning of the earliest period for which retrospective application is practicable. This
could actually be the current period but the entity should attempt to apply the policy from the earliest date
possible.
The application of the requirement of a standard or interpretation is "impracticable" if the entity cannot
apply it after making every effort to do so.
Disclosures for Changes in Accounting Policies
x
When initial application of the standard or interpretation has an effect on current or prior periods, would
have an effect but it is impracticable to determine, or might have an effect, then entities shall disclose:
Bo
 The title of the Standard or Interpretation;
 If applicable, that the changes were made in accordance with the transitional provisions;
 The nature of the change; b al
In addition, for voluntary changes in accounting policies, a description must be provided of the reason for
the new policy providing reliable and more relevant information.
lo
CHANGES IN ACCOUNTING ESTIMATES
G
Definition
A
A change in accounting estimate is an adjustment of the carrying amount of an asset or liability, or

related expense, resulting from reassessing the expected future benefits and obligations associated with
C
that asset or liability.

AC
Where the basis of measurement for the amount to be recognised is uncertain, an entity will use an
estimation technique, which is a normal part of the preparation of the financial statements without
undermining their reliability.
Estimates involve judgments based on the latest available, reliable information and are applied in
determining the useful lives of property, plant and equipment, provisions, fair values of financial assets
and liabilities and actuarial assumptions relating to defined benefit pension schemes.
Many items in financial statements cannot be measured with precision but will be estimated. Estimation
involves judgment based on the latest available reliable information. Examples include:
 Estimating the recoverability of receivables at the year end, i.e. bad debts
 Inventory obsolescence
 Fair values of assets/liabilities
 Determining the remaining useful lives of; or the expected patterns of consumption of
depreciable assets
 Estimating Income tax expenses
53 | P a g e
Comparison between change in accounting policy and estimate
Accounting estimates need to be distinguished from accounting policies as the effect of a change in an
estimate is reflected in the Statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income, whereas a change
in accounting policy will generally require a prior period adjustment. If there is a change in the
circumstances on which the estimate was based or new information has arisen or more experience
relating to the estimation process has occurred, then the estimate may need to be changed. A change in
the measurement basis is not a change in an accounting estimate, but is a change in accounting policy. For
example, if there is a move from historical cost to fair value, this is a change in accounting policy but a
change in the method of depreciation is a change in accounting estimate.
Accounting for changes in estimates
The effect of a change in an accounting estimate shall be recognized prospectively by including it in profit
or loss in:
x
The period of the change, if the change affects that period only e.g. change is estimated irrecoverable
and doubtful debts; or
Bo
 The period of the change and future periods, if the change affects both e.g. change in useful life of a
depreciable asset.
To the extent that a change in an accounting estimate gives rise to changes in assets and liabilities, or
liability or equity item in the period of the change.

b al
relates to an item of equity, it shall be recognized by adjusting the carrying amount of the related asset,
ERRORS
lo
Prior period errors are omissions from, and misstatements in, the entity‘s financial statements for one
G
or more prior periods arising from a failure to use, or misuse of, reliable information that:

A
Was available when financial statements for those periods were authorized for issue; and
 Could reasonably be expected to have been obtained and taken into account in the preparation and
C
presentation of those financial statements.

Accounting for errors
AC
An entity shall correct material prior period errors retrospectively in the first set of financial statements
authorized for issue after their discovery by:
 restating the comparative amounts for the prior period(s) presented in which the error occurred; or
 if the error occurred before the earliest prior period presented, restating the opening balances of
assets, liabilities and equity for the earliest prior period presented
54 | P a g e
IAS 10 - EVENTS AFTER REPORTING DATE
OBJECTIVE
To prescribe:
 When an entity should adjust its financial statements for events after the reporting period; and
 The disclosures that an entity should give about the date when the financial statements were
authorized for issue and about events after the reporting period.
The Standard also requires that an entity should not prepare its financial statements on a going concern
basis if events after the reporting period indicate that the going concern assumption is not appropriate.
DEFINITIONS
x
Event after the reporting period occurs between the end of the reporting period and the date that the
financial statements are authorized for issue. These include:
Bo
 Adjusting events provide evidence of conditions that existed at the end of the reporting period.
 Non-adjusting events are those that are indicative of conditions that arose after the reporting
period.
ACCOUNTING TREATMENT:
b al

lo
Adjust financial statements for adjusting events
 Do not adjust for non-adjusting events
 If an entity declares dividends after the reporting period, the entity shall not recognize those
G
dividends as a liability at the end of the reporting period. That is a non-adjusting event.
 An entity shall not prepare its financial statements on a going concern basis if management
determines after the reporting period either that it intends to liquidate the entity or to cease
A
trading.
C
ADJUSTING EVENTS – EXAMPLES

AC
Adjusting events, as is evident by the name, require adjustments in the financial statements. Following
are some examples:
 Invoices received in respect of goods or services received before the year end
 The resolution after the reporting date of a court case giving rise to a liability
 Evidence of impairment of assets, such as news that a major customer is going into liquidation or the
sale of inventories below cost
 Discovery of fraud or errors showing that financial statements were incorrect
 Determination of employee bonuses/profit shares
 The tax rates applicable to the financial year are announced
 The auditors submit their fee
 The sale of a non-current asset at a loss indicates that it was impaired at the reporting date
 The bankruptcy of a customer indicates that their debt was irrecoverable at the reporting date
 The sale of inventory at less than cost indicates that it should have been valued at NRV in the
accounts
 The determination of cost or proceeds of assets bought/sold during the accounting period indicates at
what amount they should be recorded in the accounts
55 | P a g e
NON-ADJUSTING EVENTS – EXAMPLES
Usually non-adjusting events do not require adjustments. However, if the event is of such importance that
its non-disclosure will affect the economic decision making of users it should be disclosed in the notes to
the accounts. Some examples of non-adjusting events are as follows:
 Business combinations
 Discontinuance of an operation
 Major sale/purchase of assets
 Destruction of major assets in natural disasters
 Major restructuring
 Major share transactions
 Unusual changes in asset prices/foreign exchange rates
 Commencing major litigation
 A purchase or sale of a non-current asset

x
The destruction of assets due to fire or flood
 The announcement of plans to discontinue an operation
Bo
 An issue of shares
Dividends
al
If an entity declares dividends to holders of equity instruments after the reporting period but before the
financial statements, the entity shall not recognise those dividends as a liability at the end of the reporting
period. This is because no obligation exists at that time. Such dividends are disclosed in the notes.
b
lo
Going concern
G
An entity shall not prepare its financial statements on a going concern basis if management determines
after the reporting period either that it intends to liquidate the entity or to cease trading, or that it has no
realistic alternative but to do so.
A
DISCLOSURE
C
Non-adjusting events should disclose the nature and financial effect of the event if its non-disclosure
AC
would affect the judgment of users in making decisions.
Companies must disclose the following
 When the financial statements were authorized for issue

 Who gave that authorization
 Who has the power to amend the financial statements after issuance
56 | P a g e
IAS 37 – PROVISONS, CONTINGENT LIABILITIES AND

CONTINGENT ASSETS
OBJECTIVE
The objective of this IAS is to ensure that appropriate recognition criteria and measurement bases are
applied to provisions, contingent liabilities and contingent assets.
PROVISIONS
DEFINITIONS
 A provision is a liability of uncertain timing or amount.
 An obligating event is an event that creates a legal or constructive obligation that results in an
enterprise having no realistic alternative to settling that obligation.
x
 A legal obligation is an obligation that derives from:
Bo
(a) A contract (through its explicit or implicit terms);
(b) Legislation; or
(c) Other operation of law.

al
A constructive obligation is an obligation that derives from an enterprise‘s action where:
b
lo
(a) By an established pattern of past practice, published policies or a sufficiently specific current
statement, the enterprise has indicated to other parties that it will accept certain responsibilities;
and
G
(b) As a result, the enterprise has created a valid expectation on the part of those other parties that it
will discharge those responsibilities.
A
 An onerous contract is a contract in which the unavoidable costs of meeting the obligations under
the contract exceed the economic benefits expected to be received under it.
C
 A restructuring is a program that is planned and controlled by management, and materially

AC
changes either:
(a) The scope of a business undertaken by an enterprise; or

(b) The manner in which that business is conducted.
RECOGNITION
A provision shall be recognized when:
a) An entity has a present obligation (legal or constructive) as a result of a past event;

b) It is possible than an outflow of resources embodying economic benefits will be required to settle
the obligation; and
c) A reliable estimate can be made of amount of the obligation.
If these conditions are not met, no provision shall be recognized.
57 | P a g e
Present obligation
In rare cases it is not clear whether there is a present obligation. In the cases, a past event is deemed to
give rise to a present obligation if, taking account of all available evidence, it is more likely than not that a
present obligation exists at the reporting date.
Past event
A past event that leads to a present obligation is called an obligating event. For an event to be an
obligating event, it is necessary that the entity has no realistic alternative to settling the obligation created
by the event. This is the case only:
a) Where the settlement of the obligation can be enforced by law; or

b) In the case of a constructive obligation, where the event (which may be an action of the entity)
creates valid expectations in other parties that the entity will discharge the obligation.
MEASUREMENT
x
Bo
The amount recognized as a provision shall be the best estimate of the expenditure required to settle the
present obligation at the reporting date. This means that:
 Provisions for one-off events (restructuring, environmental clean-up, settlement of a lawsuit) are
measured at the most likely amount.
al
 Provisions for large populations of events (warranties, customer refunds) are measured at a
probability-weighted expected value.
b
 Both measurements are at discounted present value using a pre-tax discount rate that reflects the
lo
current market assessments of the time value of money and the risks specific to the liability.
G
In reaching its best estimate, the enterprise should take into account the risks and uncertainties that
surround the underlying events. Expected cash outflows should be discounted to their present values,
A
where the effect of the time value of money is material.

C
Reimbursement
AC
If some or all of the expenditure required to settle a provision is expected to be reimbursed by another
party, the reimbursement should be recognized as a reduction of the required provision when, and only
when, it is virtually certain that reimbursement will be received if the enterprise settles the obligation. The
amount recognized should not exceed the amount of the provision.
In SOFP, reimbursement should be shown as an asset and provision should be shown at gross amount
however, in statement of profit or loss they can be netted off.
Re-measurement of provisions
 Review and adjust provisions at each reporting date
 If outflow is no longer probable, reverse the provision to income statement.
58 | P a g e
Application of recognition and measurement rules

Some specific requirements on applying recognition and measurement rules are as follows:
 Future operating losses
Provisions shall not be recognized for future operating losses.
 Onerous contracts
If an entity has a contract that is onerous, the present obligation under the contract shall be
recognized and measured as a provision.
RESTRUCTURING
The following are examples of events that may fall under the definition of restructuring:
 Sale or termination of a line of business

 Closure of business locations
x
 Changes in management structure
Bo
 Fundamental re-organization of company
Restructuring provisions should be accrued as follows:
is after reporting date, disclose but do not accrue

b al
Sale of operation: Accrue provision only after a binding sale agreement. If the binding sale agreement
Closure or re-organization: Accrue only after a detailed formal plan is adopted and announced
lo
publicly. A board decision is not enough.
G
Restructuring provision on acquisition (merger): Accrue provision for terminating employees,

closing facilities, and eliminating product lines only if announced at acquisition and, then only if a
detailed formal plan is adopted 3 months after acquisition.
A
A management or board decision to restructure taken before the reporting date does not give rise to a
C
constructive obligation at the reporting date unless the entity has, before the reporting date:
AC
a) Stated to implement the restructuring plan; or

b) Announced the main features the restructuring plan to those affected by it in a sufficiently specific
manner to raise a valid expectation in them that the entity will carry out the restructuring.
If an entity starts to implement a restructuring plan, or announces its main features to those affected, only
after the reporting date, disclosure is required under IAS 10 Events after the Reporting Date, if the
restructuring is material and non-disclosure could influence the economic decisions of users taken on the
basis of the financial statements.
Restructuring provisions should include only direct expenditures caused by the restructuring, not costs
that associated with the ongoing activities of the enterprise such as: -
a) Retraining or relocating continuing staff;

b) Marketing; or
c) Investment in new systems and distribution networks
59 | P a g e
CONTINGENT LIABILITIES
Definition
A contingent liability is:

(a) A possible obligation that arises from past events and whose existence will be confirmed only by
the occurrence or non-occurrence of one or more uncertain future events not wholly within the
control of the enterprise; or
(b) A present obligation that arises from past events but is not recognized because:
(i) It is not probably that an outflow of resources embodying economic benefits will be
required to settle the obligation; or
(ii) The amount of the obligation cannot be measured with sufficient reliability.
Accounting treatment
 An enterprise should not recognize a contingent liability.
x
 A contingent liability is disclosed in financial statements, unless the possibility of an outflow of
resources embodying economic benefits is remote.
Bo
Where an enterprise is jointly and severally liable for an obligation, the part of the obligation that is
expected to be met by other parties is treated as a contingent liability.
al
The enterprise recognizes a provision for the part of the obligation for which an outflow of resources
embodying economic benefits is probable, except in the extremely rare circumstances where no reliable
estimate can be made.
b
lo
Contingent liabilities may develop in a way not initially expected. Therefore, they are assessed continually
to determine whether an outflow of resources embodying economic benefits has become probable. If it
G
becomes probable that an outflow of future economic benefits will be required for an item previously dealt
with as a contingent liability, a provision is recognized in the financial statements of the period in which
the change in probability occurs (except in the extremely rare circumstances where no reliable estimate
A
can be made.)
C
CONTINGENT ASSETS
AC
Definition
A contingent asset is a possible asset that arises from past events and whose existence will be
confirmed only by the occurrence or non-occurrence of one or more uncertain future events not wholly
within the control of the enterprise.
 An enterprise should not recognize a contingent asset.
 A contingent asset is disclosed in financial statements, where an inflow of economic benefits is
probable.
Contingent assets usually arise from unplanned or other unexpected events that give rise to the possibility
of an inflow of economic benefits to the enterprise. An example is a claim that an enterprise is pursuing
through legal processes, where the outcome is uncertain.
Contingent assets are not recognized in financial statements since may result in the recognition of income
that may never be realized. However, when the realization of income is virtually certain, then the related
asset is not a contingent asset and its recognition is appropriate.
60 | P a g e
Contingent assets are assessed continually to ensure that developments are appropriately reflected in the
financial statements. If it has become virtually certain that an inflow of economic benefits will arise, the
asset and the related income are recognized in the financial statements of the period in which the change
occurs. If an inflow of economic benefits has become probable, an enterprise discloses the contingent
asset.
Examples of Provisions
x
Bo
b al
lo
G
A
C
AC
61 | P a g e
IFRS 16 - LEASES
OBJECTIVE
IFRS 16 establishes principles for the recognition, measurement, presentation and disclosure of leases,
with the objective of ensuring that lessees and lessors provide relevant information that faithfully
represents those transactions.
SCOPE
IFRS 16 Leases applies to all leases, including subleases, except for:
 Leases to explore for or use minerals, oil, natural gas and similar non-regenerative resources;
 Leases of biological assets held by a lessee (see IAS 41 Agriculture);
 Licences of intellectual property granted by a lessor (see IFRS 15 Revenue from Contracts with
x
Customers); and

Bo
Rights held by a lessee under licensing agreements for items such as films, videos, plays,
manuscripts, patents and copyrights within the scope of IAS 38 Intangible Assets
KEY DEFINITIONS
Interest rate implicit in the lease
b al
The interest rate that yields a present value of (a) the lease payments and (b) the unguaranteed residual
value equal to the sum of (i) the fair value of the underlying asset and (ii) any initial direct costs of the
lo
lessor.
G
Lease term
The non-cancellable period for which a lessee has the right to use an underlying asset, plus:
A
i. Periods covered by an extension option if exercise of that option by the lessee is reasonably
certain; and
C
ii. Periods covered by a termination option if the lessee is reasonably certain not to exercise that
option
AC
Lessee’s incremental borrowing rate
The rate of interest that a lessee would have to pay to borrow over a similar term, and with a similar
security, the funds necessary to obtain an asset of a similar value to the right-of-use asset in a similar
economic environment.
LEASE – IMPORTANCE OF IFRS 16
A lease is an agreement whereby the lessor (the legal owner of an asset) conveys to the lessee (the user of
the asset) the right to use an asset for an agreed period of time in exchange for consideration (return for a
payment or series of payments).
The approach of IAS 17 was to distinguish between two types of lease. Leases that transfer substantially all
the risks and rewards of ownership of an asset were classified as finance leases. All other leases were
classified as operating leases. The lease classification set out in IAS 17 was subjective and there was a
clear incentive for the preparers of lessee‘s financial statements to ‗argue‘ that leases should be classified
62 | P a g e
as operating rather than finance leases in order to enable leased assets and liabilities to be left out of the
financial statements.
It was for this reason that IFRS 16 was introduced.
IFRS 16 - ASSETS
IFRS 16 defines a lease as 'A contract, or part of a contract, that conveys the right to use an asset for a
period of time in exchange for consideration'. In order for such a contract to exist the user of the asset
needs to have the right to:
 Obtain substantially all of the economic benefits from the use of the asset.
 The right to direct the use of the asset.
An ‘identified asset’
One essential feature of a lease is that there is an ‗identified asset‘. This normally takes place through the
x
asset being specified in a contract, or part of a contract.
Bo
A contract is, or contains, a lease if it conveys the right to control the use of an identified asset for a
period of time in exchange for consideration.
al
Control is conveyed where the customer has both the right to direct the identified asset‘s use and to
obtain substantially all the economic benefits from that use.
b
An asset is typically identified by being explicitly specified in a contract, but an asset can also be identified
lo
by being implicitly specified at the time it is made available for use by the customer.
G
For the asset to be ‗identified‘ the supplier of the asset must not have the right to substitute the asset for
an alternative asset throughout its period of use. The fact that the supplier of the asset has the right or the
obligation to substitute the asset when a repair is necessary does not preclude the asset from being an
A
‗identified asset‘.
C
A capacity portion of an asset is still an identified asset if it is physically distinct (e.g. a floor of a building).
A capacity or other portion of an asset that is not physically distinct (e.g. a capacity portion of a fiber optic
AC
cable) is not an identified asset, unless it represents substantially all the capacity such that the customer
obtains substantially all the economic benefits from using the asset.
Example – identified assets
Under a contract between a local government authority (L) and a private sector provider (P), P provides L
with 20 trucks to be used for refuse collection on behalf of L for a six-year period. The trucks, which are
owned by P, are specified in the contract. L determines how they are used in the refuse collection process.
When the trucks are not in use, they are kept at L‘s premises. L can use the trucks for another purposes if
it so chooses. If a particular truck needs to be serviced or repaired, P is required to substitute a truck of
the same type. Otherwise, and other than on default by L, P cannot retrieve the trucks during the six-year
period.
Conclusion: The contract is a lease. L has the right to use the 20 trucks for six years which are identified
and explicitly specified in the contract. Once delivered to L, the trucks can be substituted only when they
need to be serviced or repaired.
63 | P a g e
The right to direct the use of the asset
IFRS 16 states that a customer has the right to direct the use of an identified asset if either:
 The customer has the right to direct how and for what purpose the asset is used throughout its
period of use, or
 The relevant decisions about use are pre-determined and the customer has the right to operate
the asset throughout the period of use without the supplier having the right to change these
operating instructions.
Example – the right to direct the use of an asset
A customer (C) enters into a contract with a road haulier (H) for the transportation of goods from London
to Edinburgh on a specified truck. The truck is explicitly specified in the contract and H does not have
substitution rights. The goods will occupy substantially all of the capacity of the truck. The contract
specifies the goods to be transported on the truck and the dates of pickup and delivery.
x
H operates and maintains the truck and is responsible for the safe delivery of the goods. C is prohibited
Bo
from hiring another haulier to transport the goods or operating the truck itself.
Conclusion: This contract does not contain a lease.
to substitute that specified truck.

b al
There is an identified asset. The truck is explicitly specified in the contract and H does not have the right
C does have the right to obtain substantially all of the economic benefits from use of the truck over the
lo
contract period. Its goods will occupy substantially all of the capacity of the truck, thereby preventing
other parties from obtaining economic benefits from use of the truck.
G
However, C does not have the right to control the use of the truck because C does not have the right to
direct its use. C does not have the right to direct how and for what purpose the truck is used. How and for
A
what purpose the truck will be used (i.e. the transportation of specified goods from London to Edinburgh
within a specified timeframe) is predetermined in the contract. C has the same rights regarding the use of
C
the truck as if it were one of many customers transporting goods using the truck.
AC
Separating components of a contract
For a contract that contains a lease component and additional lease and non-lease components, such as
the lease of an asset and the provision of a maintenance service, lessees shall allocate the consideration
payable on the basis of the relative stand-alone prices, which shall be estimated if observable prices are
not readily available.
As a practical expedient, a lessee may elect, by class of underlying asset, not to separate non-lease
components from lease components and instead account for all components as a lease.
Lessors shall allocate consideration in accordance with IFRS 15 Revenue from Contracts with Customers.
ACCOUNTING FOR LEASES
With a very few exceptions (discussed later) IFRS 16 basically abolishes the distinction between an
operating lease and a finance lease in the financial statements of lessees. Lessees will recognise a right of
use asset and an associated liability at the inception of the lease.
64 | P a g e
IFRS 16 basically requires that the ‘right of use asset’ and the lease liability should initially be
measured at the present value of the minimum lease payments. The discount rate used to determine
present value should be the rate of interest implicit in the lease.
RECORDING THE ASSET
The ‗right of use asset‘ would include the following amounts, where relevant:
 Any payments made to the lessor at, or before, the commencement date of the lease, less any lease
incentives received.
 Any initial direct costs incurred by the lessee.
 An estimate of any costs to be incurred by the lessee in dismantling and removing the underlying
asset, or restoring the site on which it is located (unless the costs are incurred to produce
inventories, in which case they would be accounted for in accordance with IAS 2 – Inventories).
Costs of this nature are recognised only when an entity incurs an obligation for them. IAS 37 –
Provisions, Contingent Liabilities and Contingent Assets would be applied to ascertain if an
obligation existed.
x
Bo
Depreciation
The right of use asset is subsequently depreciated. Depreciation is over the shorter of the useful life of the
asset and the lease term, unless the title to the asset transfers at the end of the lease term, in which case
depreciation is over the useful life.
LEASE LIABILITY
b al
lo
The lease liability is effectively treated as a financial liability which is measured at amortised cost, using
the rate of interest implicit in the lease as the effective interest rate.
G
Example – accounting for leases

A
A lessee enters into a 20-year lease of one floor of a building, with an option to extend for a further five
years. Lease payments are $80,000 per year during the initial term and $100,000 per year during the
C
optional period, all payable at the end of each year. To obtain the lease, the lessee incurred initial direct
costs of $25,000.
AC
At the commencement date, the lessee concluded that it is not reasonably certain to exercise the option to
extend the lease and, therefore, determined that the lease term is 20 years. The interest rate implicit in
the lease is 6% per annum. The present value of the lease payments is $917,600.
At the commencement date, the lessee incurs the initial direct costs and measures the lease liability
$917,600.
The carrying amount of the right of use asset after these entries is $942,600 ($917,600 + $25,000) and
consequently the annual depreciation charge will be $47,130 ($942,600 x 1/20).
The lease liability will be measured using amortised cost principles. In order to help us with the example
in the following section, we will measure the lease liability up to and including the end of year two. This is
done in the following table:
65 | P a g e
At the end of year one, the carrying amount of the right of use asset will be $895,470 ($942,600 less
$47,130 depreciation).
The interest cost of $55,056 will be taken to the statement of profit or loss as a finance cost.
The total lease liability at the end of year one will be $892,656. As the lease is being paid off over 20 years,
some of this liability will be paid off within a year and should therefore be classed as a current liability.
ox
To find this figure, we look at the remaining balance following the payment in year two. Here, we can see
that the remaining balance is $866,215. This will represent the non-current liability, being the amount of
the $892,656 which will still be outstanding in over a year. The current liability element is therefore
$26,441. This represents the $80,000 paid in year two less year two‘s finance costs of $53,559 (or
lB
$892,656-$866,215).
Points to remember
ba
Upon lease commencement a lessee recognises a right-of-use asset and a lease liability.
The right-of-use asset is initially measured at the amount of the lease liability plus any initial direct
lo
costs incurred by the lessee. Adjustments may also be required for lease incentives, payments at or prior
to commencement and restoration obligations or similar.
G
After lease commencement, a lessee shall measure the right-of-use asset using a cost model, unless:
b. The right-of-use asset is an investment property and the lessee fair values its investment
A
property under IAS 40; or

c. The right-of-use asset relates to a class of PPE to which the lessee applies IAS 16‘s
C
revaluation model, in which case all right-of-use assets relating to that class of PPE can be
revalued.
AC
Under the cost model a right-of-use asset is measured at cost less accumulated depreciation and
accumulated impairment.
The lease liability is initially measured at the present value of the lease payments payable over the
lease term, discounted at the rate implicit in the lease if that can be readily determined. If that rate
cannot be readily determined, the lessee shall use their incremental borrowing rate.
Variable lease payments
Variable lease payments are the payments that depend on an index or a rate are included in the initial
measurement of the lease liability and are initially measured using the index or rate as at the
commencement date. Amounts expected to be payable by the lessee under residual value guarantees are
also included.
Variable lease payments that are not included in the measurement of the lease liability are recognised in
profit or loss in the period in which the event or condition that triggers payment occurs, unless the costs
are included in the carrying amount of another asset under another Standard.
The lease liability is subsequently remeasured to reflect changes in:
66 | P a g e
 The lease term (using a revised discount rate);

 The assessment of a purchase option (using a revised discount rate);
 The amounts expected to be payable under residual value guarantees (using an unchanged
discount rate); or
 Future lease payments resulting from a change in an index or a rate used to determine those
payments (using an unchanged discount rate).
The re-measurements are treated as adjustments to the right-of-use asset.
Lease modifications may also prompt re-measurement of the lease liability unless they are to be treated as
separate leases.
RECOGNITION EXEMPTIONS
A simplified approach for short-term or low-value leases – Exception
Instead of applying the recognition requirements of IFRS 16 described above, a lessee may elect to
x
account for lease payments as an expense on a straight-line basis over the lease term or another
Bo
systematic basis for the following two types of leases:
i) Leases with a lease term of 12 months or less and containing no purchase options – this
election is made by class of underlying asset; and
ii)
al
Leases where the underlying asset has a low value when new (such as personal computers or
small items of office furniture) – this election can be made on a lease-by-lease basis.
b
A lease of an underlying asset does not qualify as a lease of a low-value asset if the nature of the asset is
lo
such that, when new, the asset is typically not of low value. For example, leases of cars would not qualify
as leases of low-value assets because a new car would typically not be of low value.
G
Examples of low-value underlying assets can include tablet and personal computers, small items of office
furniture and telephones.
A
SALE AND LEASEBACK TRANSACTIONS

C
AC
Introduction
The treatment of sale and leaseback transactions depends on whether or not the ‗sale‘ constitutes the
satisfaction of a relevant performance obligation under IFRS 15 – Revenue from Contracts with
Customers. The relevant performance obligation would be the effective ‗transfer‘ of the asset to the lessor
by the previous owner (now the lessee).
Transaction constituting a sale
If the transaction does constitute a ‗sale‘ under IFRS 15 then the treatment is as follows:
 The seller-lessee shall recognise only the amount of any gain or loss that relates to the rights
transferred to the buyer-lessor.
 The buyer-lessor shall account for the purchase of the asset applying applicable Standards, and
for the lease applying the lessor accounting requirements in IFRS 16 (these being essentially
unchanged from the predecessor standard).
67 | P a g e
If the fair value of the consideration for the sale of an asset does not equal the fair value of the asset, or if
the payments for the lease are not at market rates, an entity shall make the following adjustments to
measure the sale proceeds at fair value:
 Any below-market terms shall be accounted for as a prepayment of lease payments; and
 Any above-market terms shall be accounted for as additional financing provided by the buyer-
lessor to the seller-lessee.
Example – sale and leaseback
Entity X sells a building to entity Y for cash of $5 million. Immediately before the transaction, the carrying
amount of the building in the financial statements of entity X was $3.5 million. At the same time, X enters
into a contract with Y for the right to use the building for 20 years, with annual payments of $200,000
payable at the end of each year. The terms and conditions of the transaction are such that the transfer of
the building by X satisfies the requirements for determining when a performance obligation is satisfied in
IFRS 15, Revenue from Contracts with Customers. Accordingly, X and Y account for the transaction as a
sale and leaseback.
ox
The fair value of the building at the date of sale is $4.5 million. Because the consideration for the sale of
the building is not at fair value, X and Y make adjustments to measure the sale proceeds at fair value. The
lB
amount of the excess sale price of $500,000 ($5 million – $4.5 million) is recognised as additional
financing provided by Y to X.
ba
The annual interest rate implicit in the lease is 5%. The present value of the annual payments (20
payments of $200,000, discounted at 5%) amounts to $2,492,400, of which $500,000 relates to the
additional financing and $1,992,400 ($2,492,200 – $500,000) relates to the lease (as adjusted for the fair
value difference already identified). The annual payment that would be required to be made 20 times in
lo
arrears to repay additional financing of $500,000 when the rate of interest is 5% per annum would be
$40,122 ($500,000/12.462 (the cumulative discount factor for 5% for 20 years)). Therefore the residual
G
would be regarded as a ‗lease rental‘ at an amount of $159,878 ($200,000 – $40,122).
Given the IFRS 15 treatment as a ‗sale‘ Y would almost certainly regard the lease of the building as an
A
operating lease. This means that Y would recognise the ‗lease rentals‘ of $159,878 as income.
C
Transaction not constituting a ‘sale’

AC
In these circumstances the seller does not ‗transfer‘ the asset and continues to recognise it, without
adjustment. The ‗sales proceeds‘ are recognised as a financial liability and accounted for by applying IFRS
9, Financial Instruments. In the same circumstances, the buyer recognizes a financial asset equal to the
‗sales proceeds‘.
IMPACT OF IFRS 16 ON ACCOUNTING RATIOS
The requirements of IFRS 16 will have significant impacts on key accounting ratios of lessees. The greater
recognition of leased assets and lease liabilities on the statement of financial position will reduce return
on capital employed and increase gearing. Initial measures of profit are likely to be reduced, as in the
early years of a lease the combination of depreciation of the right of use asset and the finance charge
associated with the lease liability will exceed the lease rentals (normally charged on a straight-line basis).
68 | P a g e
ACCOUNTING BY LESSORS
Lessors shall classify each lease as an operating lease or a finance lease.
A lease is classified as a finance lease if it transfers substantially all the risks and rewards incidental to
ownership of an underlying asset. Otherwise a lease is classified as an operating lease.
Examples of situations that individually or in combination would normally lead to a lease being classified
as a finance lease are:
 The lease transfers ownership of the asset to the lessee by the end of the lease term
 The lessee has the option to purchase the asset at a price which is expected to be sufficiently lower
than fair value at the date the option becomes exercisable that, at the inception of the lease, it is
reasonably certain that the option will be exercised
 The lease term is for the major part of the economic life of the asset, even if title is not transferred
 At the inception of the lease, the present value of the minimum lease payments amounts to at
x
least substantially all of the fair value of the leased asset
Bo
 The leased assets are of a specialised nature such that only the lessee can use them without major
modifications being made
Upon lease commencement, a lessor shall recognise assets held under a finance lease as a receivable at
an amount equal to the net investment in the lease.
b al
A lessor recognises finance income over the lease term of a finance lease, based on a pattern reflecting a
constant periodic rate of return on the net investment.
lo
At the commencement date, a manufacturer or dealer lessor recognises selling profit or loss in
G
accordance with its policy for outright sales to which IFRS 15 applies.
A lessor recognises operating lease payments as income on a straight-line basis or, if more
A
representative of the pattern in which benefit from use of the underlying asset is diminished, another
systematic basis.
C
DISCLOSURE
AC
The objective of IFRS 16‘s disclosures is for information to be provided in the notes that, together with
information provided in the statement of financial position, statement of profit or loss and statement of
cash flows, gives a basis for users to assess the effect that leases have.
69 | P a g e
IFRS 15 – REVENUE FROM CONTRACTS WITH CUSTOMERS
IFRS 15 specifies how and when an IFRS reporter will recognise revenue.
THE FIVE-STEP MODEL FRAMEWORK
The core principle of IFRS 15 is that an entity shall recognise revenue from the transfer of promised good
or services to customers at an amount that reflects the consideration to which the entity expects to be
entitled in exchange for those goods and services. The standard introduces a five-step model for the
recognition of revenue.
The five-step model applies to revenue earned from a contract with a customer with limited exceptions,
regardless of the type of revenue transaction or the industry.
STEP 1: IDENTIFY THE CONTRACT WITH THE CUSTOMER
x
Step one in the five-step model requires the identification of the contract with the customer. A
contract with a customer will be within the scope of IFRS 15 if all the following conditions are met:
Bo
 The contract has been approved by the parties to the contract;
 Each party‘s rights in relation to the goods or services to be transferred can be identified;
 The payment terms for the goods or services to be transferred can be identified;


The contract has commercial substance; and
al
It is probable that the consideration to which the entity is entitled to in exchange for the goods or
services will be collected.
b
lo
Contracts may be in different forms (written, verbal or implied). If a contract with a customer does not
meet these criteria, the entity can continually reassess the contract to determine whether it subsequently
G
meets the criteria.
Two or more contracts that are entered into around the same time with the same customer may be
A
combined and accounted for as a single contract, if they meet the specified criteria. The standard provides
detailed requirements for contract modifications. A modification may be accounted for as a separate
C
contract or as a modification of the original contract, depending upon the circumstances of the case.
AC
STEP 2: IDENTIFY THE PERFORMANCE OBLIGATIONS IN THE CONTRACT
Step two requires the identification of the separate performance obligations in the contract.
This is often referred to as ‗unbundling‘, and is done at the beginning of a contract. The key factor in
identifying a separate performance obligation is the distinctiveness of the good or service, or a bundle of
goods or services.
At the inception of the contract, the entity should assess the goods or services that have been promised to
the customer, and identify as a performance obligation:
 a good or service (or bundle of goods or services) that is distinct; or

 A series of distinct goods or services that are substantially the same and that have the same
pattern of transfer to the customer.
A series of distinct goods or services is transferred to the customer in the same pattern if both of the
following criteria are met:
70 | P a g e
 Each distinct good or service in the series that the entity promises to transfer consecutively to the
customer would be a performance obligation that is satisfied over time; and
 A single method of measuring progress would be used to measure the entity‘s progress towards
complete satisfaction of the performance obligation to transfer each distinct good or service in the
series to the customer.
A good or service is distinct if both of the following criteria are met:
 The customer can benefit from the good or services on its own or in conjunction with other
readily available resources; and
 The entity‘s promise to transfer the good or service to the customer is separately identifiable from
other promises/elements in the contract.
IFRS 15 requires that a series of distinct goods or services that are substantially the same with the same
pattern of transfer, to be regarded as a single performance obligation. A good or service which has been
delivered may not be distinct if it cannot be used without another good or service that has not yet been
delivered. Similarly, goods or services that are not distinct should be combined with other goods or
x
services until the entity identifies a bundle of goods or services that is distinct.
Bo
IFRS 15 provides indicators rather than criteria to determine when a good or service is distinct within the
context of the contract. This allows management to apply judgment to determine the separate
performance obligations that best reflect the economic substance of a transaction.
b
separately identifiable include, but are not limited to:
al
Factors for consideration as to whether a promise to transfer the good or service to the customer is
lo
 The entity does not provide a significant service of integrating the good or service with other
G
goods or services promised in the contract.

 The good or service does not significantly modify or customise another good or service promised
in the contract.

A
The good or service is not highly interrelated with or highly dependent on other goods or services
promised in the contract.
C
STEP 3: DETERMINE THE TRANSACTION PRICE

AC
Step three requires the entity to determine the transaction price, which is the amount of
consideration that an entity expects to be entitled to in exchange for the promised goods or services.
When making this determination, an entity will consider past customary business practices. This amount
excludes amounts collected on behalf of a third party – for example, government taxes. An entity must
determine the amount of consideration to which it expects to be entitled in order to recognise revenue.
Additionally, an entity should estimate the transaction price, taking into account non-cash consideration,
consideration payable to the customer and the time value of money if a significant financing component is
present. The latter is not required if the time period between the transfer of goods or services and
payment is less than one year. In some cases, it will be clear that a significant financing component exists
due to the terms of the arrangement.
In other cases, it could be difficult to determine whether a significant financing component exists. This is
likely to be the case where there are long-term arrangements with multiple performance obligations such
that goods or services are delivered and cash payments received throughout the arrangement. For
example, if an advance payment is required for business purposes to obtain a longer-term contract, then
the entity may conclude that a significant financing obligation does not exist.
71 | P a g e
If an entity anticipates that it may ultimately accept an amount lower than that initially promised in the
contract due to, for example, past experience of discounts given, then revenue would be estimated at the
lower amount with the collectability of that lower amount being assessed. Subsequently, if revenue
already recognised is not collectable, impairment losses should be taken to profit or loss.
Where a contract contains elements of variable consideration, the entity will estimate the amount of
variable consideration to which it will be entitled under the contract.
However, a different, more restrictive approach is applied in respect of sales or usage-based royalty
revenue arising from licences of intellectual property. Such revenue is recognised only when the
underlying sales or usage occur.
STEP 4: ALLOCATE THE TRANSACTION PRICE TO THE PERFORMANCE OBLIGATIONS

IN THE CONTRACTS
Step four requires the allocation of the transaction price to the separate performance
x
obligations. Where a contract has multiple performance obligations, an entity will allocate the
transaction price to the performance obligations in the contract by reference to the relative standalone
Bo
selling prices of the goods or services promised. This allocation is made at the inception of the contract. It
is not adjusted to reflect subsequent changes in the standalone selling prices of those goods or services.
The best evidence of standalone selling price is the observable price of a good or service when the entity
al
sells that good or service separately. If that is not available, an estimate is made by using an approach that
maximises the use of observable inputs – for example, expected cost plus an appropriate margin or the
b
assessment of market prices for similar goods or services adjusted for entity-specific costs and margins or
in limited circumstances a residual approach. The residual approach is different from the residual method
lo
that is used currently by some entities, such as software companies.
G
When a contract contains more than one distinct performance obligation, an entity should allocate the
transaction price to each distinct performance obligation on the basis of the standalone selling price.
A
This will be a major practical issue as it may require a separate calculation and allocation exercise to be
performed for each contract. For example, a mobile telephone contract typically bundles together the
C
handset and network connection and IFRS 15 will require their separation.
AC
STEP 5: RECOGNISE REVENUE WHEN (OR AS) THE ENTITY SATISFIES A

PERFORMANCE OBLIGATION
Step five requires revenue to be recognised as each performance obligation is satisfied. This
differs from IAS 18 where, for example, revenue in respect of goods is recognised when the significant
risks and rewards of ownership of the goods are transferred to the customer.
Revenue is recognised as control is passed. An entity satisfies a performance obligation by transferring

control of a promised good or service to the customer, which could occur over time or at a point in time.
Control of an asset is defined as the ability to direct the use of and obtain substantially all of the remaining
benefits from the asset. The benefits related to the asset are the potential cash flows that may be obtained
directly or indirectly. These include, but are not limited to:
 Using the asset to produce goods or provide services;

 Using the asset to enhance the value of other assets;
 Using the asset to settle liabilities or to reduce expenses;
72 | P a g e
 Selling or exchanging the asset;

 Pledging the asset to secure a loan; and
 Holding the asset.
A performance obligation is satisfied at a point in time unless it meets one of the following criteria, in
which case, it is deemed to be satisfied over time. So, an entity recognises revenue over time if one of the
following criteria is met:
 The customer simultaneously receives and consumes the benefits provided by the entity‘s
performance as the entity performs.
 The entity‘s performance creates or enhances an asset that the customer controls as the asset is
created or enhanced.
 The entity‘s performance does not create an asset with an alternative use to the entity and the
entity has an enforceable right to payment for performance completed to date.
Revenue is recognised in line with the pattern of transfer. Whether an entity recognises revenue over the
period during which it manufactures a product or on delivery to the customer will depend on the specific
x
terms of the contract.
Bo
If an entity does not satisfy its performance obligation over time, it satisfies it at a point in time. Revenue
will therefore be recognised when control is passed at a certain point in time. Factors that may indicate
the point in time at which control passes include, but are not limited to:



The customer has legal title to the asset;
b al
The entity has a present right to payment for the asset;
The entity has transferred physical possession of the asset;

lo
 The customer has the significant risks and rewards related to the ownership of the asset; and
 The customer has accepted the asset.
G
As a consequence of the above, the timing of revenue recognition may change for some point-in-time
transactions when the new standard is adopted.
A
CONTRACT COSTS
C
The incremental costs of obtaining a contract must be recognised as an asset if the entity expects to
AC
recover those costs.
Costs incurred to fulfill a contract are recognised as an asset if and only if all of the following criteria are
met:
 The costs relate directly to a contract (or a specific anticipated contract);

 The costs generate or enhance resources of the entity that will be used in satisfying performance
obligations in the future; and
 The costs are expected to be recovered.
The asset recognised in respect of the costs to obtain or fulfill a contract is amortised on a systematic basis
that is consistent with the pattern of transfer of the goods or services to which the asset relates.
73 | P a g e
PRINCIPLES OF REVENUE RECOGNITION
Sale on return basis
 In case of sale on return basis, an estimate should be made of the amount of goods expected to be
returned.
 The most likely amount of return can be determined by past experience or by assigning
probability to estimated figures
 For the goods expected to be returned, sale is not recognized. A refund liability is recorded with
the amount.
 The right to receive inventory with a corresponding adjustment to cost of sales
 If the item is ultimately not returned, then it will be recognized as sale at the point of
confirmation of no return.
Warranty
 In case of option to purchase warranty separately (extended), warranty is distinct and should be
recognized as a separate performance obligation
 If a customer does not have the option to purchase a warranty separately, an entity shall account
x
for the warranty in accordance with IAS 37 Provisions, Contingent Liabilities and Contingent
Bo
Asset
Principal versus agent considerations

 When another party is involved in providing goods or services to a customer, the entity shall

al
determine whether the nature of its promise is a performance obligation to provide the specified
goods or services itself (ie the entity is a principal) or to arrange for the other party to provide
those goods or services (ie the entity is an agent).
b
An entity is a principal if the entity controls a promised good or service before the entity transfers
lo
the good or service to a customer. However, an entity is not necessarily acting as a principal if the
entity obtains legal title of a product only momentarily before legal title is transferred to a
customer.
G
 When an entity that is a principal satisfies a performance obligation, the entity recognises revenue
in the gross amount of consideration to which it expects to be entitled in exchange for those goods
or services transferred.
A
 An entity is an agent if the entity‘s performance obligation is to arrange for the provision of goods
or services by another party. When an entity that is an agent satisfies a performance obligation, the
C
entity recognises revenue in the amount of any fee or commission to which it expects to be entitled
in exchange for arranging for the other party to provide its goods or services.
AC
Indicators that an entity is an agent are as follows:
a. Another party is primarily responsible for fulfilling the contract;

b. The entity does not have inventory risk before or after the goods have been ordered by a
customer, during shipping or on return;
c. The entity does not have discretion in establishing prices for the other party‘s goods or
services and, therefore, the benefit that the entity can receive from those goods or services is
limited;
d. The entity‘s consideration is in the form of a commission; and
e. The entity is not exposed to credit risk for the amount receivable from a customer in exchange
for the other party‘s goods or services.
Repurchase agreements
A repurchase agreement is a contract in which an entity sells an asset and also promises or has the option
(either in the same contract or in another contract) to repurchase the asset. The repurchased asset may be
74 | P a g e
the asset that was originally sold to the customer, an asset that is substantially the same as that asset, or
another asset of which the asset that was originally sold is a component.
Repurchase agreements generally come in three forms:

a. An entity‘s obligation to repurchase the asset (a forward);
b. An entity‘s right to repurchase the asset (a call option); and
c. An entity‘s obligation to repurchase the asset at the customer‘s request (a put option).
Forward & Call option

 In case of forward and call option, the customer does not obtain control
 If entity can or must repurchase at an amount less than original selling price of asset, then it will
be accounted for as lease
 If entity can or must repurchase at an amount equal to or more than original selling price of asset,
then accounting done as financing arrangement —recognize the asset and a financial liability
Put option
x
 If repurchase price lower than original selling price then see does customer have significant
Bo
economic incentive to exercise right
 If yes then account for as lease. If no, then recognize as sale of product with right of return
 If repurchase price is equal or greater than original selling price following two options arise
 If repurchase price is more than expected market value then accounting done as financing
arrangement —recognize the asset and a financial liability
al
 If Repurchase price is less than expected market value and no significant economic incentive to
exercise right then record as sale of product with right of return
b
Bill and hold arrangement
lo
 Bill-and-hold arrangements are those whereby an entity bills a customer for the sale of a
G
particular product, but the entity retains physical possession until it is transferred to the customer
at a later date.
 In assessing whether revenue can be recognized in a bill-and-hold transaction, entities must first
A
determine whether control has transferred to the customer (as with any other sale under IFRS 15)
through review of the indicators for the transfer of control. One indicator is physical possession of
C
the asset; however, physical possession may not coincide with control in all cases (e.g., in bill-
and-hold arrangements).

AC
In determining whether control has transferred in such arrangements, the specific criteria
included in IFRS 15 for bill-and-hold transactions must all be met in order for revenue to be
recognized.
o The reason for the bill-and-hold arrangement must be substantive (e.g., the customer has
requested the arrangement).
o The product must be identified separately as belonging to the customer.
o The product currently must be ready for physical transfer to the customer.
o The entity cannot have the ability to use the product or to direct it to another customer.
 An entity that has transferred control of the goods and met the bill-and-hold criteria to recognize
revenue will also need to consider whether it is providing other services (e.g., custodial services).
If so, a portion of the transaction price should be allocated to each of the separate performance
obligations (i.e., the goods and the custodial service).
75 | P a g e
Non-refundable up-front fees
Although the accounting conclusion may not change with respect to non-refundable upfront fees for
retailers, the assessment process for such fees differs under IFRS 15.
Set up activities (eg retailers‘ ‗club‘ fees, health-club joining fees, set-up fees, etc.) are not generally
considered to be distinct performance obligations because the customer‘s ability to benefit from them is
highly dependent upon other goods or services in the contract. In such circumstances, the related upfront
fees are considered to be advance payments for future goods and services and therefore comprise part of
the overall transaction price. The entity allocates the overall transaction price among the identified
performance obligations (as discussed above) and recognises revenue as those performance obligations
are satisfied (Step 5).
Consignment arrangements
When an entity delivers a product to another party (such as a dealer or a distributor) for sale to end
x
customers, the entity shall evaluate whether that other party has obtained control of the product at that
point in time. A product that has been delivered to another party may be held in a consignment
Bo
arrangement if that other party has not obtained control of the product.
Accordingly, an entity shall not recognise revenue upon delivery of a product to another party if the
delivered product is held on consignment.
following:
b al
Indicators that an arrangement is a consignment arrangement include, but are not limited to, the
lo
a. The product is controlled by the entity until a specified event occurs, such as the sale of the
product to a customer of the dealer or until a specified period expires;
G
b. The entity is able to require the return of the product or transfer the product to a third party
(such as another dealer); and
c. The dealer does not have an unconditional obligation to pay for the product (although it
A
might be required to pay a deposit).

C
AC
76 | P a g e
IFRS 13 – FAIR VALUE MEASUREMENTS
NEED FOR FAIR VALUE GUIDANCE & IFRS 13:
IFRS 13 provides a single source of guidance for all fair value measurements, clarifying the definition of
fair value and enhancing disclosures requirements about reported fair value estimates.
OBJECTIVE
IFRS 13, Fair Value Measurement was issued in May 2011 and defines fair value, establishes a
framework for measuring fair value and requires significant disclosures relating to fair value
measurement. The International Accounting Standards Board (IASB) wanted to enhance disclosures for
fair value in order that users could better assess the valuation techniques and inputs that are used to
measure fair value. There are no new requirements as to when fair value accounting is required but rather
it relies on guidance regarding fair value measurements in existing standards.
x
Bo
The guidance in IFRS 13 does not apply to transactions dealt with by certain standards. For example share
based payment transactions in IFRS 2, Share-based Payment, leasing transactions in IFRS 16, Leases, or
to measurements that are similar to fair value but are not fair value – for example, net realisable value
calculations in IAS 2, Inventories or value in use calculations in IAS 36, Impairment of Assets. Therefore,
IFRS 13 applies to fair value measurements that are required or permitted by those standards not scoped
guidance on measurement of fair value

b al
out by IFRS 13. It replaces the inconsistent guidance found in various IFRSs with a single source of
lo
FAIR VALUE DEFINITION
G
Fair value is the price that would be received to sell an asset or paid to transfer a liability in an orderly
A
From the above definition, it can be inferred that fair value is an exit price. Consequently, fair value is
focused on the assumptions of the market place, is not entity specific and so takes into account any
C
assumptions about risk. This means that fair value is measured using the same assumptions used by
market participants and takes into account the same characteristics of the asset or liability. Such
AC
conditions would include the condition and location of the asset and any restrictions on its sale or use.
An entity cannot argue that prices are too low relative to its own valuation of the asset and that it would be
unwilling to sell at low prices. The prices to be used are those in ‗an orderly transaction‘. An orderly
transaction is one that assumes exposure to the market for a period before the date of measurement to
allow for normal marketing activities to take place and to ensure that it is not a forced transaction. If the
transaction is not ‗orderly‘ then there will not have been enough time to create competition and potential
buyers may reduce the price that they are willing to pay. Similarly if a seller is forced to accept a price in a
short period of time, the price may not be representative. Therefore, it does not follow that a market in
which there are few transactions is not orderly. If there has been competitive tension, sufficient time and
information about the asset, then this may result in an acceptable fair value.
Unit of account
IFRS 13 does not specify the unit of account that should be used to measure fair value. This means that it
is left to the individual standard to determine the unit of account for fair value measurement. A unit of
account is the single asset or liability or group of assets or liabilities. The characteristic of an asset or
liability must be distinguished from a characteristic arising from the holding of an asset or liability by an
entity. An example of this is where an entity sells a large block of shares, and it has to sell them at a
77 | P a g e
discount price to the market price. This is a characteristic of holding the asset rather than a characteristic
of the asset itself and should not be taken into account when fair valuing the asset.
MARKETS – ACTIVE MARKET
A market in which transactions for the asset or liability take place with sufficient frequency and volume to
provide pricing information on an ongoing basis
MARKETS – PRINCIPAL MARKET
Fair value measurement assumes that the transaction to sell the asset or transfer the liability takes place
in the principal market for the asset or liability or, in the absence of a principal market, in the most
advantageous market for the asset or liability. The principal market is the one with the greatest volume
and level of activity for the asset or liability that can be accessed by the entity.
IFRS 13 provides a new framework to estimate fair value in a consistent manner across standards. For a
fair value measurement, an entity has to determine:
ox
 The particular asset or liability that is the subject of the measurement
 For an asset, the valuation premise that is appropriate for the measurement
lB
 The most advantageous market for the asset or liability and
 The valuation technique appropriate for measurement
MARKETS – THE MOST ADVANTAGEOUS MARKET

ba
It is assumed that transactions take place in the most advantageous market to which the entity has access.
lo
This means that the entity is in a position to receive the maximum amount on sale of the asset or pay the
minimum amount to transfer a liability after considering transaction and transport costs.
G
While transaction and transport costs are relevant to identify the market, they are not considered in
determining the fair value.
A
MEASUREMENT ASSUMPTIONS
C
AC
Fair value measurement of an asset or liability should use the assumptions that market participants would
use in pricing the asset or liability. These assumptions include:
 Buyers and sellers are independent of each other

 They have knowledge about the asset or liability
 They are capable of entering into a transaction
 They are willing to enter into a transaction, rather than being forced or otherwise compelled.
VALUATION TECHNIQUES
An entity uses valuation techniques appropriate in the circumstances and for which sufficient data are
available to measure fair value, maximising the use of relevant observable inputs and minimising the use
of unobservable inputs.
Where fair value is determined using a valuation technique, IFRS 13 prescribes that the technique should
be one of the following.
78 | P a g e
i. Market approach: uses price and other relevant market information for identical or
comparable assets or liabilities
ii. Income approach: converts future amounts to a single discounted present value amount or
iii. Cost approach: amount that would currently be required to replace the service capacity of
the asset
When measuring fair value, the entity is required to maximise the use of observable inputs and minimise
the use of unobservable inputs. To this end, the standard introduces a fair value hierarchy, which
prioritises the inputs into the fair value measurement process.
FAIR VALUE HIERARCHY
IFRS 13 seeks to increase consistency and comparability in fair value measurements and related
disclosures through a 'Fair Value Hierarchy'. The hierarchy categorises the inputs used in valuation
techniques into three levels.
Level 1 Inputs
x
Level 1 inputs are unadjusted quoted prices in active markets for items identical to the asset or liability
Bo
being measured. As with current IFRS, if there is a quoted price in an active market, an entity uses that
price without adjustment when measuring fair value. An example of this would be prices quoted on a
stock exchange. The entity needs to be able to access the market at the measurement date. Active markets
are ones where transactions take place with sufficient frequency and volume for pricing information to be
b al
provided. An alternative method may be used where it is expedient. The standard sets out certain criteria
where this may be applicable. For example where the price quoted in an active market does not represent
fair value at the measurement date. An example of this may be where a significant event takes place after
the close of the market such as a business reorganisation or combination.
lo
The determination of whether a fair value measurement is based on level 2 or level 3 inputs depends on (i)
G
whether the inputs are observable inputs or unobservable and (ii) their significance.
Level 2 Inputs
A
C
Level 2 inputs are inputs other than the quoted prices in determined in level 1 that are directly or
indirectly observable for that asset or liability. They are likely to be quoted assets or liabilities for similar
items in active markets or supported by market data. For example interest rates, credit spreads or yields
AC
curves. Adjustments may be needed to level 2 inputs and, if this adjustment is significant, then it may
require the fair value to be classified as level 3.
Level 3 Inputs
Finally, level 3 inputs are unobservable inputs. These inputs should be used only when it is not possible to
use Level 1 or 2 inputs. The entity should maximise the use of relevant observable inputs and minimise
the use of unobservable inputs.
However, situations may occur where relevant inputs are not observable and therefore these inputs must
be developed to reflect the assumptions that market participants would use when determining an
appropriate price for the asset or liability.
The general principle of using an exit price remains and IFRS 13 does not preclude an entity from using its
own data. For example cash flow forecasts may be used to value an entity that is not listed. Each fair value
measurement is categorised based on the lowest level input that is significant to it.
79 | P a g e
ASSET -SPECIFIC VALUATIONS
For a fair value measurement of an asset, it is assumed that the asset will be sold to a market participant
who will use it at its highest and best use.
LIABILITY or EQUITY – SPECIFIC VALUATION
Fair value measurement of a liability, or owner‘s own equity assumes that the liability is transferred to a
market participant at the measurement date. In many cases there is no observable market to provide
pricing information and the highest and best use is not applicable. In this case, the fair value is based on
the perspective of a market participant who holds the identical instrument as an asset.
Where there is no observable market price for the transfer of a liability, an entity would be required to
measure the fair value of the liability using the same methodology that the counterparty would use to
measure the fair value of the corresponding asset.
If there is no corresponding asset, then a corresponding valuation technique may be used. This would be
x
the case with a decommissioning activity.
Bo
The fair value of a liability reflects the non-performance risk based on the entity‘s own credit standing
plus any compensation for risk and profit margin that a market participant might require to undertake the
activity. Transaction price is not always the best indicator of fair value at recognition because entry and
exit prices are conceptually different.
Valuation concepts
b al
IFRS 13 also sets out certain valuation concepts to assist in the determination of fair value. For non-
lo
financial assets only, fair value is determined based on the highest and best use of the asset as determined
by a market participant.
G
Highest and best use is a valuation concept that considers how market participants would use a non-
financial asset to maximise its benefit or value. The maximum value of a non-financial asset to market
A
participants may come from its use in combination with other assets and liabilities or on a standalone
basis.
C
In determining the highest and best use of a non-financial asset, IFRS 13 indicates that all uses that are
AC
physically possible, legally permissible and financially feasible should be considered. As such, when
assessing alternative uses, entities should consider the physical characteristics of the asset, any legal
restrictions on its use and whether the value generated provides an adequate investment return for
market participants.
RULES IN BUSINESS COMBINATION:

IFRS 3 sets out general principles for arriving at the fair values of a subsidiary's assets and liabilities
only if they satisfy the following criteria:
 In the case of an asset other than an intangible asset, it is probable that any associated future
economic benefits will flow to the acquirer, and its fair value can be measured reliably. Vice versa
for liabilities
 In the case of an intangible asset or a contingent liability, its fair value can be measured reliably.
 The acquiree's identifiable assets and liabilities might include assets and liabilities not previously
recognised in the acquiree's financial statements
 An acquirer should not recognise liabilities for future losses or other costs expected to be incurred
as a result of the business combination.
80 | P a g e
 The acquiree may have intangible assets which can only be recognised separately from goodwill if
they are identifiable. They must be able to be capable of being separated from the entity.
 The acquirer should measure the cost of a business combination as the total of the fair values at
the date of acquisition
 If part of the consideration is payable at a later date, this deferred consideration is discounted to
present value at the date of exchange.
 In case of equity instruments as cost of investment, the published price at the date of exchange
normally provides the best evidence of the instrument's fair value.
 Costs attributable to the combination, for example professional fees and administrative costs,
should not be included: they are recognised as an expense when incurred.
 If an asset or liability has been recognised at fair value at acquisition, it must be recorded in the
subsidiary‘s statement of financial position at fair value consequently also
 Some fair value adjustments are made on depreciable assets such as buildings, the assets with fair
value adjustment must be depreciated at its fair value so there will be an adjustment, which flows
through to profit or loss for this additional depreciation.
x
Disclosures
Bo
The guidance includes enhanced disclosure requirements that include:
 Information about the hierarchy level into which fair value measurements fall



Transfers between levels 1 and 2
al
Methods and inputs to the fair value measurements and changes in valuation techniques, and
b
Additional disclosures for level 3 measurements that include a reconciliation of opening and
lo
closing balances, and quantitative information about unobservable inputs and assumptions used.
G
A
C
AC
81 | P a g e
IAS 19 EMPLOYEE BENEFITS
OBJECTIVE
The objective of this Standard is to prescribe the accounting and disclosure for employee benefits.
SCOPE
Employee benefits include:
(a) Short-term employee benefits

(b) Post-employment benefits
(c) Other long-term employee benefits
(d) Termination benefits.
x
IAS 19 should be applied by all entities in accounting for the provision of all employee benefits, except
Bo
those benefits which are equity-based (awarding shares, share appreciation rights etc) and to which IFRS
2 applies. The Standard applies regardless of whether the benefits have been provided as part of a formal
contract or an informal arrangement (constructive obligation).
i. Cash bonuses
b al
Considerations given to an employee by an entity in exchange for the employee's services is in following
forms.
lo
ii. Retirement benefits
iii. Private health care
G
A number of accounting issues arise due to actuarial complexities and the impact of deferred taxes:
A
 The valuation problems linked to some forms of employee benefits; and

 The timing of benefits, which may not always be provided in the same period as the one in which the
C
employee's services are provided.

AC
DEFINITIONS
Employee benefits are all forms of consideration given by an entity in exchange for service rendered by
employees or for the termination of employment.
Short-term employee benefits are employee benefits (other than termination benefits) that are
expected to be settled wholly before twelve months after the end of the annual reporting period in which
the employees render the related service.
Post-employment benefits are employee benefits (other than termination benefits and short-term
employee benefits) that are payable after the completion of employment.
Other long-term employee benefits are all employee benefits other than short-term employee
benefits, post-employment benefits and termination benefits.
Termination benefits are employee benefits provided in exchange for the termination of an employee‘s
employment as a result of either:
82 | P a g e
(a) An entity‘s decision to terminate an employee‘s employment before the normal retirement
date; or
(b) An employee‘s decision to accept an offer of benefits in exchange for the termination of
employment.
Investment risk: This is defined as the risk that there will be insufficient funds in the plan to meet the
expected benefits.
Actuarial risk: This is the risk that the actuarial assumptions such as those on employee turnover, life
expectancy or future salaries vary significantly from that actually happens.
SHORT TERM EMPLOYEE BENEFITS
Short-term employee benefits are employee benefits (other than termination benefits) that are
expected to be settled wholly before twelve months after the end of the annual reporting period in which
the employees render the related service and expense is recognized on accrual basis..
x
Short-term employee benefits include items such as:
Bo
(a) Wages, salaries and social security contributions;
(b) Short-term compensated absences (such as paid annual vacation, paid sick leave and paid
maternity/paternity leave. To fall within the definition, the absences should be expected to occur
al
within 12 months of the end of the period in which the employee services were provided;
(c) Profit-sharing and bonuses payable within 12 months of the end of the period
b
(d) Non-monetary benefits (such as medical care, housing, cars and free or subsidized goods or services)
lo
for current employees.
G
Recognition and Measurement: All Short Term Employee Benefits
The undiscounted amount of short-term employee benefits expected to be paid in exchange for the service
A
during the period is recognized as:

C
(a) as a liability (accrued expense), after deducting any amount already paid (As an asset if prepaid
expense)
AC
(b) As an expense, unless another IFRS requires or permits the inclusion of the benefits in the cost of an
asset.
Short Term Compensated Absences

Definition
Short-term compensated absences: Compensated absences are periods of absence from work for
which the employee receives some form of payment and which are expected to occur within 12 months of
the end of the period in which the employee renders the services.
Examples of short-term compensated absences are paid annual vacation and paid sick leave.
Short-term compensated absences fall into two categories:
83 | P a g e
 Accumulating absences. These are benefits, such as paid annual vacation, that accrue over an
employee‘s period of service and can be potentially carried forward and used in future periods if not
taken: and
 Non-accumulating absences. These are benefits that an employee is entitled to, but they elapse if
not taken in the current period. Where an employee has an unused entitlement at the end of the
reporting period and the entity expects to provide the benefit, a liability should be created.
Profit-sharing and bonus plans
An entity should recognise an expense and a corresponding liability for the cost of providing profit-
sharing arrangements and bonus payments when:
(i) The entity has a present legal or constructive obligation. The legal obligation arises when payment is
part of an employee's employment contract. The constructive obligation arises where past
performance has led to the expectation that benefits will be payable in the current period.
(ii) A reliable estimate of the obligation can be made.
x
Conditions may be attached to such bonus payments; commonly, the employee must still be in the entity's
employment when the bonus becomes payable. An estimate should be made based on the expectation of
Bo
the level of bonuses that will ultimately be paid. IAS 19 sets out that a reliable estimate for bonus or profit-
sharing arrangements can be made only when:
 There are formal terms setting out determination of the amount of the benefit:


issue; or
b al
The amount payable is determined by the entity before the financial statements are authorised for
Past practice provides clear evidence of the amount of a constructive obligation.

lo
POST-EMPLOYMENT BENEFITS
G
Post-employment benefits are employee benefits other than termination benefits, which are payable after
the completion of employment.
A
Post-employment benefits include, for example:

C
(a) Retirement benefits, such as pensions; and

AC
(b) Other post-employment benefits, such as post-employment life insurance and post-employment
medical care.
Post-employment benefit plans are formal or informal arrangements under which an entity provides post-
employment benefits for one or more employees.
There are two main types of post-employment benefit schemes:
o Defined contribution schemes where the future pension depends on the value of the fund
o Defined benefit schemes where the future pension depends on the final salary and years
worked
These two alternative schemes are discussed in more detail below.
A pension scheme will normally be held in the form of a trust (pension fund) separate from the
sponsoring employer. Although the directors of the sponsoring company may also be trustees of the
pension scheme, the sponsoring company and the pension scheme are separate legal entities that are
84 | P a g e
accounted for separately. IAS 19 covers accounting for the pension scheme in the sponsoring company's
accounts.
Defined contribution plans are post-employment benefit plans under which an entity pays fixed
contributions into a separate entity (a fund) and will have no legal or constructive obligation to pay
further contributions if the fund does not hold sufficient assets to pay all employee benefits relating to
employee service in the current and prior periods.
Defined benefit plans are post-employment benefit plans other than defined contribution plans.
Multi-employer plans are defined contribution plans (other than state plans) or defined benefit plans
(other than state plans) that:
(a) Pool the assets contributed by various entities that are not under common control; and
(b) Use those assets to provide benefits to employees of more than one entity, on the basis that
contribution and benefit levels are determined without regard to the identity of the entity that
x
employs the employees.
Bo
DEFINED CONTRIBUTION PLANS
Characteristics of a defined contribution plan are:


b al
Contributions into the plan are fixed, normally at a percentage of an employee‘s salary
The amount of pension paid to retirees is not guaranteed and will depend upon the size of the
plan, which in turn depends upon the performance of the pension fund investments.
lo
Risk Associated with Defined Contribution Schemes

G
Contributions are usually paid into the plan by both the employer and the employee. The expectation is
A
that the investments made will grow through capital appreciation and the reinvestment of returns and
that on a member‘s retirement, the plan should have grown to be sufficient to provide the anticipated
C
benefits. If the investments have not performed as anticipated (Investment risk), the size of the plan will
be smaller than initially anticipated and therefore there will be insufficient assets to meet the expected
AC
benefits. The insufficiency of assets is described as the investment risk and is carried by the employee.
The other main risk with retirement plans is that a given amount of annual benefit will cost more than
expected if, for example, life expectancy has increased markedly by the time benefits come to be drawn.
So, the actuarial assumptions regarding pension may deviate from actual results (Actuarial risk) e.g.
employee turnover, average age of employees etc. This is described as the actuarial and, in the case of
defined contribution plans, this is also carried by the employee.
Variables-returns on investments
Time
Defined (therefore)
Contributions Variable Benefits
85 | P a g e
Accounting for defined contribution plans is straightforward as the obligation is determined by the
amount paid into the plan in each period.
Recognition and measurement
Contributions into a defined contribution plan by an employer are made in return for services provided by
an employee during the period. The employer has no further obligation for the value of the assets of the
plan or the benefits payable.
 The entity should recognise contributions payable as an expense in the period in which the employee
provides services (except to the extent that labour costs may be included within the cost of assets).
 A liability should be recognised where contributions arise in relation to an employee's service, but
remain unpaid at the period end.
In the unusual situation where contributions are not payable during the period (or within 12 months of
the end of the period) in which the employee provides his or her services on which they accrue, the
amount recognised should be discounted, to reflect the time value of money.
x
Bo
Any excess contributions paid should be recognised as an asset (prepaid expenses) but only to the extent
that the prepayment will lead to a reduction in future payments or cash refund.
Disclosure requirements

b al
Where an entity operates a defined contribution plan during the period, it should disclose:
The amount that has been recognised as an expense during the period in relation in relation to the
lo
plan
 A description of the plan
G
DEFINED BENEFIT PLANS

A
These are defined by IAS 19 as all post-employment plans other than defined contribution plans.
C
These are defined by IAS 19 as all plans other than defined contribution plans.
AC
Characteristics of defined benefit plan are:
 The amount of pension paid to retirees is defined by reference to factors such as length of service and
salary levels (i.e. it is guaranteed)
 Contributions into the plan are therefore variable depending upon how the plan is performing in
relation to the expected future obligation (i.e. if there is a shortfall, contribution will increase and vice
versa)
Contribution Levels
The actuary advises the company on contributions necessary to produce the defined benefits (‗the funding
plan‘). Contributions may be varied as a result.
86 | P a g e
Risk associated with defined benefit schemes
As the employer is obliged to make up any shortfall in the plan, it is effectively underwriting the
investment and actuarial risk associated with the plan. Thus in a defined benefit plan, the employer
carries both the investment and the actuarial risk.
Types of Defined Benefit Plans
There are two types of defined benefit plan:
 Funded plans: These plans are set up as separate legal entities and are managed independently,
often by trustees. Contributions paid by the employer and employee are paid into the separate legal
entity. The assets held within the separate legal entities are effectively ring-fenced for the payments of
benefits. Illustration:
x
Bo
Pays
contributions
b
Pension
al Separate legal
entity under
lo
trustees
G
Pays Receives pension

contributions and other benefits
A
on retirement
Employee
C
AC
Unfunded plans: These plans are held within employer legal entities and are managed by the
employers‘ management teams. Assets may be allocated towards the satisfaction of retirement benefit
obligations, although these assets are not ring-fenced for the payment of benefits and remain the assets of
the employer entity.
87 | P a g e
x
Bo
b al
lo
G
A
C
AC
88 | P a g e
x
Bo
b al
lo
G
A
C
AC
RECOGNITION AND MEASUREMENT – A SUMMARY

IAS 19 requires the following.
(a) Contributions to a defined contribution plan should be recognised as an expense in the period
they are payable (except to the extent that labour costs may be included within the cost of assets).
(b) Any liability for unpaid contributions that are due as at the end of the period should be recognized
as a liability (accrued expense).
(c) Any excess contributions paid should be recognised as an asset (prepaid expense), but only to the
extent that the prepayment will lead to, e.g. a reduction in future payments or a cash refund.
89 | P a g e
In the (unusual) situation where contributions to a defined contribution plan do not fall due entirely
within 12 months after the end of the period in which the employees performed the related service, then
these should be discounted.
RECOGNITION AND MEASUREMENT - DETAILS
Accounting by an entity for defined benefit plans involves the following steps:
(a) Determining the deficit or surplus. This involves:

(i) Using an actuarial technique, the projected unit credit method is used to make a reliable estimate
of the ultimate cost to the entity of the benefit using estimates (actuarial assumptions) about
demographic variables (such as employee turnover and mortality) and financial variables (such as
future increases in salaries and medical costs).
(ii) Calculating the present value of the defined benefit obligation and the current service cost
(iii) Deducting the fair value of any plan assets from the present value of the defined benefit
obligation.
x
(b) Determining the amount of the net defined benefit liability (asset) as the amount of the deficit or
Bo
surplus determined in (a), adjusted for any effect of limiting a net defined benefit asset to the asset
ceiling.
(c) Determining amounts to be recognised in profit or loss:
(i) Current service cost.
al
(ii) Any past service cost and gain or loss on settlement.
(iii) Net interest on the net defined benefit liability (asset).
b
(d) Determining the remeasurements of the net defined benefit liability (asset), to be recognised in other
comprehensive income, comprising:
lo
(i) Actuarial gains and losses;
(ii) Return on plan assets, excluding amounts included in net interest on the net defined benefit
G
liability (asset); and

(iii) Any change in the effect of the asset ceiling , excluding amounts included in net interest on the net
A
defined benefit liability (asset).

C
Accounting For the Constructive Obligation

AC
An entity shall account for any constructive obligation also that arises from the entity‘s informal practices.
The Statement of Financial Position
In the statement of financial position, the amount recognised as a defined benefit liability (which may be a
negative amount, i.e. an asset) should be the following.
(a) The present value of the defined obligation at the year end, minus
(b) The fair value of the assets of the plan as at the yearend (if there are any) out of which the future
obligations to current and past employees will be directly settled.
Recognition and Measurement: Present Value of Defined Benefit Obligation and Current
Service Cost
The ultimate cost of a defined benefit plan may be influenced by many variables, such as final salaries,
employee turnover and mortality, employee contributions and medical cost trends. The ultimate cost of
90 | P a g e
the plan is uncertain and this uncertainty is likely to persist over a long period of time. In order to
measure the present value of the post-employment benefit obligations and the related current service
cost, it is necessary:
(a) To apply an actuarial valuation method;

(b) To attribute benefit to periods of service; and
(c) To make actuarial assumptions.
Attributing benefits to periods of service
 Where a plan provides for a lump sum benefit payment at a specified time in the future, IAS 19
requires that the benefits are attributed to periods of service on a straight line basis over the
period in which the benefit accrues.
 Benefits accruing in later periods may be greater than those accruing in earlier periods. Where
this is the case, IAS 19 again requires benefits to be attributed to periods of service on a straight
line basis over the period in which the benefit accrues.
x
 If the benefit is to be based on a constant proportion of final salary for each year of service, the
Bo
amount of benefit attributable to each period of service is a constant proportion of the estimated
final salary.
The Statement of Profit or Loss and Other Comprehensive Income

b al
All of the gains and losses that affect the plan obligation and plan asset must be recognised. The
components of defined benefit cost must be recognised as follows in the statement of profit or loss and
other comprehensive income:
lo
Component Recognised in
G
(a) Service cost Profit or loss

(b) Net interest on the net defined benefit liability Profit or loss
A
(c) Remeasurements of the net defined benefit liability Other comprehensive income (not
reclassified to P/L
C
Unwinding of Interest
AC
IAS 19 requires that the interest should be calculated on the net defined benefit liability (asset). This
means that the amount recognised in profit or loss is the net of the interest charge on the obligation and
the interest income recognised on the assets.
The calculation is as follows:
Net defined benefit liability/(asset) x Discount Rate
The net defined benefit liability/(asset) should be determined as at the start of the accounting
period, taking account of changes during the period as a result of contributions paid into the scheme and
benefits paid out.
Discount Rate
The discount rate adopted should be determined by reference to market yields on high quality fixed-
rate corporate bonds.
91 | P a g e
Dr. Interest cost
Cr. PV of defined benefit obligation
Service Costs
These comprise:
(a) Current service cost, this is the increase in the present value of the defined benefit obligation
resulting from employee services during the period.
(b) Past service cost, is the change in the obligation relating to service in prior periods. This results
from amendments or curtailments to the pension plan, and
(c) Any gain or loss on settlement.
Current Service Cost
The amount of pension paid out by defined benefit schemes is often calculated based on the number of
x
years of service of an employee. Therefore, with each year that an employee remains in employment, the
Bo
pension liability will increase.
The current service cost is accounted for by

Dr. Current service cost expense
Cr. PV of Defined Benefit Obligation
Past Service Costs

b al
lo
Past service cost is the change in the present value of the defined benefit obligation resulting from a plan
G
amendment or curtailment.
An entity shall recognise past service cost as an expense at the earlier of the following dates:
A
(a) When the plan amendment or curtailment occurs; and

(b) When the entity recognises related restructuring costs (see IAS 37) or termination benefits.
C
A plan amendment occurs when an entity introduces, or withdraws, a defined benefit plan or changes the
AC
benefits payable under an existing defined benefit plan.
A curtailment occurs when an entity significantly reduces the number of employees covered by a plan. A
curtailment may arise from an isolated event, such as the closing of a plant, discontinuance of an
operation or termination or suspension of a plan.
Where an entity reduces benefits payable under an existing defined benefit plan and, at the same time,
increases other benefits payable under the plan for the same employees, the entity treats the change as a
single net change.
Gains and Losses on Settlement

The gain or loss on a settlement is the difference between:
(a) The present value of the defined benefit obligation being settled, as determined on the date of
settlement; and
(b) The settlement price, including any plan assets transferred and any payments made directly by the
entity in connection with the settlement.
92 | P a g e
An entity shall recognise a gain or loss on the settlement of a defined benefit plan when the settlement
occurs.
RECOGNITION AND MEASUREMENT: PLAN ASSETS
Fair Value of Plan Assets
Plan assets are:

(a) Assets such as stocks and shares, held by a fund that is legally separate from the reporting entity,
which exists solely to pay employee benefits.
(b) Insurance policies, issued by an insurer that is not a related party, the proceeds of which can only be
used to pay employee benefits.
Points to Remember
1. The fair value of any plan assets is deducted from the present value of the defined benefit obligation in
x
determining the deficit or surplus.
Bo
2. When no market price is available, the fair value of plan assets is estimated, for example, by
discounting expected future cash flows using a discount rate that reflects both the risk associated with
the plan assets and the maturity or expected disposal date of those assets (or, if they have no maturity,
the expected period until the settlement of the related obligation).
al
3. Plan assets exclude unpaid contributions due from the reporting entity to the fund, as well as any
non-transferable financial instruments issued by the entity and held by the fund.
b
4. Plan assets are reduced by any liabilities of the fund that do not relate to employee benefits, for
example, trade and other payables and liabilities resulting from derivative financial instruments.
lo
Retirement Benefits Paid Out
G
During an accounting year, some of the plan assets will be paid out to retirees, thus discharging part of the
benefit obligation. This is accounted for by:
A
Dr PV of defined benefit obligation X

CR FV of plan assets X
C
There is no cash entry as the pension plan itself rather than the sponsoring employer pays money out.
AC
Contributions Paid Into Plan

Contributions will be made into the plan as advised by the actuary. This is accounted for by:
DR FV of plan assets X
CR Cash X
Remeasurements of the net defined benefit liability (asset)

Remeasurements of the net defined benefit liability (asset) comprise:
(a) Actuarial gains and losses;
(b) The return on plan assets, excluding amounts included in net interest on the net defined benefit
liability (asset); and
(c) Any change in the effect of the asset ceiling, excluding amounts included in net interest on the net
defined benefit liability (asset).
93 | P a g e
Return on Plan Assets
In determining the return on plan assets, an entity deducts the costs of managing the plan assets (except
other administration costs) and any tax payable by the plan itself
Exam Focus
The opening and closing obligation and plan assets can be reconciled as follows:
x
Bo
Asset Ceiling Test
b al
When we looked at the recognition of the net defined benefit liability/(asset) in the statement of financial
lo
position stated above, the term ‗asset ceiling‘ was mentioned.
G
This term relates to a threshold established by IAS 19 to ensure that any defined benefit asset (i.e. a
pension surplus) is carried at no more than its recoverable amount. In simple terms, this means that any
net asset is restricted to the amount of cash savings that will be available to the entity in future.
A
Net Defined Benefit Assets

C
AC
A net defined benefit asset may arise if the plan has been overfunded or if actuarial gains have arisen. This
meets the definition of an asset ( as stated in the Framework) because all of the following apply.
(a) The entity controls a resource (the ability to use the surplus to generate future benefits).
(b) That control is the result of past events (contributions paid by the entity and service rendered
by the employee).
(c) Future benefits are available to the entity in the form of a reduction in future contributions or
a cash refund, either directly or indirectly to another plan in deficit.
The asset ceiling is the present value of those future benefits. The discount rate used is the same as that
used to calculate the net interest on the net defined benefit liability/(asset). The net defined benefit asset
would be reduced to the asset ceiling threshold.
Any related write down would be treated as a remeasurement and recognised in other comprehensive
income.
94 | P a g e
If the asset ceiling adjustment was needed in a subsequent year, the changes in its value would be treated
as follows:
(a) Interest (as it is a discounted amount) recognised in profit or loss as prat of the net interst
amount
(b) Other changes recognised in profit or loss.
Suggested approach and question

The suggested approach to defined benefit schemes is to deal with the change in the obligation and asset
in the following order.
x
Bo
b al
lo
G
A
C
AC
95 | P a g e
x
Bo
Other Long Term Benefits
b al
lo
Other long-term employee benefits include, for example:
G
(a) Long-term compensated absences such as long-service or sabbatical leave;

(b) Jubilee or other long-service benefits;
(c) Long-term disability benefits;
A
(d) Profit-sharing and bonuses payable twelve months or more after the end of the period in which the
employees render the related service; and
C
(e) Deferred compensation paid twelve months or more after the end of the period in which it is earned.
AC
Recognition and Measurement: Other Long Term Benefits
There are many similarities between these types of benefits and defined benefit pensions. For example, in
a long-term bonus scheme, the employees may provide service over a number of periods to earn their
entitlement to a payment at a later date. In some case, the entity may put cash aside, or invest it in some
way (perhaps by taking out an insurance policy) to meet the liabilities when they arise.
As there is normally far less uncertainty relating to the measurement of these benefits, IAS 19 requires a
simpler method of accounting for them. Unlike the accounting method for post-employment benefits, this
method does not recognise remeasurements in other comprehensive income.
The entity should recognise all of the following in profit or loss.

(a) Service cost
(b) Net interest on the defined benefit liability (asset)
(c) Remeasurement of the defined benefit liability (asset)
96 | P a g e
IFRS 2 - SHARE BASED PAYMENTS
INTRODUCTION
Share-based payment occurs when any entity purchases goods or services from another party such as a
supplier or employee and rather than paying directly in cash, settles the amount owing in shares, share
options or future cash amounts linked to the value of shares.
Prior to the publication of IFRS 2 there appeared to be an anomaly to the extent that if a company
paid its employees in cash, an expense was recognised in profit or loss, but if the payment was in share
options, no expense was recognised.
IFRS 2 requirements
IFRS 2 requires an expense to be recoginsed in profit or loss in relation to share-based payments.
x

Bo
The argument against expensing share-based payments was that there is no true expense although
expense is being recognised.
 The main argument for was the share-based payments are simply another form of compensation that
should go into the calculation of earnings for the sake of transparency for investors and the business
community.
OBJECTIVE
b al
lo
The objective of this IFRS is to specify the financial reporting by an entity when it undertakes a share-
G
based payment transaction.
SCOPE
A
A share-based payment transaction is one in which the entity transfers equity instruments, such as shares
C
or share options, in exchange for goods and services supplied by employees or third parties.
AC
IFRS 2 applies to all share-based payment transactions. The Standard recognises and addresses three
types of transactions according to the method of settlement.
 Equity-settled share-based payment transactions

The entity receives goods or services in exchange for equity instruments of the entity (including
shares or share options).
 Cash-settled share-based payment transactions
The entity receives goods or services in exchange for amounts of cash that are based on the price (or
value) of the entity's shares or other equity Instruments of the entity.
 Transactions with a choice of settlement
The entity receives goods or services and either the entity or the supplier has a choice as to whether
the entity settles the transaction in cash (or other assets) or by issuing equity instruments.
97 | P a g e
Transactions outside the scope of IFRS 2
The following are outside the scope of IFRS 2:
 Transactions with employees and others in their capacity as a holder of equity instruments of the
entity
 The issue of equity instruments in exchange for control of another entity In a business combination
 Contracts that may or will be settled, net in company shares (IFRS 9)
DEFINITIONS
Before considering the accounting treatment of share-based payment transactions, it is important to

understand the terminology used within the topic.
x
Bo
b al
Share-based payment transaction A share-based payment transaction in which the entity
lo
acquires goods or services by incurring a liability to transfer cash or other assets to the supplier of those
goods or services for amounts that are based on the price (or value) of equity instruments (including
G
shares or share options) of the entity or another group entity.
Share-based payment arrangement An agreement between the entity and another party (including
A
an employee) to enter into a share-based payment transaction, which thereby entitles the other party to
C
receive cash or other assets of the entity for amounts that are based on the price of the entity's shares or
other equity instruments of the entity, or to receive equity instruments of the entity, provided the
AC
specified vesting conditions, if any, are met.
Equity instrument A contract that evidences a residual interest in the assets of an entity after deducting
all of its liabilities.
Equity instrument granted The right (conditional or unconditional) to an equity instrument of the
entity conferred by the entity on another party, under a share-based payment arrangement.
Share option A contract that gives the holder the right, but not the obligation, to subscribe to the
entity's shares at a fixed or determinable price for a specified period of time.
Grant date The date at which the entity and another party (including an employee) agree to a share-
based payment arrangement, being when the entity and the other party have a shared understanding of
the terms and conditions of the arrangement. At grant date the entity confers on the other party (the
counterparty) the right to cash, other assets, or equity instruments of the entity, provided the specified
vesting conditions, if any, are met. If that agreement is subject to an approval process (for example, by
shareholders), grant date is the date when that approval is obtained.
98 | P a g e
Intrinsic value The difference between the fair value of the shares to which the counterparty has the
(conditional or unconditional) right to subscribe or which it has the right to receive, and the price (if any)
the other party is (or will be) required to pay for those shares. For example, a share option with an
exercise price of $15 on a share with a fair value of $20, has an intrinsic value of $5.
Measurement date The date at which the fair value of the equity instruments granted is measured. For
transactions with employees and others providing similar services, the measurement date is grant date.
For transactions with parties other than employees (and those providing similar services), the
measurement date is the date the entity obtains the goods or the counterparty renders service.
Vest To become an entitlement. Under a share-based payment arrangement, a counterparty‘s right

to receive cash, other assets or equity instruments of the entity vests when the counterparty‘s
entitlement is no longer conditional on the satisfaction of any vesting conditions.
Vesting conditions The conditions that must be satisfied for the counterparty to become entitled to
x
receive cash, other assets or equity instruments of the entity, under a share-based payment arrangement.
Vesting conditions include service conditions, which require the other party to complete a specified period
Bo
of service, and performance conditions, which require specified performance targets to be met (such as a
specified increase in the entity's profit over a specified period of time).
arrangement are to be satisfied.
General rules – A summary

b al
Vesting period The period during which all the specified vesting conditions of a share-based payment
lo
RECOGNITION
G
 An entity shall recognize the goods or services received or acquired in a share-based payment
transaction when it obtains the goods or as the services are received.
A
 When the goods or services received or acquired in a share-based payment transaction do not
qualify for recognition as assets, they shall be recognized as expenses.
C
 Goods might be consumed over a period of time or, in the case of inventories, sold at a later date,
in which case an expense is recognized when the goods are consumed or sold.
AC
 The entity shall recognize a corresponding increase in equity if the goods or services were
received in an equity-settled share-based payment transaction or a liability if the goods or services
were acquired in a cash-settled share-based payment transaction.
MEASUREMENT
 For equity-settled share-based payment transactions, the entity shall measure the goods or
services received, and the corresponding increase in equity, directly, at the fair value of the
goods or services received, unless that fair value cannot be estimated reliably.
 If the entity cannot estimate reliably the fair value of the goods or services received, the entity
shall measure their value, and the corresponding increase in equity, indirectly, by reference to the
fair value of the equity instruments granted.
99 | P a g e
EQUITY-SETTLED SHARE-BASED PAYMENT TRANSACTIONS
Where payment for goods or services is in the form of shares or share options, the fair value of the
transaction-is recognised in profit or loss, spread over the vesting period.
Introduction
If goods or services are received in exchange for shares or share options the transaction is accounted for
by:
Dr. Expense/Asset
Cr. Equity
IFRS 2 does not stipulate which equity account the credit entry is made to. It is normal practice to credit a
separate component of equity, mostly retained earnings are credited.
We must next consider:
x
Bo
1 Measurement of the total expense taken to profit or loss
2 When this expense should be recorded.
Measurement
transactions are measured at fair value.

b al
When considering the total expense to profit or loss, the basic principle is that equity-settled share-based
lo
Fair value will depend upon who the transaction is with:
G
 There is a rebuttable presumption that the fair value of goods / services received from a third party
can be measured reliably.

A
It is not normally possible to measure services received when the shares or share options form part of
the remuneration package of employees.
C
AC
Transaction with third parties Transaction with employees
services be measured reliably?
Yes No
services on the date they were
100 | P a g e
Transactions in Which Services are Received

Allocation of expense to financial years
Immediate vesting
Where the instruments granted vest immediately, i.e. the recipient party becomes entitled to them
immediately, and then the transaction is accounted for in full on the grant date.
Vesting period exists
Where entitlement to the instruments granted is conditional on vesting conditions, and these are to be
met over a specified vesting period, the expense is spread over the vesting period.
Transactions with third parties (non-employees)
x
Applying the rules seen in the sections above, transactions with third parties are normally
Bo
 Measured at the fair value of goods / services received
 Recorded when the goods / services are received
Transactions with employees

b al
Applying the rules seen in the sections above, transactions with employees are normally
lo
 Measured at the fair value of equity instruments granted at grant date
 Spread over the vesting period (often a specified period of employment)
G
Immediate vesting
A
If the equity instruments granted vest immediately, the counterparty is not required to complete a
C
specified period of service before becoming unconditionally entitled to those equity instruments. The
entity shall presume that services rendered by the counterparty as consideration for the equity
AC
instruments have been received. In this case, on grant date the entity shall recognize the services received
in full, with a corresponding increase in equity.
Vesting Period
If the equity instruments granted do not vest until the counterparty completes a specified period of
service, the entity should account for those services as they are rendered by the counterparty during the
vesting period.
Transactions Measured by Reference to the Fair Value of the Equity Instruments Granted
Determining the fair value of equity instruments granted
For transactions measured by reference to the fair value of the equity instruments granted, an entity shall
measure the fair value of equity instruments granted at the measurement date, based on market prices if
available.
101 | P a g e
If market prices are not available, the entity shall estimate the fair value of the equity instruments granted
using a valuation technique to estimate what the price of those equity instruments would have been on
the measurement date in an arm‘s length transaction between knowledgeable, willing parties.
Treatment of Vesting Conditions
The Impact of Different Types of Vesting Conditions

Vesting conditions may be:
 Non-market based i.e. not relating to the market value of the entity's shares
 Market based i.e. linked to the market price of the entity's shares in some way
Non-market based vesting conditions

 These conditions are taken into account when determining the expense which must be taken to profit
or loss in each year of the vesting period.
 Only the number of shares or share options expected to vest will be account for.
x
 At each period end (including interim periods), the number expected to vest should be revised as
Bo
necessary
 On the vesting date, the entity should revise the estimate to equal the number of shares or share
options that do actually vest.
Market Based Vesting Conditions


al
These conditions are taken into account when calculating the fair value of the equity instruments at
the grant date.
b
lo
 They are not taken into account when estimating the number of shares or share options likely to vest
at each period end.
G
 If the shares or share options do not vest, any amount recognised in the financial statements will
remain.
A
Market and non-market based vesting conditions

C
Where equity instruments are granted with both, market and non-market vesting conditions, an entity
AC
should recognise an expense irrespective of whether market conditions are satisfied provided all other
vesting conditions are satisfied.
In summary, where market and non-market conditions co-exist, it makes no difference whether the
market conditions are achieved. The possibility that the target share price may not be achieved has
already been taken into account when estimating the fair value of the options at grant date. Therefore, the
amounts recognised as an expense in each year will be the same regardless of what share price has been
achieved.
Other issues
Transactions during the year
Where the grant date arises mid-year, the calculation of the amount charged to profit or loss must be pro-
rated to reflect that feet
102 | P a g e
Vested options not exercised
If, after the vesting date, options are not exercised or the equity instrument is forfeited, there will be no
impact on the financial statements. This is because the holder of the equity instrument has effectively
made that decision as an investor.
The services for which the equity instrument remunerated were received by the entity and the financial
statements reflect the substance of this transaction. IFRS 2 does, however, permit a transfer to be made
between reserves in such circumstances to avoid an amount remaining in a separate equity reserve where
no equity instrument will be issued.
Variable vesting date
Where the vesting date is variable depending upon non-market based vesting conditions, the calculation
of the amount expensed in profit or loss must be based upon the best estimate of when vesting will occur.
MODIFICATIONS AND RE-PRICING
x
Bo
Equity instruments may be modified before they vest.
E.g. A downturn in the equity market may mean that the original option exercise price set is no longer
attractive. Therefore the exercise price is reduced (the option is 're-priced') to make it valuable again.
in profit or loss.
b al
Such modifications will often affect the fair value of the instrument and therefore the amount recognised
lo
The accounting treatment of modifications and re-pricing is:
G
 Continue to recognise the original fair value of the instrument in the normal way (even where the
modification has reduced the fair value).
 Recognise any increase in fair value at the modification date (or any increase in the number of
A
instruments granted as a result of modification) spread over the period between the modification date
and vesting date.
C
 If modification occurs after the vesting date, then the additional fair value must be recognised
immediately unless there is, for example, an additional service period, in which case the difference is
AC
spread over this period.
CANCELLATIONS AND SETTLEMENTS
An entity may settle or cancel an equity instrument during the vesting period. Where this is the case, the
correct accounting treatment is:
 To immediately charge any remaining fair value of the instrument that has not been recognised in
profit or loss (the cancellation or settlement accelerates the charge and does not avoid it).
 Any amount paid to the employees by the entity on settlement should be treated as a buyback of
shares and should be recognised as a deduction from equity. If the amount of any such payment is in
excess of the fair value of the equity instrument granted, the excess should be recognised immediately
in profit or loss.
103 | P a g e
Cancellation and reissuance
Where an entity has been through a capital restructuring or there has been a significant downturn in the
equity market through external factors, an alternative to repricing the share options is to cancel them and
issue new options based on revised terms. The end result is essentially the same as an entity modifying the
original options and therefore should be recognised in the same way.
Repurchase after vesting
Where equity instruments are repurchased by an employing entity following vesting, this is similar to the
entity providing the employee with cash remuneration in the first instance. The reporting therefore
reflects this with the payment being recognised as a deduction from equity. The charge recognised in
profit or loss will remain, as this reflects the services for which the employee has been remunerated. If the
payment made is in excess of the fair value of the instruments granted, then this is recognised
immediately in profit or loss reflecting that this is payment for additional services beyond what was
originally agreed.
ox
Determining the fair value of equity instruments granted
Where a transaction is measured by reference to the fair value of the equity instruments granted, fair
lB
value is based on market prices where available.
If marker price are not available the entity should estimate the fair value of the equity instruments
ba
granted
CASH SETTLED BASED TRANSACTIONS

lo
 For cash-settled share-based payment transactions, the entity shall measure the goods or services
acquired and the liability incurred at the fair value of the liability.
G
 Until the liability is settled, the entity shall remeasure the fair value of the liability at the end of
each reporting period and at the date of settlement, with any changes in fair value recognised in
profit or loss for the period.
A
C
If goods or services are received in exchange for cash amounts linked to the value of shares, the
transactions is accounted for by:
AC
Dr Expense/Asset
Cr Liability
TRANSACTION WITH A CHOICE OF SETTLEMENT
Counter party has the choice
For transactions with parties other than employees, the entity shall measure the equity component of the
compound financial instrument as the difference between the fair value of the goods or services received
and the fair value of the debt component, at the date when the goods or services are received.
Fair value of goods/services $x

Less Liability (PV) ($x)
(R.V) Equity Option $x
104 | P a g e
Double Entry:
Dr. Asset/ Expense $xxx
Cr. Liability $xxx
Cr. Equity Option $xxx
Liability will be remeasured
For transactions with employees, the entity shall measure the fair value of the compound financial
instrument at the measurement date, taking into account the terms and conditions on which the rights to
cash or equity instruments were granted.
Fair value of equity route/ alternative $xxx

Less liability (PV) ($xxx)
(R.V) Equity Option $xxx
IFRS 2 requires that the value of the debt component is established first. The equity component is then
x
measured as the residual between that amount and the value of the instrument as a whole. In this respect
IFRS 2 applies similar principles to IFRS 9 Financial Instruments, where the value of the debt
Bo
components is established first. However, the method used to value the constituent parts of the
compound instrument in IFRS 2 differs from that of IFRS 9.
service =
b al
component + (residual)
For transactions in which the fair value of goods or services is measured directly (that is normally where
lo
the recipient is not an employee of the company), the fair value of the equity component is measured as
the difference between the fair value of the goods or services required and the fair value of the debt
G
component.
For other transactions including those with employees where the fair value of the goods or services is
A
measured indirectly by reference to the fair value of the equity instruments granted, the fair value of the
compound instrument is estimated as a whole.
C
The debt and equity components must then be valued separately. Normally transactions are structured in
AC
such a way that the fair value of each alternative settlement is the same.
Entity has the choice
When entity has the choice of settlement, the entity shall determine whether it has present obligation to
deliver cash or not. Such circumstances arise where, for example, the entity is prohibited from issuing
shares or where it has a stated policy, or past practice, of issuing cash rather than shares.
If the entity has a present obligation to settle in cash, the entity should record the transaction as if it is
cash settled share based payment transaction.
If no present obligation exists, the entity should treat the transaction as if it was equity settled transaction.
On settlement, if the transaction was treated as an equity-settled transaction and cash was paid, the cash
should be treated as if it was a repurchase of the equity instrument by a deduction against equity.
105 | P a g e
DEFERRED TAX IMPLICATIONS
Share based payments
Share-based transactions may be tax deductible in some jurisdictions. However, the amount deductible
for tax purpose does not always correspond to the amount that is charged to profit or loss under IFRS 2.
In most cases it is not just the amount but also the timing of the expense allowable for tax purposes that
will differ from that required by IFRS 2.
For example an entity recognises an expense for share options granted under IFRS 2, but does not receive
a tax deduction until die options are exercised. The tax deduction will be based on the share price on the
exercise date and will be measured on the basis of the options' intrinsic value i.e. the difference between
market price and exercise price at the exercise date.
In the case of share-based employee benefits under IFRS 2 the cost of the services as reflected in the
x
financial statements is expensed and therefore the carrying amount is nil.
Bo
The difference between the carrying amount of nil and the tax base of share-based payment expense
received to date is a deferred tax asset, provided the entity has sufficient future taxable profits to utilise
this deferred tax asset.
al
The deferred tax asset temporary difference is measured as:
b
lo
G
A
C
If the amount of the tax deduction (or estimated future tax deduction) exceeds the amount of the related
AC
cumulative remuneration expense, this indicates that the tax deduction relates also to an equity item.
The excess is therefore recognised directly in equity. The examples below show the accounting for equity-
settled and cash-settled transactions.
DISCLOSURES
IFRS 2 requires extensive disclosures under three main headings:
 Information that enables users of financial statements to understand the nature and extent of the
share-based payment transactions that existed during the period.
 Information that allows users of financial statements to understand how the fair value of the
goods or services received, or the fair value of the equity instruments which have been granted
during the period, was determined.
 Information that allows users of financial statements to understand the effect of expenses, which
have arisen from share-based payment transactions, on the entity‘s profit or loss in the period.
106 | P a g e
IAS 12 – INCOME TAXES
IAS 12, Income Taxes, deals with taxes on income, both current tax and deferred tax. Income tax
accounting is complex, and preparers and users find some aspects difficult to understand and apply.
These difficulties arise from exceptions to the principles in the current standard, and from areas where
the accounting does not reflect the economics of the transactions.
Objective
The objective of IAS 12 is to prescribe the accounting treatment for income taxes.
Definitions
Accounting profit
This is the net profit (or loss) for the reporting period before deducting tax expense.
x
Taxable Profit
Bo
This is the profit (or loss) for a period, determined in accordance with the local tax authority's rules, upon
which income taxes are payable.
Tax Expense
b al
Tax in the statement of profit or loss may consist of three elements:
lo
 Current tax expense

G
 Adjustments to tax charges of prior periods (over/under provisions)

 Transfers to/from deferred tax.
A
CURRENT TAX
C
This is the amount of income tax payable (or recoverable) to tax authorities in relation to the current
AC
trading activities and the taxable profit (or loss) for the current period.
Measurement of Current Tax
The current tax expense for a period is based on the taxable and deductible amounts that will be shown on
the tax return for the current year.
IAS 12 requires any unpaid tax in respect of the current or prior periods to be recognised as a liability.
Conversely, any excess tax paid in respect of current or prior periods over what is due should be
recognised as an asset to the extent it is probable that it will be recoverable.
The tax rate to be used in the calculation for determining a current tax asset or liability is the rate that is
expected to apply when the asset is expected to be recovered, or the liability to be paid. These rates should
be based upon tax laws that have already been enacted (are already part of law) or substantively enacted
(have already passed through sufficient parts of the legal process that they are virtually certain to be
enacted) by the reporting date.
107 | P a g e
Accounting for Current Tax
In most jurisdictions, tax is paid several months after the end of the accounting period. At the period end,
an estimated amount is accrued based on the year‘s profits:
Dr Income tax e xpense (P&L) estimated tax charge
Cr Tax payable (liability in SOFP) estimated tax charge
When the tax is actually paid some months later, it is recorded by:
Dr Tax payable (SFP) amount paid
Cr Cash amount paid.
Since the amount paid is likely to differ from the estimated tax charge originally accrued, a balance is left
on the tax payable account:
x
Bo
Tax payable
Cash (tax paid) X Income tax (estimated tax charge) X
Overprovision c/f X
al
Under provision c/f
b X
lo
An overprovision arises where the actual tax paid is less than the estimated tax charge. This reduces
the following year‘s tax charge in the statement of profit or loss.
G
An underprovision arises where the actual tax paid is more than the estimated charge. This increases
the following year‘s tax charge in the statement of profit or loss.
A
Recognition of current tax

C
Normally, current tax is recognised as income or expense and included in the net profit or loss for the
AC
period. However, where tax arises from a transaction or event which is recognised as other comprehensive
income recognised directly in equity (in the same or a different period) rather than in profit or loss, then
the related tax should also be reported as other comprehensive income or reported directly in equity. An
example of such a situation is where, under IAS 8, an adjustment is made to the opening balance of
retained earnings due to either a change in accounting policy that is applied retrospectively, or to the
correction of a material error. Any related tax is therefore also recognised directly in equity.
Presentation
Statement of financial position, tax assets and liabilities should be shown separately. Current tax assets
and liabilities may be offset, only under the following conditions.
 The entity has a legally enforceable right to set off the recognised amounts.
 The entity intends to settle the amounts on a net basis, or to realise the asset and settle the
liability at the same time.
The tax expense (income) related to the profit or loss from ordinary activities should be shown on the face
of the statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income as part of profit or loss for the period.
108 | P a g e
Summary: Accounting for Current Tax

 Current taxes include tax payable for current period and adjustment of under/over provision of
prior periods
 Current taxes are to be treated as an expense
 If the tax expense and the provision at the end of the year are greater than the payment, the
shortfall in the payment will be disclosed as a current tax liability and vice versa.
DEFERRED TAX
A mismatch can occur because International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS) recognition criteria
for items of income and expense are different from the treatment of items under tax law. Deferred
taxation accounting attempts to deal with this mismatch. The IAS 12 standard is based on the temporary
differences between the tax base of an asset or liability and its carrying amount in the financial
statements.
Tax Base
x
Bo
This is the amount attributed to an asset or liability for tax purposes, based on the expected manner of
recovery.
IAS 12 focuses on the future tax consequences of recovering an asset only to the extent of its carrying
will be capped at the asset's carrying amount.

b al
amount at the date of the financial statements. Future taxable amounts arising from recovery of the asset
For example, a property may be revalued upwards but not sold, creating a temporary difference because
lo
the carrying amount of the asset in the financial statements is greater than the tax base of the asset. The
tax consequence is a deferred tax liability.
G
Tax base-Asset
A
The tax base of an asset is the value of the asset in the current period for tax purposes. This is either;
C
 The amount that will be tax deductible in the future against taxable economic benefits when the
carrying amount of the asset is recovered, or

AC
If those economic benefits are not taxable, the tax base is equal to the carrying amount of the
asset.
Tax base-Liability
 The tax base of a liability is its carrying amount less any amount that will be tax deductible in the
future.
 For revenue received in advance, the tax base of the resulting liability is its carrying amount less
any amount of the revenue that will not be taxable in future periods.
Revenue received in advance.
The tax base of the recognised liability is its carrying amount, less revenue that will not be taxable in
future periods
Unrecognised items.
If items have a tax base but are not recognised in the statement of financial position, the carrying amount
is nil
109 | P a g e
Tax bases not immediately apparent.
If the tax base of an item is not immediately apparent, the tax base should effectively be determined in
such as manner to ensure the future tax consequences of recovery or settlement of the item is recognised
as a deferred tax amount
Consolidated financial statements.
In consolidated financial statements, the carrying amounts in the consolidated financial statements are
used, and the tax bases determined by reference to any consolidated tax return (or otherwise from the tax
returns of each entity in the group).
CASES OF NO DEFERRED TAX
IAS 12 states that in the following circumstances, the tax base of an asset or liability will be equal to its
carrying amount:
x
 Accrued expenses that have already been deducted in determining an entity's tax liability for the
Bo
current or earlier periods.
 A loan payable that is measured at the amount originally received and this amount is the same as
the amount repayable on final maturity of the loan.
 Accrued income that will never be taxable.
ACCOUNTING FOR DEFERRED TAX

al
Deferred tax liabilities are the amounts of income taxes payable in future periods in respect of taxable
temporary differences.
b
lo
In simple terms, deferred tax is tax that is payable in the future. However, to understand this definition
G
more fully, it is necessary to explain the term ‗taxable temporary differences‘.
Deferred tax assets are the amounts of income taxes recoverable in future periods in respect of:
A
 Deductible temporary differences

 The carry forward of unused tax losses
C
 The carry forward of unused tax credits

AC
A deferred tax asset is recognised to the extent that it is probable that taxable profit will be available
against which the deductible temporary difference can be used. This also applies to deferred tax assets for
unused tax losses carried forward.
This is an application of prudence concept.
Reassessment of unrecognised deferred tax assets
For all unrecognised deferred tax assets, at each reporting date an entity should reassess the availability of
future taxable profits and whether part or all of any unrecognised deferred tax assets should now be
recognised. This may be due to an improvement in trading conditions which is expected to continue.
TEMPORARY DIFFERENCES
Temporary differences are differences between the carrying amount of an asset or liability in the
SOFP and its tax base.
110 | P a g e
Temporary differences may be of two types:
i. Taxable temporary differences are temporary differences that will result in taxable amounts in
determining taxable profit (tax loss) of future periods when the carrying amount of the asset or liability is
recovered or settled.
IAS 12 requires that a deferred tax liability is recorded in respect of all taxable temporary differences that
exist at the year-end – this is sometimes known as the full provision method.
Within financial statements, non-current assets with a limited economic life are subject to depreciation.
However, within tax computations, non-current assets are subject to capital allowances (also known as tax
depreciation) at rates set within the relevant tax legislation. Where at the year-end the cumulative
depreciation charged and the cumulative capital allowances claimed are different, the carrying value of
the asset (cost less accumulated depreciation) will then be different to its tax base (cost less accumulated
capital allowances) and hence a taxable temporary difference arises.
x
Examples
Bo
A taxable temporary difference occurs when:
 Depreciation or amortisation is accelerated for tax purposes
 al
Development costs capitalised in the statement of financial position deducted against taxable
b
profit when the expenditure was incurred
 Interest income is included in the statement of financial position when earned, but included in
lo
taxable profit when the cash is actually received

G
Prepayments in the statement of financial position deducted against taxable profits when the
cash expense was incurred
 Revaluation/Fair value adjustment of assets with no adjustment of the tax base.
A
 Deferred tax on impairment where these adjustments are ignored for tax purposes until the asset
is sold.
C
ii. Deductible temporary differences are temporary differences that will result in amounts that
AC
are deductible in determining taxable profit (tax loss) of future periods when the carrying amount of
the asset or liability is recovered or settled.
A deferred tax asset (DTA) shall be recognised for all deductible temporary differences to the extent it is
probable that taxable profit will be available against which the deductible temporary difference can be
utilised.
 Provisions, accrued product warranty costs for which the taxation laws do not permit the
deduction until the company actually pays the claims. This is a deductible difference as its taxable
profits for the current period will be higher than those in future, when they will be lower.
111 | P a g e
Calculation of Deferred taxes
Deferred tax assets and deferred tax liabilities can be calculated using the following formulae:
The following formula can be used in the calculation of deferred taxes arising from unused tax losses or
unused tax credits:
Measurement of deferred tax assets and liabilities
Deferred tax is provided in full for all temporary differences arising between the tax bases of assets and
x
liabilities and their carrying amounts in the financial statements.
Bo
Tax rates
 Measurement shall be at the tax rates expected to apply to the period when the asset is realised or


liability is settled.
al
The rates used shall be those enacted or substantially enacted by the end of the reporting period.
b
Measurement depends upon the expectations about the manner in which the recovery of tax asset
lo
or settlement of tax liability will take place.
 Deferred tax expense is recognized as an expense in statement of profit or loss. If the tax relates to
G
items that are credited or charged directly to equity, then this current tax and deferred tax shall
also be charged or credited directly to equity.
 A change in tax rates or tax laws, a reassessment of the recoverability of deferred tax assets or a
A
change in the expected manner of recovery of an asset have tax consequences that are recognised
in profit or loss, except to the extent that they relate to items previously charged or credited
C
outside profit or loss.


AC
The measurement of deferred tax liabilities and deferred tax assets reflects the tax consequences
of the manner in which the entity expects to recover or settle the carrying amount of its assets and
liabilities. The expected manner of recovery for land with an unlimited life is always through sale,
but for other assets the manner in which management expects to recover the asset, either through
use or sale or both, should be considered at each date of the financial statements.
 Where the tax rate or tax base is impacted by the manner in which the entity recovers its assets or
settles its liabilities (e.g. whether an asset is sold or used), the measurement of deferred taxes is
consistent with the way in which an asset is recovered or liability settled
 Where deferred taxes arise from revalued non-depreciable assets (e.g. revalued land), deferred
taxes reflect the tax consequences of selling the asset
 Deferred taxes arising from investment property measured at fair value under IAS 40 Investment
Property reflect the rebuttable presumption that the investment property will be recovered
through sale
 If dividends are paid to shareholders, and this causes income taxes to be payable at a higher or
lower rate, or the entity pays additional taxes or receives a refund, deferred taxes are measured
using the tax rate applicable to undistributed profits
112 | P a g e
Discounting
 In the case of deferred tax assets and liabilities, the values are not to be discounted. Deferred tax
assets and liabilities should not be discounted because the complexities and difficulties involved
will affect reliability and comparability would be affected.
However that where carrying amounts of assets or liabilities are discounted (e.g. a pension
obligation), the temporary difference is determined based on a discounted value.
RECOGNITION OF DEFERRED TAX IN THE FINANCIAL

STATEMENTS
The deferred tax amount calculated is recorded as a deferred tax balance in the statement of financial
position with a corresponding entry to the tax charge, other comprehensive income or goodwill.
Principles of recognition
x
As with current tax, deferred tax should normally be recognised as income or an expense amount within
Bo
the tax charge, and included in the net profit or loss for the period. Only the movement in the deferred tax
asset / liability on the statement of financial position is recorded:
Dr Tax charge X
Cr
Or
Deferred tax liability
b al X
lo
Dr Deferred tax asset X
G
Cr Tax charge X
Note that the recognition of a deferred tax asset may be restricted

A
Therefore, the movement in the deferred tax liability in the year is recorded in the statement of profit or
C
loss where:
AC
 an increase in the liability, increases the tax expense

 a decrease in the liability, decreases the tax expense.
The closing figures are reported in the Statement of Financial Position as the deferred tax liability.
Exceptions to recognition in profit or loss
 Deferred tax relating to items dealt with as other comprehensive income (such as a revaluation)
should be recognised as tax relating to other comprehensive income within the statement of
comprehensive income.
 Deferred tax relating to items dealt with directly in equity (such as the correction of an error or
retrospective application of a change in accounting policy) should also be recognised directly in
equity.
 Deferred tax resulting from a business combination is included in the initial cost of goodwill (This is
covered in more detail later in the chapter).
 Initial recognition of an asset or liability in a transaction that is not a business combination and that
affects neither accounting profit nor taxable profit.
 Investments in subsidiaries, branches, associates and joint ventures where certain criteria apply.
113 | P a g e
Where it is not possible to determine the amount of current/deferred tax that relates to other
comprehensive income and items credited/charged to equity, such tax amounts should be based on a
reasonable pro rata allocation of the entity's current/deferred tax.
COMPONENTS OF DEFERRED TAX
Deferred tax charges will consist of two components:
(a) Deferred tax relating to temporary differences.
(b) Adjustments relating to changes in the carrying amount of deferred tax assets/ liabilities (where
there is no change in temporary differences), eg changes in tax rates/ laws, reassessment of the
recoverability of deferred tax assets, or a change in the expected recovery of an asset
Common scenarios
There are a number of common examples which result in a taxable or deductible temporary difference.
x
This list is not, however exhaustive.
Bo
TAXABLE TEMPORARY DIFFERENCES
Accelerated capital allowances

al
These arise when capital allowances for tax purposes are received before deductions for accounting
depreciation are recognised in the statement of financial position (accelerated capital allowances).
b
The temporary difference is the difference between the carrying amount of the asset at the reporting
date and its tax written down value (tax base).
lo
 The resulting deferred tax is recognised in profit or loss.
G
Interest revenue
 In some jurisdictions interest revenue may be included in profit or loss on an accruals basis, but taxed
A
when received.
 The temporary difference is equivalent to the income accrual at the reporting date as the tax base of
C
the interest receivable is nil.

AC
Development costs
 Development costs may be capitalised for accounting purposes in accordance with IAS 38 while being
deducted from taxable profit in the period incurred (i.e. they receive immediate tax relief).
 The temporary difference is equivalent to the amount capitalised at the reporting date as the tax base
of the costs is nil since they have already been deducted from taxable profits.
Revaluations to fair value-property, plant and equipment
IFRS permits or requires some assets to be revalued to fair value, e.g. property, plant and equipment
under IAS 16.
Temporary difference
In some jurisdictions a revaluation will affect taxable profit in the current period. In this case, no
temporary difference arises as both carrying value and the tax base are adjusted.
114 | P a g e
In other jurisdictions, including the UK, the revaluation does not affect taxable profits in the period of
revaluation and consequently, the tax base of the asset is not adjusted. Hence a temporary difference
arises.
This should be provided for in full based on the difference between carrying amount and tax base.
An upward revaluation will therefore give rise to a deferred tax liability, even if:
 The entity does not intend to dispose of the asset

 Tax due on any future gain can be deferred through rollover relief
This is because the revalued amount will be recovered through use which will generate taxable income in
excess of the depreciation allowable for tax purposes in future periods.
Manner of recovery
The carrying amount of a revalued asset may be recovered
x
Bo
 Through sale, or
 Through continued use.
The manner of recovery may affect the tax rate applicable to the temporary difference, and / or the tax
base of the asset.
Recording deferred tax

b al
lo
As the underlying revaluation is recognised as other comprehensive income, so the deferred tax thereon is
also recognised as part of tax relating to other comprehensive income. The accounting entry is therefore:
G
Dr Tax on other comprehensive income X

A
Cr Deferred tax liability X

C
Non-depreciated revalued assets

AC
Recovery of Revalued Non-Depreciable Assets requires that deferred tax should be recognised even where
non-current assets are not depreciated (e.g. land). This is because the carrying value will ultimately be
recovered on disposal.
Revaluations to fair value - other assets
IFRS permit or require certain other assets to be revalued to fair value, for example:
 Certain financial instruments under IFRS 9

 Investment properties under IAS 40
Where the revaluation is recognised in profit or loss (e.g. fair value through profit or loss instruments,
investment properties) and the amount is taxable / allowable for tax, and then no deferred tax arises as
both the carrying value and the tax base are adjusted.
Where the revaluation is recognised as other comprehensive income (e.g. financial assets at fair value
through other comprehensive income) and does not therefore impact taxable profits, then the tax base of
115 | P a g e
the asset is not adjusted and deferred tax arises. This deferred tax is also recognised as other
comprehensive income.
Retirement benefit costs
In the financial statements, retirement benefit costs are deducted from accounting profit as the service is
provided by the employee. They are not deducted in determining taxable profit until the entity pays either
retirement benefits or contributions to a fund. Thus a temporary difference may arise.
 A deductible temporary difference arises between the carrying amount of the net defined benefit
liability and its tax base. The tax base is usually nil.
 The deductible temporary difference will normally reverse.
 A deferred tax asset is recognised for this temporary difference to the extent that it is recoverable, that
is sufficient profit will be available against which the deductible temporary difference can be utilised.
 If there is a net defined benefit asset for example when there is a surplus in the pension plan, a taxable
temporary difference arises and a deferred tax liability is recognised.
x
Under IAS 12, both current and deferred tax must be recognised outside profit or loss if the tax relates to
items that are recognised outside profit or loss. This could make things complicated as it interacts with
Bo
IAS 19 Employee benefits.
IAS 19 allows a choice of accounting policy regarding recognition of actuarial gains and losses:


al
In profit or loss either in the period in which they occur or deferred on a systematic basis
In other comprehensive income in the period in which they occur.
b
lo
It may be difficult to determine the amount of current and deferred tax that relates to items recognised in
profit or loss or in other comprehensive income. As an approximation, current and deferred taxes are
allocated on an appropriate basis, often pro rata.
G
Deferred tax movement relating to the actuarial losses

A
IAS 12 Income Taxes requires deferred tax relating to items charged or credited to other comprehensive
C
income to be recognised in other comprehensive income hence the amount of the deferred tax movement
relating to the actuarial losses charged directly to OCI must be split out and credited directly to OCI.
AC
Dividends receivable from overseas companies
 Dividends received from UK companies are not taxable on other UK companies. Dividends received
from overseas companies, however, are.
 Overseas dividends receivable may be included in profit or loss on an accruals basis, but taxed when
received.
 The temporary difference is equal to the dividend receivable (asset) at the reporting date, as the tax
base of the dividend receivable is nil.
 The calculation of deferred tax should take into account any double taxation relief which may be
available.
 The deferred tax arising is recognised in profit or loss.
116 | P a g e
DEDUCTIBLE TEMPORARY DIFFERENCES
Tax losses
Where tax losses arise, the manner of recognition of these in the financial statements depends upon how
they are expected to be utilised.
 If losses are carried back to crystallise a refund, then a receivable is recorded in the statement of
financial position and the corresponding credit is to the current tax charge.
 If losses are carried forward to be used against future profits or gains, then they should be recognised
as deferred tax assets to the extent that it is probable that future taxable profit will be available
against which the losses can be used.
Unused tax credits carried forward against taxable profits will also give rise to a deferred tax asset to the
extent that profits will exist against which they can be utilised.
x
Recognition of deferred tax asset
Bo
The existence of unused tax losses is strong evidence that future taxable profit may not be available. The
following should be considered before recognising any deferred tax asset:
 Whether an entity has sufficient taxable temporary differences against which the unused tax losses
can be offset
al
 Whether it is probable that the entity will have taxable profits before the unused tax losses expire
b
 Whether the tax losses result from identifiable causes which are unlikely to recur
lo
 Whether tax planning opportunities are available to create taxable profit
Group tax relief
G
Where the acquisition of a subsidiary means that tax losses which previously could not be utilised, can
now be utilised against the profits of the subsidiary, a deferred tax asset may be recognised in the financial
statements of the parent company. This amount is not taken into account in calculating goodwill arising
A
on acquisition.
C
Provisions
AC
 A provision is recognised for accounting purposes when there is a present obligation, but it is not
deductible for tax purposes until the expenditure is incurred
 In this case, the temporary difference is equal to the amount of the provision, since the tax base is nil
 Deferred tax is recognised in profit or loss
117 | P a g e
Share based payments
Share-based transactions may be tax deductible in some jurisdictions. However, the amount deductible
for tax purposes does not always correspond to the amount that is charged to profit or loss under IFRS 2.
In most cases it is not just the amount but also the timing of the expense allowable for tax purposes that
will differ from that required by IFRS 2.
For example an entity recognises an expense for share options granted under IFRS 2, but does not receive
a tax deduction until the options are exercised. The tax deduction will be based on the share price on the
exercise date and will be measured on the basis of the options' intrinsic value ie the difference between
market price and exercise price at the exercise date. In the case of share-based employee benefits under
IFRS 2 the cost of the services as reflected in the financial statements is expensed and therefore the
carrying amount is nil.
The difference between the carrying amount of nil and the tax base of share-based payment expense
x
received to date is a deferred tax asset, provided the entity has sufficient future taxable profits to utilise
this deferred tax asset
Bo
The deferred tax asset temporary difference is measured as:
b al
lo
G
A
If the amount of the tax deduction (or estimated future tax deduction) exceeds the amount of the related
cumulative remuneration expense, this indicates that the tax deduction relates also to an equity item.
C
AC
118 | P a g e
The excess is therefore recognised directly in equity. The diagrams below show the accounting for equity-
settled and cash-settled transactions.
Tax Deduction
Greater than Smaller than
remuneration
x
remuneration
Bo
benefit is
recorded in
b al benefit is
recorded in
lo
up to the
G
cumulative
A
expense
C
AC
All
future tax
DEFERRED TAX ARISING FROM A BUSINESS COMBINATION

Fair value adjustments on consolidation
IFRS 3 requires assets acquired on acquisition of a subsidiary or associate to be recognized at their fair
value rather than their carrying amount in the individual financial statements of the subsidiary. The fair
119 | P a g e
value adjustment does not, however, have any impact on taxable profits or the tax base of the asset. This is
much like a revaluation in an individual company's accounts.
Therefore, an upwards fair value adjustment made to an asset will result in the carrying value of the asset
exceeding the tax base and so a taxable temporary difference will arise.
The resulting deferred tax liability is recorded in the consolidated accounts by:
Dr Goodwill (group share)

Cr Deferred tax liability
Undistributed profited of subsidiaries, branches, associated and joint ventures

 The carrying amount of, for example, a subsidiary in consolidated financial statement is equal to the
group share of the net assets of the subsidiary plus purchased goodwill.
 The tax base is usually equal to the cost of the investment.
 The difference between these two amounts is a temporary difference. It can be calculated as the
x
parent‘s share of the subsidiary‘s post acquisition profits which have not been distributed.
Bo
Recognition of deferred tax
A deferred tax liability should be recognized on the temporary difference unless:

al
The parent / investor / venture is able to control the timing of the reversal of the temporary
difference, and
b
lo
 It is probable that the temporary difference will not reverse (i.e. the profits will not be paid out) in the
foreseeable future.
G
This can be applied to different levels of investment as follows:

A
 Subsidiary
C
As a parent company can control the dividend policy of a subsidiary, deferred tax will not arise in
relation to undistributed profits.
AC
 Associate
An investor in an associate does not control that entity and so cannot determine its dividend policy.
Without an agreement requiring that the profits of the associate should not be distributed in the
foreseeable future, therefore, an investor should recognize a deferred tax liability arising from taxable
temporary differences associated with its investment in the associate. Where an investor cannot
determine the exact amount of tax, but only a minimum amount, then the deferred tax liability should be
that amount.
 Joint venture
In a joint venture, the agreement between the parties usually deals with profit sharing. When a venture
can control the sharing of profits and it is probable that the profits will not be distribute in the foreseeable
future, a deferred liability is not recognized.
120 | P a g e
Changes in foreign exchange rates
Where a foreign operation‘s taxable profit or tax loss (and therefore the tax base of its non-monetary
assets and liabilities) is determined in a foreign currency, changes in the exchange rate give rise to taxable
or deductible temporary differences.
These relate to the foreign entity‘s own assets and liabilities, rather than to the reporting entity‘s
investment in that foreign operation, and so the reporting entity should recognize the resulting deferred
tax liability or asset, both these are probable:
a) That the temporary difference will reverse in the foreseeable future, and
b) That taxable profit will be available against which the temporary difference can be utilized.
DEDUCTIBLE TEMPORARY DIFFERENCES
Unrealised profits on intra-group trading
x
 From a tax perspective, one group company selling goods to another group company is taxed on the
Bo
resulting profit in the period that the sale is made.
 From an accounting perspective no profit is realized until the recipient group company sells the goods
to a third party outside the group. This may occur in a different accounting period from that in which
the initial group sale is made.

the difference between:
b al
A temporary difference therefore arises equal to the amount of unrealized intra-group profit. This is
- Tax base, being cost to the recipient company (i.e. cost to selling company plus unrealized intra-
lo
group profit on sale to the recipient company)
- Carrying value to the group, being the original cost to the selling company, since the intra-group
G
profit is eliminated on consolidation

 Deferred tax is provided on consolidation
A
Fair value adjustments

C
IFRS 3 requires assets and liabilities acquired on acquisition of a subsidiary or associate to be brought in
AC
at their fair value rather than the carrying amount. The fair value adjustment does not, however, have any
impact on taxable profits or the tax base of the asset.
Therefore a fair value adjustment which increases a recognized liability or creates a new liability will
result in the tax base of the liability exceeding the carrying value and so deductible temporary difference
will arise.
A deductible temporary difference also arises where an asset‘s carrying amount is reduced to a fair value
less than its tax base.
The resulting deferred tax asset is recorded in the consolidated accounts by:
Dr Deferred tax asset X

Cr Goodwill X
121 | P a g e
Deferred tax assets of an acquired subsidiary
Deferred tax assets of a subsidiary may not satisfy the criteria for recognition when a business
combination is initially accounted for but may be realized subsequently.
These should be recognized as follows:
 If recognized within 12 months of the acquisition date and resulting from new information about
circumstances existing at the acquisition date, the credit entry should be made to goodwill. If the
carrying amount of goodwill reduced to zero, any further amounts should be recognized in profit or
loss.
 If recognized outside the 12 months ‗measurement period‘ or not resulting from new information
about circumstances existing at the acquisition date, the credit entry should be made to profit or loss.
x
PRESENTATION AND DISCLOSURE
Bo
Presentation
Current tax assets and current tax liabilities can only be offset in the statement of financial position if the
entity has the legal right and the intention to settle on a net basis.
b al
Deferred tax assets and deferred tax liabilities can only be offset in the statement of financial position if
the entity has the legal right to settle current tax amounts on a net basis and the deferred tax amounts are
lo
levied by the same taxing authority on the same entity or different entities that intend to realise the asset
and settle the liability at the same time.
G
The amount of tax expense (or income) related to profit or loss is required to be presented in the
statement(s) of profit or loss and other comprehensive income.
A
The tax effects of items included in other comprehensive income can either be shown net for each item, or
C
the items can be shown before tax effects with an aggregate amount of income tax for groups of items
(allocated between items that will and will not be reclassified to profit or loss in subsequent periods).
AC
Disclosure
IAS 12 requires the following disclosures:
 Major components of tax expense (tax income). Examples include:

o Current tax expense (income)
o Any adjustments of taxes of prior periods
o Amount of deferred tax expense (income) relating to the origination and reversal of
temporary differences
o Amount of deferred tax expense (income) relating to changes in tax rates or the
imposition of new taxes
o Amount of the benefit arising from a previously unrecognised tax loss, tax credit or
temporary difference of a prior period
o Write down, or reversal of a previous write down, of a deferred tax asset
o Amount of tax expense (income) relating to changes in accounting policies and
corrections of errors.
122 | P a g e
IAS 12 further requires the following disclosures:
 Aggregate current and deferred tax relating to items recognised directly in equity
 Tax relating to each component of other comprehensive income
 Explanation of the relationship between tax expense (income) and the tax that would be expected
by applying the current tax rate to accounting profit or loss (this can be presented as a
reconciliation of amounts of tax or a reconciliation of the rate of tax)
 Changes in tax rates
 Amounts and other details of deductible temporary differences, unused tax losses, and unused tax
credits
 Temporary differences associated with investments in subsidiaries, branches and associates, and
interests in joint arrangements
 For each type of temporary difference and unused tax loss and credit, the amount of deferred tax
assets or liabilities recognised in the statement of financial position and the amount of deferred
tax income or expense recognised in profit or loss
 Tax relating to discontinued operations
 Tax consequences of dividends declared after the end of the reporting period
x
 Information about the impacts of business combinations on an acquirer's deferred tax assets

Bo
Recognition of deferred tax assets of an acquiree after the acquisition date.
Other required disclosures:


Details of deferred tax assets
Tax consequences of future dividend payments.
b al
In addition to the disclosures required by IAS 12, some disclosures relating to income taxes are required
lo
by IAS 1 Presentation of Financial Statements, as follows:
G
 Disclosure on the face of the statement of financial position about current tax assets, current tax
liabilities, deferred tax assets, and deferred tax liabilities
 Disclosure of tax expense (tax income) in the profit or loss section of the statement of profit or
A
loss and other comprehensive income (or separate statement if presented).

C
Deferred tax and the framework

AC
As we have seen, IAS 12 considers deferred tax by taking a balance sheet approach to the accounting
problem by considering temporary differences in terms of the difference between the carrying values and
the tax values of assets and liabilities – also known as the valuation approach. This can be said to be
consistent with the IASB Framework‘s approach to recognition within financial statements. However, the
valuation approach is applied regardless of whether the resulting deferred tax will meet the definition of
an asset or liability in its own right.
Thus, IAS 12 considers the overriding accounting issue behind deferred tax to be the application of
matching – ensuring that the tax consequences of an item reported within the financial statements are
reported in the same accounting period as the item itself.
For example, in the case of a revaluation surplus, since the gain has been recognised in the financial
statements, the tax consequences of this gain should also be recognised – that is to say, a tax charge. In
order to recognise a tax charge, it is necessary to complete the double entry by also recording a
corresponding deferred tax liability.
However, part of the Framework‘s definition of a liability is that there is a ‗present obligation‘. Therefore,
the deferred tax liability arising on the revaluation gain should represent the current obligation to pay tax
123 | P a g e
in the future when the asset is sold. However, since there is no present obligation to sell the asset, there is
no present obligation to pay the tax.
Therefore, it is also acknowledged that IAS 12 is inconsistent with the Framework to the extent that a
deferred tax asset or liability does not necessarily meet the definition of an asset or liability.
x
Bo
b al
lo
G
A
C
AC
124 | P a g e
IFRS 8 – OPERATING SEGMENTS
Large entities produce a wide range of products and services, often in several different countries. Further
information on how the overall results of entities are made up from each of these product or geographical
areas will help the users of the financial statements. Following are the reasons for segment reporting
(By product, region or operation).
 The entity's past performance will be better understood

 The entity's risks and returns may be better assessed
 More informed judgments may be made about the entity as a whole
OBJECTIVE
An entity shall disclose information to enable users of its financial statements to evaluate the nature and
financial effects of the business activities in which it engages and the economic environments in which it
x
operates.
Bo
SCOPE
This IFRS shall apply to the separate and consolidated financial statements of an entity:
(i)
(ii)
b al
whose debt or equity instruments are traded in a public market (a domestic or foreign stock
exchange or an over-the-counter market, including local and regional markets), or
that files, or is in the process of filing, its financial statements with a securities commission or
lo
other regulatory organisation
G
OPERATING SEGMENTS
An operating segment is a component of an entity:

A
C
(a) that engages in business activities from which it may earn revenues and incur expenses (including
revenues and expenses relating to transactions with other components of the same entity),
AC
(b) whose operating results are regularly reviewed by the entity’s chief operating decision maker to
make decisions about resources to be allocated to the segment and assess its performance, and
(c) For which discrete financial information is available.
An operating segment may engage in business activities for which it has yet to earn revenues, for example,
start-up operations may be operating segments before earning revenues.
The term ‗chief operating decision maker’ identifies a function, not necessarily a manager with a
specific title. That function is to allocate resources to and assess the performance of the operating
segments of an entity.
This definition means that not every part of an entity is necessarily an operating segment. IFRS 8 quotes
the example of a corporate headquarters that may earn no or incidental revenues and so would not be an
operating segment.
125 | P a g e
Aggregation criteria
Two or more operating segments may be aggregated into a single operating segment if aggregation is
consistent with the core principle of this IFRS, the segments have similar economic characteristics, and
the segments are similar in each of the following respects:
(a) The nature of the products and services;

(b) The nature of the production processes;
(c) The type or class of customer for their products and services;
(d) The methods used to distribute their products or provide their services; and
(e) If applicable, the nature of the regulatory environment, for example, banking, insurance or public
utilities.
DETERMINING REPORTABLE SEGMENTS
An entity shall report separately information about an operating segment that meets
x
Bo
I) the definition of an operating segment, and
II) any of the following quantitative thresholds:
b al
(a) Its reported revenue, including both sales to external customers and intersegment sales or transfers,
is 10 per cent or more of the combined revenue, internal and external, of all operating segments.
(b) The absolute amount of its reported profit or loss is 10 per cent or more of the greater, in absolute
lo
amount, of (i) the combined reported profit of all operating segments that did not report a loss and
(ii) the combined reported loss of all operating segments that reported a loss.
G
(c) Its assets are 10 per cent or more of the combined assets of all operating segments.
A
If the total external revenue reported by operating segments constitutes less than 75 per cent of the
entity‘s revenue, additional operating segments shall be identified as reportable segments until at least 75
per cent of the entity‘s revenue is included in reportable segments.
C
AC
Operating segments that do not meet any of the quantitative thresholds may be considered reportable,
and separately disclosed, if management believes that information about the segment would be useful to
users of the financial statements.
Aggregating segments
Two or more operating segments below the thresholds may be aggregated to produce a reportable
segment if the segments have similar economic characteristics, and the segments are similar in a majority
of the aggregation criteria above
Non reportable segments
An entity may combine information about operating segments that do not meet the quantitative
thresholds to produce a reportable segment only if the operating segments have similar economic
characteristics and share a majority of the aggregation criteria.
126 | P a g e
DECISION TREE TO ASSIST IN IDENTIFYING REPORTABLE SEGMENTS
management reporting system
Yes segment if
aggregation criteria?
No
Yes quantitative thresholds?
x
No
Bo
segment if
segments meet a majority of the
b No al
account for 75 per cent of the entity‘s
lo
G
No
A
revenue of all segments is less than 75

C
AC
segments to be disclosed
Measurement
The amount of each segment item reported shall be the measure reported to the chief operating decision
maker for the purposes of making decisions about allocating resources to the segment and assessing its
performance.
127 | P a g e
x
Bo
b al
lo
G
A
C
AC
128 | P a g e
DISCLOSURES BY REPORTABLE OPERATING SEGMENTS
IFRS 8 provides a framework on which to base the reported disclosures.
1. Entities are required to provide general information on such matters as how the reportable
segments are identified and the types of products or services from which each reportable segment
derives its revenue.
2. Entities are required to report a measure of profit or loss and total assets for each reportable
segment. Both should be based on the information provided to the chief operating decision maker. If
the chief operating decision maker is regularly provided with information on liabilities for its
operating segments then these liabilities should also be reported on a segment basis.
IFRS 8 specifies disclosures that are needed regarding profit or loss and assets where the amounts are
x
included in the measure of profit or loss and total assets:
Bo
 Revenues - internal and external.
 Interest revenues and interest expense. These must not be netted off unless the majority of a
al
segment's revenues are from interest and the chief operating decision maker assesses the
performance of the segment based on net interest revenue.
b
 Depreciation and amortization.
lo
 Material items of income and expense disclosed separately.
G
 Share of profit after tax of, and carrying value of investment in, entities accounted for under the
equity method.
A
 Material non-cash items other than depreciation and amortization.

C
 The amount of additions to non-current assets other than financial instruments, deferred tax assets,
post-employment benefit assets and rights arising under insurance contracts.
AC
The measurement basis for each item separately reported should be the one used in the information
provided to the chief operating decision maker. The internal reporting system may use more than one
measure of an operating segment's profit or loss, or assets or liabilities. In such circumstances the
measure used in the segment report should be the one that management believes is most consistent with
those used to measure the corresponding amounts in the entity's financial statements.
Entities are required to provide a number of reconciliations:
 The total of the reportable segments' revenues to the entity's revenue

 The total of the reportable segments' profit or loss to the entity's profit or loss
 The total of the reportable segments' assets to the entity's assets
 Where separately identified, the total of the reportable segments' liabilities to the entity's liabilities
and
129 | P a g e
 The total of the reportable segments' amounts for every other material item disclosed to the
corresponding amount for the entity.
Entity-wide disclosures
Unless otherwise provided in the segment report IFRS 8 requires entities to provide information about its
revenue on a geographical and 'class of business' basis. Entities also need to provide information on non-
current assets on a geographical basis, but not on a 'class of business' basis.
If revenues from single external customer amount to 10% or more of the total revenue of the entity then
the entity needs to disclose that fact plus:
 The total revenue from each customer (although the name is not needed) and
ox
 The segment or segment reporting the revenues.
The 'entity-wide disclosures' are needed even where the entity has only a single operating segment, and
lB
therefore does not effectively segment report
Criticisms of IFRS 8 ba
(a) Some commentators have criticized the 'management approach' as leaving segment identification too
much to the discretion of the entity.
(b) The management approach may mean that financial statements of different entities are not
lo
comparable.
(c) Segment determination is the responsibility of directors and is subjective.
G
(d) Management may report segments which are not consistent for internal reporting and control
purposes, making its usefulness questionable.
(e) For accounting periods beginning on or after 1 January 2005 listed entities within the EU are required
A
to use adopted international standards in their consolidated financial statements. The EU has not
C
yet adopted IFRS 8 and until it does IAS 14 will continue to apply here. Some stakeholders believe
the standard to be flawed due to the amount of discretion it gives to management.
AC
(f) Geographical information has been downgraded. It could be argued that this breaks the link
between a company and its stakeholders.
(g) There is no defined measure of segment profit or loss.
130 | P a g e
IAS 33 – EARNINGS PER SHARE
INTRODUCTION
Earnings Per Share (EPS) is an unusual accounting ratio in that it has a whole standard devoted to its
calculation and presentation. The importance attached to this ratio derives from the fact that it is used as
a basis for a number of significant statistics used by investors.
USES OF EPS
The uses of EPS as a financial indicator include:
 The assessment of management performance over time.

 Trend analysis of EPS to give an indication of earnings performance.
x
 An indicator of dividend payouts. The higher the EPS the greater the expectation of an increased
dividend compared to previous periods.
Bo
 An important component in determining the entity's price/earnings (P/E) ratio.
Scope and Objective
al
The objective of the standard is to prescribe principles for the determination and presentation of earning
per share in order to improve performance comparisons between different entities in the same period and
over time for the same entity.
b
lo
IAS 33 only applies to entities whose securities are publicly traded or that are in the process of issuing
securities to the public. This is because entities, whose securities are not traded, do not have a readily
G
observable market price which would make it difficult to calculate a P/E ratio.
DEFINITIONS
A
Ordinary shares: an equity instrument that is subordinate to all other classes of equity shares.
C
Potential ordinary shares: a financial instrument or other contract that may entitle its holder to
ordinary shares.
AC
Examples of potential ordinary shares include:
 Convertible debt
 Convertible preference shares
 Share warrants
 Share options
Warrants or options: financial instruments that give the holder the right to purchase ordinary shares.
Dilution: a reduction in EPS or an increase in loss per share resulting from the assumption that
convertible instruments are converted, the options or warranties are exercised, or that ordinary shares
are issued upon the satisfaction of specified conditions.
Antidilution: an increase in EPS or a reduction in loss per share resulting from the assumption that
convertible instruments are converted, the options or warranties are exercised, or that ordinary shares are
issued upon the satisfaction of specified conditions.
131 | P a g e
BASIC EPS
The basic EPS should be calculated by dividing the net profit or loss attributable to ordinary equity
shareholders by the weighted average number of ordinary shares outstanding during the period.
The net profit is profit after tax and preference dividends.
CHANGES IN THE CAPITAL STRUCTURE
Most of the complications in the computation of EPS arise from changes in the share capital. The
underlying principle is that EPS should be comparable from period to period.
Thus in arriving at the denominator in the EPS calculation, the shares in issue at the beginning of the
period may need to be adjusted for shares bought back or issued during the period multiplied by a time
weighting factor.
x
It is necessary to time apportion and come up with a weighted average number of shares outstanding;
because where capital has been invested through the issue of shares part-way through the year, additional
Bo
earnings will only have been generated from the date at which the investment took place. If earnings for
the year were apportioned over shares in issue at the year end the resultant EPS would not fairly reflect
performance for the current period in comparison to a previous period when there may have been no such
change in equity. Similar logic applies where shares have been bought back in the year.
al
The four most common reasons for adjusting shares in issue at the beginning of the period are:
b

lo
Issue of new shares during the period (fully or partly paid)
 Bonus issues
 Rights issues;
G
 Potential ordinary shares (resulting in calculation of diluted EPS)
Issue of new shares during the period (Fully paid)

A
C
Shares should be included in the weighted average calculation from the date consideration is receivable
AC
Issue of new shares during the period (Partly paid)
The general principle under IAS 33 that shares should be included in the weighted average calculation
from the date consideration is receivable does not apply to shares that are issued in partly paid form.
Partly paid shares are treated as fractions of shares; based on payments received to date as a proportion of
the total subscription price. These shares are included in the averaging calculation only to the extent that
they participate in dividends for the period. Dividend entitlement of such shareholders is usually
restricted to an amount based on this fraction.
The weighted average number of shares should be restricted based on this fraction. If the actual receipts
to date were only applied to the issue of fully paid shares, then the number of fully paid shares would be
smaller than was actually the case for partly paid shares being issued.
132 | P a g e
Bonus issue, share split and share consolidation
Where a company issues new shares by way of a capitalisation of reserves (a bonus issue) during the
period, the effect is to increase only the number of shares outstanding after the issue. There is no effect on
earnings as there is no inflow of funds as a result of the issue.
As shareholders rights are not affected; each individual will hold the same proportion of outstanding
shares as before the issue. IAS 33 requires that the bonus shares are treated as if they had occurred at the
beginning of the period. The EPS from the previous period should also be recalculated using the new
number of shares in issue to allow comparison with the current year's EPS, as if the issue had taken place
at the beginning of that period as well.
When calculating the prior period EPS comparator then multiply last year's EPS by the factor:
Number of Shares before bonus issue

Number of Shares after bonus issue
x
When calculating the weighted average number of shares then the bonus factor to apply is the inverse of
Bo
the above, i.e.
Number of Shares after bonus issue

Number of Shares before bonus issue
al
Similar considerations apply where ordinary shares are split into shares of smaller nominal value (a share
of $1 is split into four share of 25c each) or consolidated into shares of higher nominal value (four shares
b
of 25c each are consolidated into one share of $1). In both these situations, the number of shares
lo
outstanding before the event is adjusted for the proportionate change in the number of shares outstanding
after the event.
G
RIGHTS ISSUE
A
With a rights issue additional capital is raised by the issue of the shares. Existing shareholders are offered
the right to purchase new shares from the company, usually at a discount to the current market price.
C
Then when dealing with a rights issue at a discount, calculation of EPS should mark adjustment for the
AC
two elements:
 A bonus issue (reflecting the fact that the cash received would not pay for all the/shares issued if
based on fair values, rather than being discounted).
 An assumed issue at full price (reflecting the fact that new shares are issued in return for cash);
Consequently the number of shares outstanding at the beginning of the year should be adjusted for the
bonus factor to give a deemed number of shares in issue before the rights issue. This should be weighted
for the period up to the date of the rights issue.
The bonus factor is equal to: Fair Value before rights issue
Theoretical ex - rights Price after rights issue
Additionally the number of shares actually in issue after the rights issue is weighted for the period after
the rights issue.
133 | P a g e
As in the section on bonus issues, the prior period EPS should be adjusted for the bonus factor. This is
achieved by taking the reciprocal of the bonus factor (turn fraction Upside down) and multiplying by last
year's EPS.
DILUTED EARNINGS PER SHARE
An entity may have in issue at the reporting date a number of financial instruments that give rights to
ordinary shares at a future date. IAS 33 refers to these as potential ordinary shares. Examples of potential
ordinary shares include:
 Convertible debt;
 Convertible preference shares;
 Share warrants
 Share options
Where these rights are exercised they will increase the number of shares. Earnings may also be affected.
The overall effect will tend towards lowering (or diluting) the EPS.
ox
This will tend to be the case because holders of these rights will only take them if it is to their benefit
which tends to be prejudicial to existing shareholders
lB
So that existing shareholders can see the potential dilution of their present earnings, IAS 33 requires that
a diluted EPS is calculated. ba
The calculation is performed as if the potential ordinary shares had been in issue throughout the period. If
the rights were granted during the reporting the period, then time apportion.
lo
The diluted EPS is:
G
Earnings as per basic eps + Adjustment for dilutive potential ordinary shares
Weighted Average number of shares per basic EPS + Adjustment for dilutive potential
ordinal
A
CONVERTIBLE FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS

C
CALCULATION OF EARNINGS
AC
The basic earnings figure should be adjusted to reflect any changes in profit that would arise when the
potential ordinary shares outstanding are actually issued. Adjust:
1. Profits
There will be a saving of interest. Interest is a tax-deductible expense and so the post- tax effects will be
brought into the adjusted profits.
There will be a saving of preference dividend. There is no associated tax effect.
Therefore, the numerator should be adjusted for the after-tax effects of dividends and interest charged in
relation to dilutive potential ordinary shares and for any other changes in income that would result from
the conversion of the potential ordinary shares.
134 | P a g e
2. The number of shares
The denominator should include shares that would be issued on the conversion.
The potential ordinary shares are deemed to be converted to ordinary shares at the start of the period
unless they were issued during the reporting period.
SHARE WARRANTS AND OPTIONS
A share option or warrant gives the holder the right to purchase or subscribe for ordinary shares. IAS 33
requires that the assumed proceeds from these shares should be considered to have been received from
the issue of shares at fair value. These would have no effect on EPS.
The difference between the number of shares that would have been issued at fair value and the number of
shares actually issued is treated as an issue of ordinary shares for no consideration. This bonus element
has a dilutive effect with regard to existing shareholders.
x
Bo
b al
lo
G
A
C
AC
135 | P a g e
IFRS 5 – NON-CURRENT ASSETS HELD FOR SALE AND
DISCONTINUED OPERATIONS
OBJECTIVE
The objective of this standard is to specify the accounting for Non-current assets held for sale, and
presentation and disclosure of discontinued operations.
NON-CURRENT ASSETS HELD FOR SALE
HELD FOR SALE
This term refers to a non-current asset whose carrying amount will be recovered principally through a
sale transaction rather than through continuing use.
x
Bo
DISCONTINUED OPERATION
A discontinued operation includes the following criteria (Discussed in detail after measurement):



is a separately identifiable component
al
must represent a major line of the entity‘s business
b
is part of a plan to dispose of a major line of business or a geographical area
 is a subsidiary acquired with a view to resell
lo
DISPOSAL GROUP
G
This is a group of assets and possibly some liabilities that an entity intends to dispose of in a single
A
transaction.
C
CLASSIFICATION OF NON-CURRENT ASSETS AS HELD FOR SALE

AC
For an asset to be classified as held for sale:
a) It must be available for immediate sale in its present condition allowing for terms that are usual
or customary;
b) Its sale must be highly probable {expected within 1 year of reclassification);
c) It must be genuinely sold, not abandoned.
Immediate sale
The application of the phrase does make allowance for conditions considered 'usual and customary' in
selling the asset, e.g. allowance would be made for searches and surveys when selling property.
No allowance is made for conditions imposed by the seller of the asset or disposal group.
Highly probable
For a sale to be highly probable it must be significantly more likely than probable. In addition the
standard sets out the following criteria to be satisfied:
136 | P a g e
 Management, at a level that has the authority to sell the assets or disposal group, is committed to a
plan to sell;
 An active program to locate a buyer and complete the sale must have begun. This will include making
it known to those that might be interested that the asset or disposal group is available for sale;
 The asset or disposal group must be actively marketed at a price that is reasonable compared to its
current fair value.
This should take account of local conditions in the market. Thus if it is customary to price above fair
value in the expectation of low bids, or vice versa, this is acceptable. The term actively marketed
requires that the entity is making positive efforts to sell, not just to locate a buyer, e.g. by engaging a
selling agent.
 The sale of the asset is expected to be recorded as completed within time, ear from the date of
classification.
(If the sale is not completed within one year and this is due to events beyond entity's control, it is still
x
possible for the asset to be continued to be classified as held for sale provided the entity is still
Bo
committed to selling the asset).
 The actions required to complete the plan should indicate that it is not likely that there will be
significant changes made to the plan or that the plan will be withdrawn.
MEASUREMENT
b al
Non-current assets or disposal groups that meet the criteria to be classified as held for sale are
measured at the lower of:
lo
 Fair value less costs to sell; and
 Carrying amount (in accordance with the relevant Standard).
G
A
Costs to sell are "the incremental costs directly attributable to the disposal of an asset (or disposal
C
group)". Examples would include lawyer's or estate agent's fees.

AC
The costs must be incremental; internal costs cannot be included in costs to sell.
Measurement on initial classification as held for sale
IFRS 5 requires that immediately before the initial classification of an asset (or disposal group) as held for
sale, the carrying amount of the asset (or all the assets and liabilities in a disposal group) should be
measured in accordance with the relevant IFRS.
Initial classification as held for sale may lead to a write down to fair value less costs to sell.
Note:
 Any impairment loss on initial or subsequent write-down of the asset or disposal group to fair value
less cost to sell is to be recognised in the statement of profit or loss.
 Any subsequent increase in fair value less cost to sell can be recognised in the statement of profit or
loss to the extent that it is not in excess of the cumulative impairment loss that has been recognised in
accordance with the IFRS 5 or previously in accordance with IAS 36.
137 | P a g e
 Any impairment loss recognised for disposal group should be applied in the order set out in IAS 36.
The standard sets out how to allocate the impairment loss among the constituent parts of the disposal
group (or cash generating unit). The loss itself is still charged to the statement of profit or loss.
SUBSEQUENT REMEASUREMENT
 Whilst a non-current asset/disposal group is classified as held for sale it should not be depreciated
or amortised.
 At each reporting date where a non-current asset or disposal group continues to be classified as held
for sale it should be re-measured at fair value less costs to sell at that date.
 This may give rise to further impairments or a reversal of previous impairment losses. In either case
recognise in the statement of profit or loss.
DISCONTINUED OPERATIONS – Detailed explanation
As mentioned earlier, discontinued operation is a component of an entity that:
i.) Either has been disposed of, or
x
ii.) Is classified as held for sale, and that component
Bo
a) Represents a separate major line of business or geographical area of operations, or
b) Is part of a single co-ordinated plan to dispose of a separate major line of business or
geographical area of operations, or
c) It is a subsidiary acquired exclusively with a view to resale.
Component:
b al
The standard defines this term as "operations and cash flows that can be clearly distinguished,
lo
operationally and for financial reporting purposes, from the rest of the entity”.
G
A component will have been a single Cash Generating Unit (CGU) or a collection of CGUs while held for
use in the business.
A
A component can be distinguished operationally and for financial reporting purposes if:
C
 Its operating assets and liabilities can be directly attributed to it;

 Its income (gross revenue) can be directly attributed to it;
AC
 At least a majority of its operating expenses can be directly attributed to it.
Classification as discontinued operation
A component of the reporting entity is classified as discontinued at:
 The date of its disposal (sale/termination); or

 Or when the operation meets the IFRS criteria to be classified as held for sale.
In order to have been classified as a discontinued operation by the reporting date the disposal or
reclassification as 'held for sale' must have taken place by that reporting period end.
If an operation is to be terminated, but it is not actually closed by the reporting date then it will not be
classified as discontinued at the year end.
138 | P a g e
Major line of business or geographical segment
A separate business segment or geographical segment as defined in IFRS 8 – Operating Segments, would
normally meet this condition.
Single plan
If a component is not itself a separate major line of business or geographical area of operations then it
must be "part of a single co-ordinated plan" to dispose of such a line of business or geographical area of
operations. The single plan might relate to a disposal in one transaction or piecemeal.
PRESENTATION
 Non-current assets that meet the criteria are presented separately on the Statement of Financial
Position within current assets.
 If the held for sale item is a disposal group then related liabilities are also reported separately
within current liabilities.
 Discontinued operations and operations held for sale must be disclosed separately in the
x
statement of financial position at the lower of their carrying value less costs to sell.
Bo
b al
lo
G
A
C
AC
139 | P a g e
FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS
Introduction to Financial Instruments

1. IAS 32 Financial Instruments: Presentation
2. IFRS 7 Financial Instruments: Disclosures
3. IFRS 9 Financial Instruments
IAS 32 FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS: PRESENTATION
OBJECTIVE
The stated objective of IAS 32 is to establish principles for presenting financial instruments as liabilities
or equity and for offsetting financial assets and liabilities.
x
Bo
IAS 32 addresses this in a number of ways:
 clarifying the classification of a financial instrument issued by an entity as a liability or as equity
 prescribing the accounting for treasury shares (an entity's own repurchased shares)
 prescribing strict conditions under which assets and liabilities may be offset in the balance sheet
SCOPE

b al
IAS 32 applies in presenting and disclosing information about all types of financial instruments
lo
with the exceptions of items under IAS 27, IAS 28, IFRS 11, IAS 19 and IFRS 2 and non-
financial items which will be settled through physical delivery.
G
However, IAS 32 applies to:

A
 The contracts to buy or sell a non-financial item that can be settled net in cash or another
financial instrument
C
DEFINITIONS
AC
The following terms are used in this Standard with the meanings specified:
A Financial Instrument is any contract that gives rise to a financial asset of one entity and a financial
liability or equity instrument of another entity.
A Financial Asset is any asset that is:
(a) Cash;
(b) An equity instrument of another entity;
(c) A contractual right:
(i) To receive cash or another financial asset from another entity; or
(ii) To exchange financial assets or financial liabilities with another entity under conditions that
are potentially favourable to the entity; or
(d) A contract that will or may be settled in the entity‘s own equity instruments and is:
140 | P a g e
(i) A non-derivative for which the entity is or may be obliged to receive a variable number of the
entity‘s own equity instruments; or
(ii) A derivative that will or may be settled other than by the exchange of a fixed amount of cash
or another financial asset for a fixed number of the entity‘s own equity instruments.
A Financial Liability is any liability that is:

(a) A contractual obligation:
(i) To deliver cash or another financial asset to another entity; or
(ii) To exchange financial assets or financial liabilities with another entity under conditions that
are potentially unfavourable to the entity; or
(b) a contract that will or may be settled in the entity‘s own equity instruments and is:
(i) a non-derivative for which the entity is or may be obliged to deliver a variable number of the
entity‘s own equity instruments; or
(ii) a derivative that will or may be settled other than by the exchange of a fixed amount of cash or
another financial asset for a fixed number of the entity‘s own equity instruments.
x
An Equity Instrument is any contract that evidences a residual interest in the assets of an entity after
Bo
deducting all of its liabilities.
A Puttable Instrument is a financial instrument that gives the holder the right to put the instrument
back to the issuer for cash or another financial asset or is automatically put back to the issuer on the
al
occurrence of an uncertain future event or the death or retirement of the instrument holder.
Examples of financial assets include Trade receivables, Options, Shares (when used as an investment).
b
lo
Examples of financial liabilities include Trade payables, Debenture loans payable, Redeemable preference
(non-equity) shares and Forward contracts standing at a loss.
G
Financial instruments include both of the following.

A
(a) Primary instruments: e.g. receivables, payables and equity securities

(b) Derivative instruments: e.g. financial options, futures and forwards, interest rate swaps and
C
currency swaps, whether recognized or unrecognized

AC
IAS 32 makes it clear that the following items are not financial instruments.
 Physical assets, e.g. inventories, property, plant and equipment, leased assets and intangible assets
(patents, trademarks etc).
 Prepaid Expenses, deferred revenue and most warranty obligations.
 Liabilities or assets that is not contractual in nature
 Contractual rights/obligations that do not involve transfer of a financial asset, e.g. commodity
futures contracts, operating leases
141 | P a g e
Compound Financial Instruments
The issuer of a non-derivative financial instrument shall evaluate the terms of the financial instrument to
determine whether it contains both a liability and an equity component. Such components shall be
classified separately as financial liabilities, financial assets or equity instruments.
An entity recognises separately the components of a financial instrument that:
(a) creates a financial liability of the entity and

(b) Grants an option to the holder of the instrument to convert it into an equity instrument of the entity.
Treasury Shares
If an entity reacquires its own equity instruments, those instruments (‗treasury shares‘) shall be deducted
from equity. No gain or loss shall be recognized in profit or loss on the purchase, sale, issue or
ox
cancellation of an entity‘s own equity instruments. Consideration paid or received shall be recognized
directly in equity.
lB
Interest, Dividends, Losses and Gains
Interest, dividends, gains, and losses relating to an instrument classified as a liability should be reported
ba
in profit or loss. This means that dividend payments on preferred shares classified as liabilities are treated
as expenses. On the other hand, distributions (such as dividends) to holders of a financial instrument
classified as equity should be charged directly against equity, not against earnings.
lo
Transaction costs of an equity transaction are deducted from equity. Transaction costs related to an
G
issue of a compound financial instrument are allocated to the liability and equity components in
proportion to the allocation of proceeds.
A
OFFSETTING FINANCIAL ASSETS AND LIABILITIES

C
IAS 32 also prescribes rules for the offsetting of financial assets and financial liabilities. It specifies that a
financial asset and a financial liability should be offset and the net amount reported when, and only when,
AC
an entity:
 Has a legally enforceable right to set off the amounts; and

 Intends either to settle on a net basis, or to realise the asset and settle the liability simultaneously.
Disclosures
Financial instruments disclosures are in IFRS 7 Financial Instruments: Disclosures, and no longer in IAS
32.
142 | P a g e
IFRS 9 FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS (REPLACEMENT OF IAS 39)
OBJECTIVE
The objective of this IFRS is to establish principles for the financial reporting of financial assets and
financial liabilities that will present relevant and useful information to users of financial statements for
their assessment of the amounts, timing and uncertainty of an entity‘s future cash flows.
RECOGNITION AND DERECOGNITION
Initial Recognition
Financial asset or financial liability should be recognized by an entity in its statement of financial position
when the entity becomes party to the contractual provisions of the financial asset or financial liability,
even at nil cost.
x
Bo
Effective interest rate method
b al
lo
G
A
Calculation of fair value of financial instrument

C
 Fair value = Present value of future cash flows at current market interest for similar financial
instruments
AC
 Use market rate of relevant year or date

 Future cash flows will be used.
CLASSIFICATION OF FINANCIAL ASSETS
An entity shall classify financial assets as subsequently measured at:
 Amortised cost or
 Fair value through profit or loss (FVTPL)
 Fair value through other comprehensive income (FVTOCI)
A financial asset (debt instrument only) shall be measured at amortised cost if both of the following
conditions are met:
(b) The asset is held within a business model whose objective is to hold assets in order to collect
contractual cash flows (Solely principal amount and interest).
143 | P a g e
(c) The contractual terms of the financial asset give rise on specified dates to cash flows that are
solely payments of principal and interest on the principal amount outstanding. Interest is
compensation for time value of money and credit risk.
Important points
 Assess business management model on portfolio level not on individual investment
 Irregular sales of investments do not impact business management model
 Businesses may have different business management models for different investments
Fair Value Designation of Financial Assets
Even if an instrument meets the two amortised cost tests, IFRS 9 contains an option to designate a
financial asset as measured at Fair Value Through Profit and Loss if doing so eliminates or significantly
reduces a measurement or recognition inconsistency.
Fair value through other comprehensive income
ox
The criteria are as follows:
lB
ba
lo
G
Fair value through profit or loss

A
The criteria are as follows:

C
 It is the default category (After not meeting any other category‘s criteria)
 Investments not categorized at amortized cost and FVTOCI will be classified here
AC
MEASUREMENT OF FINANCIAL ASSETS

1) At Amortised cost:
Initial measurement: Fair value (Cash paid) + Transaction cost
Subsequent measurement: At amortised cost using effective interest rate method
2) At FVTOCI:
Initial measurement: Fair value (Cash paid) + Transaction cost
Subsequent measurement: At fair value and gain/loss will be charged to OCI
3) At FVTPL:
Initial measurement: Fair value (Cash paid)
Transaction cost is charged to P&L
Subsequent measurement: At fair value and gain/loss will be charged to P&L
144 | P a g e
DERECOGNITION OF FINANCIAL ASSETS
Derecognition is the removal of a previously recognised financial instrument from an entity‘s statement of
financial position.
An entity should derecognize a financial asset when:
(a) The contractual rights to the cash flows from the financial asset expire e.g., cash received from
receivable, Option exercised, option expired etc. , OR
(b) The entity transfers substantially all the risks and rewards of ownership of the financial asset to
another party.
Accounting Treatment
On derecognition the difference between the carrying amount and consideration received should be
recognised in P&L. Reclassify in P&L any accumulated gains or losses already recognised in OCI
x
Bo
b al
lo
G
A
C
AC
145 | P a g e
below are applied to a part or all of an asset
cash flows from the asset Yes
No
x
Bo
its rights to receive the
No b al
lo
an obligation to pay the
Yes cash flows from the asset No
that meets the conditions
G
A
Yes
C
substantially all risks and Yes

AC
No
substantially all risks and Yes
No
No
Yes
entity‘s continuing involvement
146 | P a g e
Assess risk and rewards of financial asset immediately before and after transfer
a) Substantial risk and rewards transferred
Derecognize:
Dr. Cash/Asset xx
Dr/Cr. (loss)/Profit xx
Cr. Financial asset xx
Examples:
 Unconditional sale of financial asset
 Factoring of receivables (without recourse)
 Sales of asset on repurchase terms where repurchase will be at market price
 Sale of asset with call or put option and option is deep out of money
b) Substantial risks and rewards retained
Continue to recognize the asset
Any cash received would be secured loan
x
Dr. Cash xx
Bo
Cr. Loan xx
Examples:
 Factoring of receivables with recourse
 Sales of asset on repurchase term where repurchase price is already decided
 Sale of asset with return swap contract

b al
 Sale of asset with call or put option and option is deep in the money
lo
Remember always to apply the principle of substance over form.
G
CLASSIFICATION OF FINANCIAL LIABILITIES
Financial liabilities are either classified as:

A
 Financial liabilities at amortised cost; or

C
 Financial liabilities as at fair value through profit or loss (FVTPL).

AC
Financial liabilities are measured at amortised cost unless either:
 The financial liability is held for trading and is therefore required to be measured at FVTPL (e.g.
derivatives not designated in a hedging relationship), or
 The entity elects to measure the financial liability at FVTPL (using the fair value option).
MEASUREMENT OF FINANCIAL LIABILITIES

1) At Amortised cost:
Initial measurement: Fair value (Cash received) - Issue cost
Subsequent measurement: At amortised cost using effective interest rate method
Examples of items at amortised cost are Trade payables, Loan payables, Bank borrowings
2) At Fair value option:

Fair value Gain/Loss will be split
 Gain/Loss due to own credit risk will be charged to OCI
 Gain/Loss due to other credit risk will be charged to P&L
147 | P a g e
3) At FVTPL:
Initial measurement: Fair value (Cash received)
Transaction cost is charged to P&L
Subsequent measurement:
 Fair value will be calculated by PV(FCF) by using current market interest rate
 Any Gain or loss will be charged to P&L
Examples of items at FVTPL are Held for trading liability, Derivatives standing at loss,
Contingent liability arising at business combination
RECLASSIFICATION OF FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS
For financial assets, reclassification is required between FVTPL and amortised cost, or vice versa, if and
only if the entity's business model objective for its financial assets changes so its previous model
assessment would no longer apply.
ox
If reclassification is appropriate, it must be done prospectively from the reclassification date. An entity
does not restate any previously recognised gains, losses, or interest.
lB
IFRS 9 does not allow reclassification where:

ba
Financial assets have been classified as equity instruments, or
 The fair value option has been exercised in any circumstance for a financial assets or financial
liability.
lo
DERECOGNITION OF FINANCIAL LIABILITIES

G
An entity shall remove a financial liability (or a part of a financial liability) from its statement of financial
A
position when, and only when, it is extinguished - i.e. when the obligation specified in the contract is
discharged or cancelled or expires.
C
The difference between the carrying amount of a financial liability (or part of a financial liability)
AC
extinguished or transferred to another party and the consideration paid, including any non-cash assets
transferred or liabilities assumed, shall be recognised in profit or loss.
IMPAIRMENT OF FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS
Scope
The impairment requirements are applied to:
 Financial assets measured at amortised cost (incl. trade receivables)
 Financial assets measured at fair value through OCI
 Loan commitments and financial guarantees contracts where losses are currently accounted for
under IAS 37 Provisions, Contingent Liabilities and Contingent Assets
 Lease receivables.
The impairment model follows a three-stage approach based on changes in expected credit losses of a
financial instrument that determine
 The recognition of impairment, and
148 | P a g e
 The recognition of interest revenue.

Initial recognition
At initial recognition of the financial asset an entity recognises a loss allowance equal to 12 months
expected credit losses which consist of expected credit losses from default events possible within 12
months from the entity‘s reporting date. An exception is purchased or originated credit impaired financial
assets.
Subsequent measurement
THREE STAGE APPROACH
x
Bo
Stage 1
12 month expected credit losses (gross interest)
 Applicable when no significant increase in credit risk
 Entities continue to recognise 12 month expected losses that are updated at each reporting date
 Presentation of interest on gross basis
Stage 2
b al
Lifetime expected credit losses (gross interest)
lo
 Applicable in case of significant increase in credit risk
 Recognition of lifetime expected losses
G
 Presentation of interest on gross basis
Stage 3
A
Lifetime expected credit losses (net interest)

C
 Applicable in case of credit impairment

 Recognition of lifetime expected losses
AC
 Presentation of interest on a net basis
PRACTICAL EXPEDIENTS
30 days past due rebuttable presumption
 Rebuttable presumption that credit risk has increased significantly when contractual payments
are more than 30 days past due
 When payments are 30 days past due, a financial asset is considered to be in stage 2 and lifetime
expected credit losses would be recognised
 An entity can rebut this presumption when it has reasonable and supportable information
available that demonstrates that even if payments are 30 days or more past due, it does not
represent a significant increase in the credit risk of a financial instrument.
Low credit risk instruments

 Instruments that have a low risk of default and the counterparties have a strong capacity to repay
(e.g. financial instruments that are of investment grade)
 Instruments would remain in stage 1, and only 12 month expected credit losses would be
provided.
149 | P a g e
SIMPLIFIED APPROACH
Short term trade receivables
 Recognition of only ‗lifetime expected credit losses‘ (i.e. stage 2)
 Expected credit losses on trade receivables can be calculated using provision matrix (e.g.
geographical region, product type, customer rating, collateral or trade credit insurance, or type of
customer)
 Entities will need to adjust the historical provision rates to reflect relevant information about
current conditions and reasonable and supportable forecasts about future expectations.
Long term trade receivables and lease receivables
Entities have a choice to either apply:
 the three-stage expected credit loss model; or
 The ‗simplified approach‘ where only lifetime expected credit losses are recognised.
LOAN COMMITMENTS AND FINANCIAL GUARANTEES

 The three-stage expected credit loss model also applies to these off balance sheet financial
x
commitments
 An entity considers the expected portion of a loan commitment that will be drawn down within
Bo
the next 12 months when estimating 12 month expected credit losses (stage 1), and the expected
portion of the loan commitment that will be drawn down over the remaining life the loan
commitment (stage 2)
 For loan commitments that are managed on a collective basis an entity estimates expected credit
al
losses over the period until the entity has the practical ability to withdraw the loan commitment.
Purchased or originated credit-impaired financial assets

b
lo
Purchased or originated credit-impaired financial assets are treated differently because the asset is credit-
impaired at initial recognition. For these assets, an entity would recognise changes in lifetime expected
G
losses since initial recognition as a loss allowance with any changes recognised in profit or loss. Under the
requirements, any favourable changes for such assets are an impairment gain even if the resulting
expected cash flows of a financial asset exceed the estimated cash flows on initial recognition.
A
HEDGING
C
Hedging, for accounting purposes, means designating one or more hedging instruments so that their
change in fair value is an offset, in whole or in part, to the change in fair value or cash flows of a hedged
AC
item.
Hedging instruments: A hedging instrument is a designated derivative or (in limited

circumstances) another financial asset or liability whose fair value or cash flows are expected to offset
changes in the fair value or cash flows of a designated hedged item.
Hedged item
A hedged item is an asset, liability, firm commitment, or forecasted future transaction that:
(a) exposes the entity to risk of changes in fair value or changes in future cash flows, and that
(b) is designated as being hedged
Hedge accounting
Hedge accounting recognises the offsetting effects on profit or loss of changes in the fair values of the
hedging instrument and the hedged item.
Hedging relationships are of three types:
150 | P a g e
(a) Fair value hedge: a hedge of the exposure to changes in fair value of a recognised asset or liability
or an unrecognised firm commitment, or an identified portion of such an asset, liability or firm
commitment, that is attributable to a particular risk and could affect profit or loss.
(b) Cash flow hedge: a hedge of the exposure to variability in cash flows that (i) is attributable to a
particular risk associated with a recognised asset or liability (such as all or some future interest
payments on variable rate debt) or a highly probable forecast transaction and (ii) could affect profit or
loss.
(c) Hedge of a net investment in a foreign operation as defined in IAS 21.
Designation and Documentation

Must be formalised at the inception of the hedging relationship:
 The hedging relationship
 Risk management strategy and objective for undertaking the hedge
 The hedged item and hedging instrument
 How hedge effectiveness will be assessed.
x
All three hedge effectiveness requirements met
Bo
(a) An economic relationship exists between the hedged item and hedging instrument
(b) Credit risk does not dominate changes in value
(c) The hedge ratio is the is the same for both the:
 Hedging relationship
hedge it.
Types of Hedging
b al
 Quantity of the hedged item actually hedged, and the quantity of the hedging instrument used to
lo
1. Fair value hedge
It is the exposure to changes in fair value of recognized asset or liabilities
G
 Hedge Instrument:
A
Hedge instrument gain/loss will be charged to P&L (unless hedge item is equity instrument
measured at FVTOCI).
C
 Hedge Item:
Hedge item gain/loss will be charged to P&L (unless hedge item is equity instrument at
AC
FVTOCI, then recognize in OCI)

2. Cash flow hedge
It is a hedge of the exposure to variability in cash flows that:
• Attributable to particular risk associated with recognized asset or liability or a high probable
forecast transaction
• Could affect profit or loss
Hedge Instrument:
• Gain or loss on hedge instrument that‘s determined to be an effective hedge must be
recognized in OCI (will become spate reserve in SOCIE) and ineffective portion will be
charged to P&L , and effective portion (separate reserve) will be reclassified to P&L when cash
flows expected to effect P&L
• If non-financial asset recognized due to hedge item then reserve can be adjusted in initial cost of
non-financial asset
151 | P a g e
DERIVATIVES
Definition:
Any contract , that have three features:
1. Its initial cost is zero or nominal as compared to other contracts that has similar response to
changes in market value
2. It will be settled in future
3. Its value is dependent on certain underlying item
Derivative contracts
Types of derivative contract are as follows:
 Future contract
 Forward contract
 Options
 Swap contract
x
Bo
Accounting treatment:
 Fair value through profit and loss
 Initial measurement: Fair Value



Derivative Standing at gain; Financial Asset
b al
Subsequent measurement: Fair value and gain/(loss) will be charged to P&L
Derivative Standing at loss; Financial Liability

lo
Embedded Derivatives
G
An embedded derivative is a component of a hybrid contract that also includes a non-derivative host—
with the effect that some of the cash flows of the combined instrument vary in a way similar to a stand-
A
alone derivative.
C
Host contracts are the contracts in which derivative contracts are embedded.
AC
Examples include:
(a) A lease
(b) A debt or equity instrument
(c) An insurance contract
(d) A sale or purchase contract
(e) A construction contract
A derivative that is attached to a financial instrument but is contractually transferable independently of

that instrument, or has a different counterparty, is not an embedded derivative, but a separate financial
instrument.
152 | P a g e
Measurement
Hybrid contracts with financial asset hosts
If a hybrid contract contains a host that is an asset within the scope of this IFRS, an entity shall apply the
measurement rules to the entire hybrid contract (recognized at FVTPL). E.g. Investment in convertible
loan, Investment in bond where interest rate vary with gold prices
Other hybrid contracts
If host contact is a financial liability or non-financial contracts E.g. Issue of convertible loan,
lease/construction contract in foreign currency
Criteria: (if met separation required)

• Economic characteristic should be different (host contract and derivative)
• Host contract should not be measured at FVTPL
x
• Embedded derivatives should meet the definition of ―stand alone derivative‖
Bo
b al
lo
G
A
C
AC
153 | P a g e
IFRS 7 FINANCIAL INSTRUMENT DISCLOSURES
Objective
IFRS 7 requires entities to provide disclosures in their financial statements that enable users to evaluate:
 The significance of financial instruments for the entity‘s financial position and performance; and
 The nature and extent of risks arising from financial instruments to which the entity is exposed
during the period and at the reporting date, and how the entity manages those risks.
Classes of financial instruments and level of disclosures
IFRS 7 requires that certain disclosures should be given by class of financial instruments. The classes of
financial instruments that will be disclosed should be appropriate to the nature of the information
x
disclosed and should take into account the characteristics of those financial instruments. An entity should
Bo
provide sufficient information to permit reconciliation to the line items presented in the statement of
financial position.
Statement of financial position:



trading and those designated at initial recognition
b al
Financial assets measured at fair value through profit and loss, showing separately those held for
Special disclosures about financial assets and financial liabilities designated to be Measured at fair
lo
value through profit and loss, including disclosures about credit risk and market risk, changes in fair
values attributable to these risks and the methods of measurement.

G
Reclassifications of financial instruments from one category to another (e.g. from fair value to
amortised cost or vice versa)
 information about financial assets pledged as collateral and about financial or non- financial assets
A
held as collateral
 Reconciliation of the allowance account for credit losses (bad debts) by class of financial Assets.
C
 Information about compound financial instruments with multiple embedded derivatives


AC
Breaches of terms of loan agreements
Statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income

 Items of income, expense, gains, and losses, with separate disclosure of gains and losses from
financial assets measured at fair value through profit and loss, showing separately those held for
trading and those designated at initial recognition
 total interest income and total interest expense for those financial instruments that are not measured
at fair value through profit and loss
 fee income and expense
 amount of impairment losses by class of financial assets
 interest income on impaired financial assets
154 | P a g e
IFRS 10 – CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
A group is formed when one company, known as the parent, acquires control over another company,
known as its subsidiary.
The subsidiary and the holding company are considered separate legal entities. Group accounts are
presented as if the parent company and its subsidiary were one single entity – an application of the
substance over form concept.
DEFINITIONS
Group of Companies arises when one company (Parent) takes control of another company
(subsidiary).
Subsidiary is a company controlled by another company.
x
Parent is a company that controls one or more subsidiaries.
Bo
Non-Controlling Interest is a collective representation of the shareholders that normally own 49% or
less of equity.
Consolidated Financial Statements means F/S of whole Group presented as a single set of accounts.
CONTROL
According to IFRS 10 Consolidated
b al
lo
Financial Statements an investor controls investee when it is exposed, or has rights, to variable returns
G
from its involvement with the investee and has the ability to affect those returns through its power over
the investee.
A
Existence of parent subsidiary relationship

C
Parent subsidiary relationship exists when:

AC
 The parent holds more than one half of the voting power of the entity
 The parent has power over more than one half of the voting rights by virtue of an agreement with
other investors (common control)
 The parent has the power to govern the financial and operating policies of the entity under the
articles of association of the entity
 The parent has the power to appoint or remove a majority of the board of directors
 The parent has the power to cast the majority of votes at meetings of the board
EXEMPTION FROM PREPARING GROUP ACCOUNTS
A parent need not present consolidated financial statements if the following stipulations hold:
 The parent itself is a wholly-owned subsidiary or it is a partially owned subsidiary of another

entity Its securities are not publicly traded
 The parent‘s debt or equity instruments are not traded in a public market
 The parent did not file its financial statements with a securities commission or other regulatory
organisation
155 | P a g e
 The ultimate parent publishes consolidated financial statements that comply with International
Financial Reporting Standards.
CONDITIONS - DIRECTORS MAY NOT WISH TO CONSOLIDATE A SUBSIDIARY
The directors of a parent company may not wish to consolidate some subsidiaries due to:
 Control is temporary as the subsidiary was purchased for re-sale

 Unsatisfactory performance and weak financial position of the subsidiary
 Differing activities (nature) of the subsidiary from the rest of the group
 Reduction of apparent gearing by avoiding consolidation of subsidiary‘s loan
 Legal conditions restricting the parent‘s ability to run the subsidiary.
Apart from legal restriction, these reasons are not permitted according to IFRSs and consolidated
financial statements should be prepared including all these subsidiaries.
x
IFRS 3 requires exclusion from consolidation only if the parent has lost control over its investment. This
could occur in cases where control over a subsidiary is lost because of a restriction from government, a
Bo
regulator, a court of law, or as a result of a contractual agreement.
GENERAL RULES


al
Same accounting policies should be used for both the holding company and the subsidiaries.
Adjustments must be made where there is a difference
The reporting dates of parent and subsidiary will be the same in most cases. In case of difference,
b
the subsidiary will be allowed to prepare another set of accounts for consolidation purposes (if the
lo
difference is of more than three months).
Accounting for subsidiaries in separate financial statements of the holding company

G
The holding company will usually produce its own separate financial statements. Investments in
subsidiaries and associates have to be accounted for at cost or in accordance with IFRS 9. Where
A
subsidiaries are classified as held for sale then the provisions of IFRS 5 have to be complied with.
C
Acquisition costs
AC
In accordance with IFRS 3, because acquisition-related costs are not part of the exchange transaction
between the acquirer and the acquiree (or its former owners), they are not considered part of the business
combination.
Costs of issuing debt or equity instruments are accounted for under IAS 32 Financial Instruments:
Presentation and IFRS 9 Financial Instruments. All other costs associated with an acquisition must be
expensed, including reimbursements to the acquiree for bearing some of the acquisition costs. Therefore,
transaction costs no longer form a part of the acquisition price; they are expensed as incurred.
Transaction costs are not deemed to be part of what is paid to the seller of a business. They are also not
deemed to be assets of the purchased business that should be recognised on acquisition. The standard
requires entities to disclose the amount of transaction costs that have been incurred.
Examples of costs to be expensed include finder's fees; advisory, legal, accounting, valuation and other
professional or consulting fees; and general administrative costs, including the costs of maintaining an
internal acquisitions department.
156 | P a g e
ACQUIRED ASSETS AND LIABILITIES
IFRS 3 establishes the following principles in relation to the recognition and measurement of items
arising in a business combination:
 Recognition principle. Identifiable assets acquired, liabilities assumed, and non-controlling

interests in the acquiree, are recognised separately from goodwill
 Measurement principle. All assets acquired and liabilities assumed in a business combination
are measured at acquisition-date fair value.
IFRS 3 (Revised) has introduced some changes to the assets and liabilities recognised in the acquisition
statement of financial position. The existing requirement to recognise all of the identifiable assets and
liabilities of the acquiree is retained. Most assets are recognised at fair value, with exceptions for certain
items such as deferred tax and pension obligations.
Intangible assets
x
Acquired intangible assets must be recognised and measured at fair value in accordance with the
Bo
principles if it is separable or arises from other contractual rights, irrespective of whether the acquiree had
recognised the asset prior to the business combination occurring. This is because there is always sufficient
information to reliably measure the fair value of these assets.
Acquirers are required to recognise brands, licences and customer relationships, and other intangible
assets.
Contingent amounts
b al
lo
Contingent assets are not recognised, and contingent liabilities are measured at fair value.
G
Until a contingent liability is settled, cancelled or expired, a contingent liability that was recognised in the
initial accounting for a business combination is measured at the higher of the amount the liability would
A
be recognised under IAS 37 Provisions, Contingent Liabilities and Contingent Assets, and the amount
less accumulated amortization (amount under the relevant standard).
C
The acquirer can seldom recognise a reorganisation provision at the date of the business combination.
AC
There is no change from the previous guidance in the new standard: the ability of an acquirer to recognise
a liability for terminating or reducing the activities of the acquiree is severely restricted. A restructuring
provision can be recognised in a business combination only when the acquiree has, at the acquisition date,
an existing liability for which there are detailed conditions in IAS 37, but these conditions are unlikely to
exist at the acquisition date in most business combinations.
Timeline for acquisition accounting
An acquirer has a maximum period of 12 months from the date of acquisition to finalise the acquisition
accounting. The adjustment period ends when the acquirer has gathered all the necessary information,
subject to the 12-month maximum. There is no exemption from the 12-month rule for deferred tax assets
or changes in the amount of contingent consideration. The revised standard will only allow adjustments
against goodwill within this one-year period.
157 | P a g e
CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL POSITION
At the date of acquisition, the investment by the parent company in the subsidiary company is cancelled of
against the equity (share capital, state premium, retained earnings of subsidiary company. Any excess
remaining is known as goodwill.
All assets and liabilities of subsidiary company are than added on a line by line basis with the assets and
liabilities of the parent company.
In the consolidated statement of financial position, the share capital and share premium will ALWAYS be
of Parent Co. only.
If the parent contacts less than 100% of a subsidiary, the remaining investment is known as non-
controlling interest and a portion of equity shall now be attributable to NCI.
Types of consideration
ox
There are five different ways in which consideration may be paid at the acquisition of subsidiary co. A sum
of all of these is called the COST OF INVESTMENT.
lB
Consideration might be paid in the following ways: ba
 By cash
 By share for share exchange
 By deferred consideration

lo
By contingent consideration
 By loan notes
G
 By Cash
The consideration is calculated by multiplying the number of shares acquired with per share cash paid i.e.
A
Total no. of shares of subsidiary co. x % holding x cash paid per share.
C
 By Share for share exchange

AC
The consideration is calculated by multiplying the number of shares issued by Parent Co. with per share
price of Parent Co. at the date of acquisition. i.e. No. of shares issued by Parent co. x Parent co. per share
price
 By Deferred consideration: Deferred consideration is recorded at present value at the date of

acquisition.
Initial recognition:
Dr. Cost of investment

Cr. Provision for deferred consideration
Subsequent recognition Unwinding of discount
Dr. Consolidates retained earnings

Cr. Provision for deferred consideration
158 | P a g e
 Contingent consideration: At times, the parent Co. agrees to pay the consideration only if
some specified conditions are met such conditions are contingent events and IFRS 3 requires to
measure such consideration at fair value.
Initial recognition:
Dr. Cost of investment

Cr. Provision for contingent consideration
Subsequent recognition
Fair value of contingent considered is re-assessed at every subsequent reporting date. Increase/ Decrease
in fair value is charged to consolidated retained earnings.
In case of increase in fair value, following double entry will be passed.
Dr. Consolidates retained earnings

Cr. Provision for contingent consideration
x
 By loan notes
Bo
The consideration is calculated by recording the loan notes issued to shareholders of subsidiary co. at the
date of acquisition.
The loan notes are issued to shareholders of subsidiary co. so these are NOT subsequently adjusted as
inter company loan.
Fair Value Adjustment

b al
lo
All items in subsidiary co. financial statements are brought at their fair value at the date of acquisition for
a valid calculation of goodwill. Gain or loss on fair value adjustment is included in the calculation of
G
goodwill.
Additional depreciation due to fair value adjustment is deducted from retained earnings.
A
C
Goodwill in consolidated Statement of Financial Position:

AC
Acquisition-date fair value of consideration transferred by parent X

Plus: Fair (or full) value of the N-CI at date of acquisition X
Less: Fair value of subsidiary's identifiable net assets at date of acquisition (X)
Equals: Total Goodwill X
Format for detailed working of Full Goodwill calculation
159 | P a g e
Negative goodwill is called Bargain Purchase Gain. It is charged to current year statement of profit or loss
as income.
Impairment Of Goodwill
Under this approach the goodwill appearing in the consolidated Statement of Financial Position is the
total goodwill. The accounting treatment will be:
Dr Group retained Earnings X

Dr Non-controlling interest X
Cr Goodwill X
INTRA-GROUP BALANCES:
Intra-group balances shall be removed from consolidated statement of financial position (CSOFP) only if
the balances reconcile.
Dr. Payables
x
Cr. Receivables
Bo
If balances do not reconcile then there can be two possible reasons for it. It is either due to cash in transit
or goods in transit.
co.
• Cash in transit
b al
Make the adjustments for in transit items to bring their values at the same level in parent and subsidiary
lo
DR Cash
CR Receivables
• Goods in transit
G
DR Inventories
CR Payables
A
Intra-Group unrealized profits

C
These are the profits on inventory arising as a result of inter company/intra group sale and the goods are
still unsold at the year end.
AC
Downstream transactions: If P Co has sold goods to S Co and these goods remain the in inventory at
the year end, the profit recognized by the parent Co. Shall be eliminated (No impact on NCI)
Dr. Consolidated Reserves

Cr. Inventory
Upstream transaction: If the S Co. has sold goods to the P.Co. the profits have been earned by the
S.Co. and shall be eliminated not only from group reserve but also from NCI

Dr. NCI
Cr. Inventories
Intra-group loans: The portion of loan given by the P.Co to its subsidiary is an intra-group
receivable, payable and shall be eliminated as such.
Dr. Loan liability

Cr. Loan Asset
160 | P a g e
Any interest receivable payable on such loans shall also be eliminated but only to the extent related to the
parent
Dr. Interest payable

Cr. Interest receivable
If the P.Co has not recorded interest receivable on loans given to the sub Co. the first treatment is to
record the interest receivable.
Dr. Interest receivable

Cr. Consolidated reserves
After this an intra-group interest receivable payables exists which shall be eliminated
Dr. Interest payable

Cr. Interest receivable
If P.Co. has recorded the receivable but subsidiary company has not included a payable in its own
financial statements, first treatment is to record the interest payable.
x
Bo
After this an intra-group interest receivable, payable asset which shall be eliminated.
Intra-group dividends: If the parent Co has not recorded the dividend recoverable the first treatment
is to record the receivables.
Dr. Dividend receivable

Cr. Consolidated reserve
b al
After this an intra-group, dividends receivable/payable exists which shall be eliminated:
lo
Dr. Consolidated reserves
Dr. NCI
G
Cr. Dividend payable
Redeemable Preference Shares: Treat like any other long-term loans i.e. eliminate as an inter-
A
company loan and adjust for any interest accrual.

C
Full or fair value of NCI: IFRS-3, allows/requires goodwill to be stated at full value i.e. a part of
goodwill shall now be attributable to NCI.
AC
Now goodwill impairment shall be charged not only to be parent company but also to NCI
Dr. NCI
Cr. Goodwill
FORMAT FOR CALCULATION OF NCI
161 | P a g e
*If fair value of NCI is not available in question, it can be calculated by multiplying NCI no. of shares with
Subsidiary Co. per share price at the date of acquisition
CONSOLIDATD RETAINED EARNINGS
Format for calculation of consolidated retained earnings
ox
lB
ba
lo
G
A
C
AC
162 | P a g e
CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT PROFIT OR LOSS AND OTHER

COMPREHENSIVE INCOME
The basic idea of preparing consolidated statement of profit or loss is to show the results of the group as if
it were a single entity.
The majority of figures are simple aggregations of the results of the parent and all the subsidiaries (line by
line) down to profit after tax.
In aggregating the results of the parent and subsidiaries, intra-group transactions such as dividend
income, interest income and unrealised profits are eliminated.
Any non-controlling interest is ignored until profit after tax. Their interest in profits after tax is then
subtracted as a one-liner to leave profits attributable to members of the parent.
x
P group plc - Pro-forma Consolidated statement of profit or loss
Bo
For year ended 30 November 20X6
b al
lo
G
A
C
AC
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
 If the subsidiary is acquired during the current accounting period it is necessary to apportion the
profit for the period between its pre-acquisition and post-acquisition elements. This is dealt with
by determining on a line-by-line basis the post-acquisition figures of the subsidiary.
 After profit after tax in consolidated statement of profit or loss, total profits are divided between
profits attributable to group and profit attributable to NCI
 Any dividends receivable by the parent must be cancelled against dividends paid from the
subsidiary undertaking.
 Where group companies trade with each other one will record a sale and the other an equal
amount as a purchase. These items must be removed from the consolidated statement of profit or
loss by cancelling from both sales and cost of sales.
163 | P a g e
 The unrealized profit adjustment is to increase cost of sales. In case of upstream transaction, the
unrealized profit is deducted from profit attributable to NCI also.
 Investment in loans means an intra-group finance cost as well as inter-group dividends.
 These will cancel out in basically the same way as for dividends.
 Impairment of goodwill is treated as an administration expense unless otherwise stated
 There is no impact of fair value adjustment on acquisition at the statement of profit or loss.
However, any additional depreciation related to such fair value adjustment must be charged by
adding to cost of sales and deducting from profit after tax of subsidiary while calculating profit
attributable to NCI
x
Bo
b al
lo
G
A
C
AC
164 | P a g e
IAS 28 – INVESTMENTS IN ASSOCIATES

SCOPE
This Standard shall be applied in accounting for investments in associates.
DEFINITIONS
The following terms are used in this Standard with the meanings specified:-
 An associate is an entity, including an unincorporated entity such as a partnership, over which the
investor has significant influence and that is neither a subsidiary nor an interest in a joint venture.
 The equity method is a method of accounting whereby the investment is initially recognized at cost
and adjusted thereafter for the post-acquisition change in the investor‘s share of net assets of the
x
investee. The profit or loss of the investor includes the investor‘s share of the profit or loss of the
Bo
investee.
 Significant influence is the power to participate in the financial and operating policy decisions of
the investee but is not control or joint control over those policies. Investments of 20% to 50% in
voting power of companies lead to existence of significant influence. Significant influence by an
b al
investor is usually evidenced in one or more of the following ways:-
a. Representation on the board of directors or equivalent governing body of the investee.

b. Participating in policy making process, including participation in decisions about dividends or
lo
other distributions.
c. Material transactions between the investor and the investee
G
d. Interchange of managerial personnel; or

e. Provision of essential technical information.
A
ACCOUNTING OF ASSOCIATE
C
Associate should be accounted for in consolidated financial statement using equity method; i.e.
AC
investment is
 Initially recorded at cost;

 Adjusted for post-acquisition change in net assets (investor share); Or post acquisition profits/losses
(investor share);
 The profit or loss of the investor includes the investor‘s share of the profit or loss of the investee.
 Dividend paid or distributions made will reduce the investment.
 On acquisition any difference between the cost of investment and investor‘s share of net fair value of
associate‘s identifiable assets, liabilities and contingent liabilities is accounted for in accordance with
IFRS-3.
 Goodwill relating to an associate is included in the carrying value of investment
 Any excess of the investor‘s share of net fair value of the associate‘s assets, liabilities and
contingent liabilities over the cost of investment is excluded from the carrying value of
investment and is included in the income statement of the year of acquisition.
165 | P a g e
 Adjustments in investor‘s share of profit and loss after acquisition are made in respect of depreciation
based on Fair Value.
 If different reporting dates, adjust the effect of significant events between reporting dates;
 The investor‘s financial statements shall be prepared using uniform accounting policies for like
transactions and events in similar circumstances.
 If the investor‘s share of losses exceeds or equals its interest in associate, the investor will discontinue
the recognition of further losses. Additional losses can only be recognized if there exist any legal or
constructive obligation
 Impairment test will be applied on the entire amount of investment under IAS -36 and the
impairment loss will be recognized.
 No netting-off is done between receivables and payables
EXCEPTIONS TO THE EQUITY METHOD
An investment in an associate shall be accounted for using the equity method except when:
x
1) There is an evidence that the investment is acquired and held exclusively with a view to its disposal
within twelve months from acquisition date (Then apply IFRS -5).
Bo
2) All of the following apply:
a. The investor is a wholly-owned subsidiary its other owners do not object if the investor does not
apply the equity method;
b. The investor‘s debt or equity instruments are not traded in a public market
b al
c. The investor did not file its financial statements with securities commission, and
d. The ultimate parent of the investor produces consolidated financial statements.
lo
Some noteworthy points include:
G
 Investment described in 1 above shall be classified as held for trading and

accounted for in accordance with IFRS-5.
A
EQUITY METHOD
C
STATEMENT OF PROFIT OR LOSS

AC
 Dividend income from associates (reported in the investor's books) is replaced by the profit after tax
of the associate.
STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL POSITION
Initially the Investments in Associates is shown at cost (same as in the individual accounts), identifying
any goodwill included in the cost.
In subsequent years the Investor's accounts will show:
 The investment at cost

 Plus group share of associate's post acquisition reserves.
 Less any impairment of investment to date.
166 | P a g e
On the bottom of the balance sheet consolidated reserves will reflect the other side of these adjustments.
Transactions between a Group and Associate
Profits and losses resulting from ‗upstream‘ and ‗downstream‘ transactions between an investor
(including its consolidated subsidiaries) and an associate are recognised in the investor‘s financial
statements only to the extent of unrelated investors‘ interests in the associate.
x
Upstream‘ transactions are, for example, sales of assets from an associate to the investor.
Bo
‗Downstream‘ transactions are, for example, sales of assets from the investor to an associate.
The investor‘s share in the associate‘s profits and losses resulting from these transactions is eliminated.
for unrealised profit.

b al
The double entry is as follows, where a% is the parent's holding in the associate, and PUP is the provision
lo
DEBIT Retained earnings of parent PUP × A%
G
CREDIT Group inventories PUP × A%
For upstream transactions (associate sells to parent/subsidiary) where the parent holds the inventories.
A
OR
C
DEBIT Retained earnings of parent /subsidiary PUP × A%

AC
CREDIT Investment in associate PUP × A%
For downstream transactions, (parent/subsidiary sells to associate) where the associate holds the
inventory.
DISCLOSURES
There are no disclosures specified in IAS 28. Instead, IFRS 12 Disclosure of Interests in Other
Entities outlines the disclosures required for entities with joint control of, or significant influence over, an
investee.
167 | P a g e
IFRS 11 – JOINT ARRANGEMENTS
OBJECTIVE
The objective of this IFRS is to establish principles for financial reporting by entities that have an interest
in arrangements that are controlled jointly (i.e. joint arrangements).
SCOPE
This IFRS shall be applied by all entities that are a party to a joint arrangement.
DEFINITIONS
Joint arrangement: An arrangement of which two or more parties have joint control.
x
Joint control: The contractually agreed sharing of control of an arrangement, which exists only when
Bo
decisions about the relevant activities require the unanimous consent of the parties sharing control.
Joint operation A joint arrangement whereby the parties that have joint control of the
arrangement have rights to the assets, and obligations for the liabilities, relating to the arrangement.
b al
Separate vehicle A separately identifiable financial structure, including separate legal entities or
entities recognised by statute, regardless of whether those entities have a legal personality.
lo
JOINT ARRANGEMENTS
G
A joint arrangement has the following characteristics:

A
(a) The parties are bound by a contractual arrangement.

(b) The contractual arrangement gives two or more of those parties joint control of the arrangement.
C
Contractual Arrangements
AC
The contractual arrangement sets out the terms upon which the parties participate in the activity that is
the subject of the arrangement.
The contractual arrangement generally deals with such matters as:
(a) The purpose, activity and duration of the joint arrangement.

(b) How the members of the board of directors, or equivalent governing body, of the joint arrangement,
are appointed.
(c) The decision-making process: the matters requiring decisions from the parties, the voting rights of the
parties and the required level of support for those matters. The decision-making process reflected in
the contractual arrangement establishes joint control of the arrangement.
(d) The capital or other contributions required of the parties.
(e) How the parties share assets, liabilities, revenues, expenses or profit or loss relating to the joint
arrangement.
168 | P a g e
Classification of a Joint Arrangement

The classification of joint arrangements requires the parties to assess their rights and obligations arising
from the arrangement. When making that assessment, an entity shall consider the following:
(a) The structure of the joint arrangement.
(b) When the joint arrangement is structured through a separate vehicle:
(i) The legal form of the separate vehicle ;

(ii) The terms of the contractual arrangement and
(iii) When relevant, other facts and circumstances.
A joint arrangement is either a joint operation or a joint venture.
x
Bo
b al
lo
G
A
C
AC
The following table compares common terms in contractual arrangements of parties to a joint operation
and common terms in contractual arrangements of parties to a joint venture. The examples of the
contractual terms provided in the following table are not exhaustive.
169 | P a g e
x
Bo
b al
lo
G
A
C
AC
170 | P a g e
FINANCIAL STATEMENTS OF PARTIES TO JOINT ARRANGEMENTS
Joint Operations
A joint operator shall recognise in relation to its interest in a joint operation:
(a) its assets, including its share of any assets held jointly;
(b) its liabilities, including its share of any liabilities incurred jointly;
(c) its revenue from the sale of its share of the output arising from the joint operation;
(d) its share of the revenue from the sale of the output by the joint operation; and
(e) Its expenses, including its share of any expenses incurred jointly.
Joint Ventures
A joint venture shall recognise its interest in a joint venture as an investment and shall account for that
x
investment using the equity method in accordance with IAS 28 Investments in Associates and Joint
Bo
Ventures unless the entity is exempted from applying the equity method as specified in that standard.
Application of IAS 28 (2011) To Joint Ventures

b al
The consolidated statement of financial position is prepared by:
Including the interest in the joint venture at cost plus share of post-acquisition total comprehensive
lo
income
 Including the group share of the post-acquisition total comprehensive income in group reserves
G
The consolidated statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income will include:
A
 The group share of the joint venture‘s profit or loss

 The group share of the joint venture‘s other comprehensive income.
C
The use of the equity method should be discontinued from the date on which the joint venture ceases to
AC
have joint control over, or have significant influence on, a joint venture.
Transactions between a Joint Venture and a Joint Venture
Upstream transactions: A joint venture may sell or contribute assets to a joint venture so making a profit
or loss. Any such gain or loss should, however, only be recognised to the extent that it reflects the
substance of the transaction.
Therefore:
 Only the gain attributable to the interest of the other joint ventures should be recognised in the
The full amount of any loss should be recognised when the transaction shows evidence that the net
realisable value of current assets is less than cost, or that there is an impairment loss.
171 | P a g e
Downstream transactions: When a joint venture purchases assets from a joint venture, the joint venture
should not recognise its share of the profit made by the joint venture on the transaction in question until
it resells the assets to an independent third party, i.e. until the profit is realised.
Losses should be treated in the same way, except losses should be recognised immediately if they
represent a reduction in the net realisable value of current assets, or a permanent decline in the carrying
amount of non-current assets.
te major line of business or geographical area of operations then it must be "part of a single co-ordinated
plan" to dispose of such a line of business or geographical area of operations. The single plan might relate
to a disposal in one transaction or piecemeal.
PRESENTATION
 Non-current assets that meet the criteria are presented separately on the Statement of Financial
Position within current assets.
 If the held for sale item is a disposal group then related liabilities are also reported separately
within current liabilities.
x
 Discontinued operations and operations held for sale must be disclosed separately in the
Bo
statement of financial position at the lower of their carrying value less costs to sell.
b al
lo
G
A
C
AC
172 | P a g e
IFRS 12 DISCLOSURE OF INTERESTS IN OTHER ENTITIES
OBJECTIVE
The objective of IFRS 12 is to require the disclosure of information that enables users of financial
statements to evaluate:
 The nature of, and risks associated with, its interests in other entities
 The effects of those interests on its financial position, financial performance and cash flows
DEFINITIONS
Structured entity An entity that has been designed so that voting or similar rights are not the dominant
factor in deciding who controls the entity, such as when any voting rights relate to administrative tasks
x
only and the relevant activities are directed by means of contractual arrangements
Bo
The standard requires disclosure of:
(a) Significant judgements and assumptions.
are not controlled by an investor.

b al
(b) Information about interests in subsidiaries, associates, joint arrangements and structured entitiesthat
Significant judgements and assumptions

lo
G
An entity discloses information about significant judgements and assumptions it has made (and changes
in those judgements and assumptions) in determining:
A
 That it controls another entity

 That it has joint control of an arrangement or significant influence over another entity
C
 The type of joint arrangement (i.e. joint operation or joint venture) when the arrangement has been
structured through a separate vehicle
AC
Interests in subsidiaries
An entity shall disclose information that enables users of its consolidated financial statements to:
 Understand the composition of the group

 Understand the interest that non-controlling interests have in the group‘s activities and cash flows
 Evaluate the nature and extent of significant restrictions on its ability to access or use assets, and
settle liabilities, of the group
 Evaluate the nature of, and changes in, the risks associated with its interests in consolidated
structured entities
 Evaluate the consequences of changes in its ownership interest in a subsidiary that do not result in a
loss of control
 Evaluate the consequences of losing control of a subsidiary during the reporting period.
173 | P a g e
Interests in joint arrangements and associates
An entity shall disclose information that enables users of its financial statements to evaluate:
 The nature, extent and financial effects of its interests in joint arrangements and associates, including
the nature and effects of its contractual relationship with the other investors with joint control of, or
significant influence over, joint arrangements and associates
 The nature of, and changes in, the risks associated with its interests in joint ventures and associates.
Interests in unconsolidated structured entities (not controlled by an investor)
An entity shall disclose information that enables users of its financial statements to:
 Understand the nature and extent of its interests in unconsolidated structured entities
 Evaluate the nature of, and changes in, the risks associated with its interests in unconsolidated
x
structured entities.
Bo
b al
lo
G
A
C
AC
174 | P a g e
CHANGES IN GROUP STRUCTURES
STEP ACQUISITIONS AND DISPOSALS
STEP ACQUISITIONS
What is a step acquisition?
A ‗step acquisitions‘ is a business combination achieved in stages, where the acquirer (parent company)
gains control of an acquiree (subsidiary) in stages over a period of time.
When control is achieved
 Any previously held equity shareholding should be treated as if it had been disposal of and then
x
reacquired at fair value at the acquisition date.
 Any gain or loss on remeasurement to fair value should be recognised in profit or loss in the period.
Bo
Goodwill is calculated as:
b al
lo
G
Increasing or reducing a shareholding whilst retaining control

A
After a parent company has acquired a subsidiary, it might increase or reduce its shareholding, whilst still
C
retaining control.
AC
IAS 27 (revised) states that when an entity changes the percentage size of its ownership in a subsidiary
without losing control, the transaction should be accounted for as an equity transaction.
 A group of companies is viewed as a single economic entity, and the equity ownership of this entity
consists of equity shareholders in the parent and non-controlling interests in subsidiaries.
 The sale of shares between the parent company and non-controlling interests is therefore a
transaction between equity owners of the group.
 Since the sale of the shares is a transaction between equity owners in their capacity as owners of the
group, no profit or loss arises on the transaction, and there is no gain or loss to report either as 'other
comprehensive income'.
 The transaction should simply result in an adjustment to equity. The carrying amounts of the parent's
interests and the non-controlling interests in the equity of the group are adjusted to record the change
in their ownership interests.
175 | P a g e
The rules summarised
When shares in a subsidiary are bought from or sold to non-controlling interests, but the parent entity
retains control over the subsidiary, the transaction should be recorded directly in equity for the purpose of
preparing consolidated accounts.
When shares are purchased from NCI, the difference between the price paid for the shares and the
carrying value of the NCI shares purchased should be recorded as a debit or credit to the parent entity's
equity interest in the group.
If the price paid for the shares exceeds their carrying value, there will be a reduction in the parent entity's
equity interest in the group, and so the excess price paid should be debited to the parent entity's interest.
Similarly when shares in a subsidiary are sold to NCI but the parent retains control over the subsidiary the
difference between the price paid for the shares and the carrying value of the NCI shares purchased
should be recorded as a debit or credit to the parent entity's equity interest in the group.
ox
A 'gain' on the sale will be recorded as a credit to the parent entity's equity interest in the group.
It follows that no additional goodwill or reduction in goodwill occurs as a result of these transactions.
lB
There is also no recognition of any gain or loss on the transaction in the consolidated statement of
comprehensive income (either profit or loss, or other comprehensive, income).
ba
The calculation is as follows:
lo
$
Fair value of consideration paid (X)
G
Decrease in NCI in net assets at date of transaction X

Decrease in NCI in goodwill at date of transaction X
Adjustment to parent's equity (X)
A
C
Full and partial disposals of shares in a subsidiary

AC
Four possible situations following a disposal
 Disposals of shares in subsidiaries without loss of control

 Disposals of shares in subsidiaries and loss of control: the general accounting rules
 Full disposal of shares in a subsidiary
 Partial disposal of shares: subsidiary becomes an associate after the disposal
 Partial disposal of shares: the remaining shares become an ordinary investment
Full and partial disposals of shares in a subsidiary
Whenever you cross the 50% boundary, you revalue, and a gain or loss is reported in profit or loss for the
year. If you do not cross the 50% boundary, no gain or loss is reported: instead there is an adjustment to
the parent‘s equity.
176 | P a g e
Disposal of Shares in Subsidiaries without Loss of Control
The previous section explained the accounting rules for an increase or reduction in the shareholding of a
parent entity in a subsidiary, without any change in control. The transaction is accounted for within
equity, as a transaction between owners of equity in the group.
The same rules apply to the disposal of some shares without losing control as to the purchase of additional
shares when control already exists.
Disposals where control is lost: accounting treatment
For a full disposal, apply the following treatment.

(a) Statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income
(i) Consolidate results and non-controlling interest to the date of disposal.
(ii) Show the group profit or loss on disposal.
x
(b) Statement of financial position
Bo
There will be no non-controlling interest and no consolidation as there is no subsidiary at the date the
statement of financial position is being prepared.
Disposal of a whole subsidiary or associate - revision
Parent company's accounts

b al
lo
In the parent's Individual financial statements the profit or loss on disposal of a subsidiary or associate
holding will be calculated as:
G
A
C
AC
Group accounts — disposal of subsidiary

Gain or loss on disposal
In the group financial statements the profit or loss on disposal will be calculated as:
177 | P a g e
Remember:
 If the disposal is midyear:
 A working will be required to calculate both net assets and the non-controlling interest at the
disposal date.
 Any dividends declared or paid in the year of disposal and prior to the disposal date must be
deducted from the net assets of the subsidiary if they have not already been accounted for.
 Goodwill recognised prior to disposal is original goodwill arising less any impairments to date.
For partial disposals, use the following treatments.

(a) Subsidiary to associate
(i) Statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income
(1) Treat the undertaking as a subsidiary up to the date of disposal, i.e. consolidate for the correct
number of months and show the non-controlling interest in that amount.
(2) Show the profit or loss on disposal.
(3) Treat as an associate thereafter.
x
Bo
(ii) Statement of financial position
(1) The investment remaining is at its fair value at the date of disposal (to calculate the gain)
(2) Equity account (as an associate) thereafter, using the fair value as the new 'cost'. (Post
'acquisition' retained earnings are added to this cost in future years to arrive at the carrying
GAIN OR LOSS ON DISPOSAL

b al
value of the investment in the associate in the statement of financial position.)
lo
In this case there is a loss of control, and so a gain or loss on disposal is calculated as:
G
A
C
AC
(b) Subsidiary to trade investment/IEI

(i) Statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income
(1) Treat the undertaking as a subsidiary up to the date of disposal, i.e. consolidate.
(2) Show profit or loss on disposal.
(3) Show dividend income only thereafter.
(ii) Statement of financial position

(1) The investment remaining is at its fair value at the date of disposal (to calculate the gain).
(2) Thereafter, treat as an investment in equity instruments under IFRS 9.
178 | P a g e
GROUP REORGANISATIONS AND RESTRUCTURING
Changes in direct ownership (i.e. internal group reorganisations) can take many forms. Apart from
divisionalisation, all other internal reorganisations will not affect the consolidated financial statements,
but they will affect the accounts of individual companies within the group.
Groups will reorganise on occasions for a variety of reasons.
(a) A group may want to float a business to reduce the gearing of the group. The holding company will
initially transfer the business into a separate company.
(b) Companies may be transferred to another business during a divisionalisation process.
(c) The group may 'reverse' into another company to obtain a stock exchange quotation.
(d) Internal reorganisations may create efficiencies of group structure for tax purposes.
x
GROUP REORGANISATIONS AND RESTRUCTURING
Bo
Methods of reorganising/restructuring
Groups may sometimes be restructured or reorganised. There are various reasons why a restructuring
restructuring include the following:

b al
might be considered necessary or desirable. These are explained later. Examples of reorganisations or
lo
 Creating a new holding company for the group
 A change in ownership between companies in the group
G
 Divisionalisation
 A demerger
A
Creating a new holding company

C
A new holding company may be created for the group. The reason for this may be to improve the structure
AC
of the group, possibly with a view to making more changes later, such as adding new subsidiaries.
The effect of creating a new holding company is typically as follows:
Before: After:
Shareholders Shareholders
Company X Holding company H
Company X
179 | P a g e
To create the new holding company, the former shareholders of Company X may exchange their shares in
Company X for shares in the new holding company H. They become the owners of H, and H is the 100%
owner of Company X. In these arrangements, there is usually just a share-for-share exchange, with shares
in X exchanged for shares in H, and no cash transactions are involved.
A change in ownership of companies within a group
When companies in a group are 100%-owned, it may be decided to reorganise the group and transfer
ownership of subsidiaries from one group company to another.
For example, a holding company H may own two subsidiaries, Entity A and Entity B. It may be proposed
that Entity A should buy the shares in Entity B from H, for cash. As a result of this reorganisation, Entity
B would become a subsidiary of Entity A and a sub-subsidiary of H. There would also be a transfer of cash
from Entity A to H, in exchange for the shares in Entity B.
x
Bo
b al
lo
G
A
C
In the proposed structure, there is a change in the ownership of Entity B, as it has been transferred so that
AC
it is directly owned by Entity A, not H.
The accounting implications are as follows:

 The reorganisation has not changed the assets of the group and so will not affect the group financial
statements.
 In the individual accounts of H, there is a gain or loss in disposal of the shares in Entity B. In H's own
financial statements, the cost of the investment in Entity B is removed and replaced with the cash
received, together with the resulting gain or loss (in H's reserves).
180 | P a g e
ALTERNATIVE CHANGE IN OWNERSHIP
An alternative situation is where a subsidiary becomes directly owned by the parent, as can be seen in the
diagram below.
Before After:
Company A Company A
Company B
Company B Company C
x
Company C
Bo
This type of group reorganisation is often done when the parent company wishes to sell Company B, but
to retain company C. This reorganisation will have no effect on the consolidated accounts because the
group remains the same. It is the individual companies whose accounts will change.
al
This transaction cannot normally be effected by a share-for-share exchange, because the law in some
countries does not allow a subsidiary to hold shares in a parent company. Instead, Company B pays a
b
special dividend called a 'dividend in specie' to the parent, which is effectively the cost of investment in
Company C. Company B must have sufficient distributable profits to do this.
lo
Alternatively, Company A can pay cash to Company B in return for the investment in Company C.
G
 There is no effect on the group financial statements as the assets of the group are unchanged.
 There has not been a disposal of shares in Entity B by H, so the investment must remain in the
A
accounts of H.
C
 The investment in Entity B in the individual H's accounts will certainly have suffered impairment,
given that the trade of Entity B has been transferred to Entity A.
AC
 If any goodwill arose when H acquired B, this will also be impaired, because the business to which the
goodwill relates has now been transferred.
 Entity A has not bought the shares of Entity B. It has bought the net assets of B in exchange for cash.
Entity A will therefore include all of B's net assets into its own statement of financial position, as B's
business operations have now been merged with A's own.
DIVISIONALISATION WITHIN A GROUP
Within a group, there may be operating divisions, and each division may be established as a subsidiary
company within the group. Each division may own several sub-subsidiaries, each responsible for a
different aspect of the division's overall operations.
When there is divisionalisation of operations within the group, it may be decided from time to time to
switch assets from one division to another. For example, it may be decided to close down one division and
transfer its operations to another division.
181 | P a g e
Accounting for a Divisional Reorganisation
This is a divisionalisation restructuring or reorganisation. It does not affect the ownership of Entity B.
Entity B is still owned by H and the investment remains in the statement of financial position of H. Entity
B has simply transferred its assets, liabilities and all business operations to Entity A, in exchange for cash.
As a result, Entity B is now a 'shell' company, containing just share capital and the cash from the sale.
SUBSIDIARY ACQUIRED EXCLUSIVELY WITH A VIEW TO SUBSEQUENT

DISPOSAL
Subsidiaries acquired exclusively with a view to resell are classified as Discontinued Operations
under IFRS 5.
n entity that is committed to a sale involving loss of control of a subsidiary that qualifies for
held-for-sale classification under IFRS 5 classifies all of the assets and liabilities of that
x
subsidiary as held for sale, even if the entity will retain a non-controlling interest in its former
subsidiary after the sale.
Bo
b al
lo
G
A
C
AC
182 | P a g e
IAS 21 – THE EFFECTS OF CHANGES IN FOREIGN EXCHANGE

RATES
OBJECTIVE
The objective of this Standard is to prescribe how to include foreign currency transactions and foreign
operations in the financial statements of an entity and how to translate financial statements into a
presentation currency.
SCOPE
This Standard shall be applied:
(a) In accounting for transactions and balances in foreign currencies, except for those derivative
transactions and balances that are within the scope of IFRS 9 Financial Instruments;
x
(b) In translating the results and financial position of foreign operations that are included in the financial
Bo
statements of the entity by consolidation, proportionate consolidation or the equity method; and
(c) In translating an entity‘s results and financial position into a presentation currency.
DEFINITIONS
al
b
Closing rate is the spot exchange rate at the end of the reporting period.
lo
Exchange difference is the difference resulting from translating a given number of units of one
currency into another currency at different exchange rates.
G
Exchange rate is the ratio of exchange for two currencies.

A

Foreign currency is a currency other than the functional currency of the entity.
C
Foreign operation is an entity that is a subsidiary, associate, joint venture or branch of a reporting
entity, the activities of which are based or conducted in a country or currency other than those of the
AC
reporting entity.
Functional currency is the currency of the primary economic environment in which the entity
operates.
A group is a parent and all its subsidiaries.
Monetary items are units of currency held and assets and liabilities to be received or paid in a fixed or
determinable number of units of currency.
Net investment in a foreign operation is the amount of the reporting entity‘s interest in the net
assets of that operation.
Presentation currency is the currency in which the financial statements are presented.
Spot exchange rate is the exchange rate for immediate delivery.
183 | P a g e
INDICATORS OF FUNCTIONAL CURRENCY
Primary economic indicators
The primary economic environment in which an entity operates is normally the one in which it primarily
generates and expends cash. An entity considers the following factors in determining its functional
currency:
(a) The currency:

(i) That mainly influences sales prices for goods and services and
(ii) Of the country whose competitive forces and regulations mainly determine the sales prices of
its goods and services.
(b) The currency that mainly influences labour, material and other costs of providing goods or services
Secondary Indicators
x
The following factors may also provide evidence of an entity‘s functional currency (judgements from
Bo
management if functional currency is not immediately):
(a) The currency in which funds from financing activities (i.e. issuing debt and equity instruments) are
generated.
Functional Currency of Foreign Operations

b al
(b) The currency in which receipts from operating activities are usually retained.
lo
The following additional factors are considered in determining the functional currency of a foreign
operation:
G
(a) Whether the activities of the foreign operation are carried out as an extension of the reporting entity,
A
rather than being carried out with a significant degree of autonomy.

(b) Whether transactions with the reporting entity are a high or a low proportion of the foreign
C
operation‘s activities.
(c) Whether cash flows from the activities of the foreign operation directly affect the cash flows of the
AC
reporting entity and are readily available for remittance to it.

(d) whether cash flows from the activities of the foreign operation are sufficient to service existing and
normally expected debt obligations without funds being made available by the reporting entity
Change in Functional Currency
Once determined, the functional currency is not changed unless there is a change in those underlying
transactions, events and conditions.
Currency of Hyperinflationary Economies
If the functional currency is the currency of a hyperinflationary economy, the entity‘s financial statements
are restated in accordance with IAS 29 Financial Reporting in Hyperinflationary Economies.
184 | P a g e
REPORTING FOREIGN CURRENCY TRANSACTIONS IN THE FUNCTIONAL CURRENCY
INITIAL RECOGNITION
A foreign currency transaction is a transaction that is denominated or requires settlement in a foreign

currency, including transactions arising when an entity:
(a) Buys or sells goods or services whose price is denominated in a foreign currency;
(b) Borrows or lends funds when the amounts payable or receivable are denominated in a foreign
currency; or
(c) Otherwise acquires or disposes of assets, or incurs or settles liabilities, denominated in a foreign
currency.
A foreign currency transaction shall be recorded, on initial recognition in the functional currency, by
applying to the foreign currency amount the spot exchange rate between the functional currency and the
foreign currency at the date of the transaction.
x
Bo
SUBSEQUENT MEASUREMENT
A foreign currency transaction may give rise to assets or liabilities that are denominated in a foreign
currency. These assets and liabilities will need to be translated into the entity's functional currency at each
non-monetary items.
b al
reporting date. How they will be translated depends on whether the assets or liabilities are monetary or
Monetary items
lo
The essential feature of a monetary item, as the definition implies, is the right to receive (or an obligation
G
to deliver) a fixed or determinable number of units of currency. Examples of monetary assets include:

A
Cash and bank balances

 Trade receivables and payables
C
 Loan receivables and payables

 Foreign currency bonds held as available for sale
AC
 Foreign currency bonds held to maturity

 Pensions and other employee benefits to be paid in cash
 Provisions that are to be settled in cash
 Cash dividends that are recognised as a liability
 A contract to receive (or deliver) a variable number of the entity's own equity instruments or a
variable amount of assets in which the fair value to be received (or delivered) equals a fixed or
determinable number of units of currency
Foreign currency monetary items outstanding at the end of the reporting date shall be translated using the
closing rate. The difference between this amount and the previous carrying amount in functional currency
is an exchange gain or loss.
Non-monetary items
A non-monetary item does not give the right to receive or create the obligation to deliver a fixed or
determinable number of units of currency. Examples of non-monetary items include:
185 | P a g e
 Amounts prepaid for goods and services (e.g. prepaid rent)
 Goodwill
 Intangible assets
 Inventories
 Property, plant and equipment
 Provisions to be settled by the delivery of a non-monetary asset
 Equity instruments that are held as available for sale financial assets
 Equity investments in subsidiaries, associates or joint ventures
Non-monetary items carried at historic cost are translated using the exchange rate at the date of the
transaction when the asset arose (historical rate). They are not subsequently retranslated in the individual
financial statements of the entity.
Issues in the measurement of non-monetary assets

 Subsequent depreciation should be translated on the same basis as the asset to which it relates, so the
x
rate at the date of acquisition for assets carried at cost and at the rate at the last valuation date for
assets carried at revalued amounts. Application of the depreciation method to the translated amount
Bo
will achieve this.
 The carrying amount of inventories is the lower of cost and net realisable value in accordance with
IAS 2 Inventories. The carrying amount in the functional currency is determined by comparing:


b al
The cost, translated at the exchange rate at the date when that amount was determined.
The net realisable value, translated at the exchange rate at the date when that value was
determined (e.g. the closing date at the reporting date).
lo
Impairment testing of foreign currency non-monetary assets

G
Similarly in accordance with IAS 36 Impairment 0/ Assets, the carrying amount of an asset for which
there is an indication of impairment, is the lower of:
A
C
 The carrying amount, translated at the exchange rate at the date when that amount was determined.
 The recoverable amount, translated at the exchange rate at the date when that value was determined
AC
(e.g. the closing rate at the reporting date).
The effect of this comparison may be that an impairment loss is recognised in the functional currency but
would not be recognised in the foreign currency or vice versa.
The Rules
The rules in IAS 21 for reporting assets and liabilities at the end of a subsequent reporting period make a
distinction between:
 Monetary items, such as trade payables and trade receivables, and

 Non-monetary items, such as non-current assets and inventory.
186 | P a g e
The rules are as follows, for entities preparing their individual financial statements:
Recognition of Exchange Differences
Exchange differences arising on the settlement of monetary items or on translating monetary items at
x
rates different from those at which they were translated on initial recognition during the period or in
previous financial statements shall be recognised in profit or loss in the period in which they arise, except
Bo
as described below
There are two situations to consider.
is recognised in that period.

b al
(a) The transaction is settled in the same period as that in which it occurred: all the exchange difference
(b) The transaction is settled in a subsequent accounting period: the exchange difference recognised in
lo
each intervening period up to the period of settlement is determined by the change in exchange rates
during that period.
G
When a gain or loss on a non-monetary item is recognised in other comprehensive income, any exchange
component of that gain or loss shall be recognised in other comprehensive income. Conversely, when a
A
gain or loss on a non-monetary item is recognised in profit or loss, any exchange component of that gain
or loss shall be recognised in profit or loss.
C
Exchange differences arising on a monetary item that forms part of a reporting entity‘s net investment in
AC
a foreign operation shall be recognised in profit or loss in the separate financial statements of the
reporting entity or the individual financial statements of the foreign operation, as appropriate.
In the financial statements that include the foreign operation and the reporting entity (e.g. consolidated
financial statements when the foreign operation is a subsidiary), such exchange differences shall be
recognised initially in other comprehensive income and reclassified from equity to profit or loss on
disposal of the net investment.
Change in functional currency
When there is a change in an entity‘s functional currency, the entity shall apply the translation procedures
applicable to the new functional currency prospectively from the date of the change.
The foreign operation: accounting rules
Three stages in the consolidation process:
187 | P a g e
 The translation stage
 The consolidation stage
The Foreign Operation: Accounting Rules

Three stages in the consolidation process
If a company has a foreign operation (such as a foreign subsidiary) that prepares its accounts in a
functional currency that is different from the group's presentation currency, there are three stages in the
accounting process, for the purpose of preparing consolidated financial statements (or including the
foreign associate or joint venture in the financial statements of the reporting entity).
ox
lB
ba
lo
G
The translation stage

A
The rules set out below apply where the functional currency of the foreign entity is not a currency
suffering from hyperinflation.
C
The normal rules for translation, contained in IAS 21, are as follows:
AC
(1) The statement of financial position

 The assets and liabilities of the foreign operation, for inclusion in the consolidated statement of
financial position, are translated at the closing rate. (Comparative figures for the previous year
are translated at the same rate.)
 For foreign subsidiaries, this rule also applies to purchased goodwill arising on the acquisition
of the subsidiary.
(2) The statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income
 Income and expenses for inclusion in the consolidated statement of profit or loss and other
comprehensive income are translated at the spot rates at the dates of each of the transactions.
 For practical reasons, average rates for a period may be used, if they provide a reasonable
approximation of the spot rates when the transactions took place.
(3) Exchange differences
 All resulting exchange differences are recognised in other comprehensive income for the period
and are credited (gain) or debited (loss) to a separate reserve within the equity section of the
consolidated statement of financial position, and this reserve is maintained within equity until
the foreign operation is eventually disposed of.
188 | P a g e
 Gains or losses are therefore reported as gains or losses in other comprehensive income and
movements in the separate reserve, and not as a gain or loss in profit or loss and an increase or
reduction in retained earnings.
The gain or loss on translation
The exchange differences on translation result in a gain or loss. These gains or losses arise from a
combination of two factors:
 Income and expense items are translated at the exchange rates ruling during the period, but assets
and liabilities are translated at closing rates. The profit is therefore calculated at the actual exchange
rates, but the accumulated profit in the consolidated statement of financial position is re-translated at
the closing rate.
 The net assets of the subsidiary were translated at last year's closing rate at the end of the previous
financial year. These net assets have now been retranslated and included in this year's statement of
financial position at this year's closing rate.
x
Bo
IAS 21 states that these differences on translation are not recognised in profit or loss because changes in
the exchange rates for these items have little or no effect on cash flows from operations. It would therefore
be misleading to include them in profit or loss. However the actual treatment is that the exchange loss
should be recognised in other comprehensive income for the year and taken to a separate reserve within
The consolidation stage

b al
equity in the consolidated statement of financial position.
lo
After the translation stage, the financial statements of the overseas entity are in the presentation currency
G
of the parent company.
The basic rule is that normal consolidation techniques can now be used. However, foreign exchange
A
reserve must be included in the consolidated statement of financial position for the cumulative exchange
differences.
C
It is also necessary to comply with the requirements of IAS 21 for purchased goodwill and foreign
AC
subsidiaries.
Purchased goodwill and foreign subsidiaries
IAS 21 requires that goodwill and any fair value adjustments arising on the acquisition of a foreign
subsidiary are to be treated as part of the assets and liabilities of the foreign subsidiary. The rules already
described apply to these items.
This means that:

 Goodwill arising on the purchase of the foreign subsidiary (and also any fair value adjustments to the
value of assets of the subsidiary) should be stated in the functional currency of the foreign subsidiary.
 The goodwill and fair value adjustments will therefore be translated each year at the closing exchange
rate.
A gain or loss on translation will therefore arise (as described above for other assets and liabilities).
189 | P a g e
The effect of this rule is that goodwill and the acquisition of a foreign operation is re-stated over time
because it is re-translated every year at the new closing exchange rate.
Exchange differences in other comprehensive income
Using the method of creating the consolidated statement of financial position shown in the previous
example, you do not need to worry about exchange differences. By translating every balance in the
subsidiary's statement of financial position at the closing rate, the exchange differences are automatically
included in reserves.
However, you may be asked to calculate exchange differences arising for reporting in other
comprehensive income and a separate equity reserve.
The easiest way to work out the exchange differences (excluding the gain or loss on re-translation of
goodwill) is to create the accounting equation for the foreign subsidiary in its own currency. Once this is
translated into the parent's currency it will not balance, and the exchange differences are the balancing
figure. These are the exchange differences arising from:
ox
 Re-translating the opening net assets of the subsidiary at the closing rate, and

lB
Re-translating the subsidiary's post-acquisition profit at the closing rate.
DISPOSAL OF A FOREIGN SUBSIDIARY ba

Most of the accounting rules for the disposal of a foreign subsidiary, or for the partial disposal of a foreign
subsidiary, are set out in IAS 27 (revised). Disposals are explained in another chapter.
lo
However IAS 27 does not deal with the accounting treatment of the balance on the separate equity reserve
account when a foreign subsidiary is disposed of. This matter is dealt with by IAS 21.
G
 When the entire investment in a foreign subsidiary is disposed of, the cumulative balance in the
A
separate equity reserve (which represents amounts previously recognised in other comprehensive
income) should now be reclassified from equity to profit and loss.
C
 If there was a non-controlling interest in the subsidiary, the NCI is derecognised in the consolidated
statement of financial position. Amounts previously recognised in other comprehensive income and
AC
attributed to NCI must not be reclassified and recognised in profit or loss of the reporting entity.
 When a proportion of an investment in a foreign subsidiary is disposed of, a proportionate share of
the amounts previously recognised in other comprehensive income (the cumulative balance in the
separate equity reserve) should now be reclassified from equity to profit or loss.
When income previously recognised as other comprehensive income is reclassified as a gain or loss to
profit or loss as a re-classification adjustment, there must be an offsetting loss or gain in other
comprehensive income, to avoid double-counting of the gain (or loss).
In other comprehensive income, negative income of $2 million should be recognised, to avoid double
counting of the income previously recognised as other comprehensive income but now reclassified in
profit or loss.
Disclosure
 The amount of exchange differences recognised in profit or loss (excluding differences arising on
financial instruments measured at fair value through profit or loss in accordance with IAS 39).
190 | P a g e
 Net exchange differences recognised in other comprehensive income and accumulated in a separate
component of equity, and a reconciliation of the amount of such exchange differences at the
beginning and end of the period.
 When the presentation currency is different from the functional currency, disclose that fact together
with the functional currency and the reason for using a different presentation currency.
 A change in the functional currency of either the reporting entity or a significant foreign operation
and the reason therefore.
When an entity presents its financial statements in a currency that is different from its functional
currency, it may describe those financial statements as complying with IFRS only if they comply with all
the requirements of each applicable Standard (including IAS 21) and each applicable interpretation.
x
Bo
b al
lo
G
A
C
AC
191 | P a g e
IAS 7-STATEMENT OF CASH FLOWS
Group: Statement of Cash Flows
OBJECTIVE
The objective of this Standard is to require the provision of information about the historical changes in
cash and cash equivalents of an entity by means of a statement of cash flows which classifies cash flows
during the period from operating, investing and financing activities.
Benefits of Cash Flow Information

 Cash flow information is useful in assessing the ability of the entity to generate cash and cash
equivalents and enables users to develop models to assess and compare the present value of the future
cash flows of different entities
 It also enhances the comparability of the reporting of operating performance by different entities
 It is also useful in checking the accuracy of past assessments of future cash flows and in examining the
x
relationship between profitability and net cash flow and the impact of changing prices.
Bo
DEFINITIONS
Cash comprises cash on hand and demand deposits.

b al
lo
Cash equivalents are short-term, highly liquid investments that are readily convertible to known
amounts of cash and which are subject to an insignificant risk of changes in value.
G
Cash flows are inflows and outflows of cash and cash equivalents.
A
Operating activities are the principal revenue-producing activities of the entity and other activities
that are not investing or financing activities.
C
Investing activities are the acquisition and disposal of long-term assets and other investments not
AC
included in cash equivalents.
Financing activities are activities that result in changes in the size and composition of the contributed
equity and borrowings of the entity.
Cash and Cash Equivalents
Cash equivalents are held for the purpose of meeting short-term cash commitments rather than for
investment or other purposes. For an investment to qualify as a cash equivalent it must be readily
convertible to a known amount of cash and be subject to an insignificant risk of changes in value.
192 | P a g e
PRESENTATION OF A STATEMENT OF CASH FLOWS
The statement of cash flows shall report cash flows during the period classified by
 Operating,
 Investing and
 Financing activities.
Operating Activities
Cash flows from operating activities are primarily derived from the principal revenue-producing activities
of the entity. Examples of cash flows from operating activities are:
(a) Cash receipts from the sale of goods and the rendering of services;
(b) Cash receipts from royalties, fees, commissions and other revenue;
x
(c) Cash payments to suppliers for goods and services;
(d) Cash payments to and on behalf of employees;
Bo
(e) Cash receipts and cash payments of an insurance entity for premiums and claims, annuities and other
policy benefits;
(f) Cash payments or refunds of income taxes unless they can be specifically identified with financing and
investing activities; and
Investing Activities
b al
(g) Cash receipts and payments from contracts held for dealing or trading purposes.
lo
Examples of cash flows arising from investing activities are:

G
(a) Cash payments to acquire property, plant and equipment, intangibles and other long-term assets.
(b) cash receipts from sales of property, plant and equipment, intangibles and other long-term assets;
A
(c) Cash payments to acquire equity or debt instruments of other entities and interests in joint ventures.
C
(d) Cash receipts from sales of equity or debt instruments of other entities and interests in joint ventures.
AC
Financing Activities
Examples of cash flows arising from financing activities are:
(a) cash proceeds from issuing shares or other equity instruments;

(b) cash payments to owners to acquire or redeem the entity‘s shares;
(c) cash proceeds from issuing debentures, loans, notes, bonds, mortgages and other short-term or long-
term borrowings;
(d) cash repayments of amounts borrowed; and
(e) Cash payments by a lessee for the reduction of the outstanding liability relating to a finance lease.
193 | P a g e
REPORTING CASH FLOWS FROM OPERATING ACTIVITIES
An entity shall report cash flows from operating activities using either:
(a) the direct method, whereby major classes of gross cash receipts and gross cash payments are
disclosed; or
(b) the indirect method, whereby profit or loss is adjusted for the effects of transactions of a non-cash
nature, any deferrals or accruals of past or future operating cash receipts or payments, and items of
income or expense associated with investing or financing cash flows.
Under the indirect method, the net cash flow from operating activities is determined by adjusting profit or
loss for the effects of:
(a) changes during the period in inventories and operating receivables and payables;
(b) Non-cash items such as depreciation, provisions, deferred taxes, unrealized foreign currency gains
ox
and losses, and undistributed profits of associates; and
all other items for which the cash effects are investing or financing cash flows.
lB
A proforma of such a calculation is as follows and this method may be more common in the exam.
$
ba
Profit before taxation (statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income) X
Add depreciation X
Loss (profit) on sale of non-current assets X
lo
(Increase)/decrease in inventories (X)/X
(Increase)/decrease in receivables (X)/X
G
Increase/(decrease) in payables X/(X)

Cash generated from operations X
A
Interest (paid)/received (X)

Income taxes paid (X)
C
Net cash flows from operating activities X

AC
It is important to understand why certain items are added and others subtracted. Note the
following points.
(a) Depreciation is not a cash expense, but is deducted in arriving at the profit figure in the statement of
comprehensive income. It makes sense, therefore, to eliminate it by adding it back.
(b) By the same logic, a loss on a disposal of a non-current asset (arising through under provision of
depreciation) needs to be added back and a profit deducted.
(c) An increase in inventories means less cash – you have spent cash on buying inventory.
(d) An increase in receivables means the company's credit customers have not paid as much, and
therefore there is less cash.
(e) If we pay off payables, causing the figure to decrease, again we have less cash.
Indirect versus direct
The direct method is encouraged where the necessary information is not too costly to obtain, but IAS 7
does not require it, and favours the indirect method. In practice, therefore, the direct method is rarely
used. It is not obvious that IAS 7 is right in favouring the indirect method. It could be argued that
194 | P a g e
companies ought to monitor their cash flows carefully enough on an ongoing basis to be able to use the
direct method at minimal extra cost.
Reporting cash flows from investing and financing activities
An entity shall report separately major classes of gross cash receipts and gross cash payments arising from
investing and financing activities, except to the extent that cash flows described below are reported on a
net basis.
Cash flows arising from the following operating, investing or financing activities may be reported on a net
basis:
(a) cash receipts and payments on behalf of customers when the cash flows reflect the activities of the
customer rather than those of the entity; and
(b) Cash receipts and payments for items in which the turnover is quick, the amounts are large, and the
maturities are short.
x
Bo
Foreign currency cash flows
Cash flows arising from transactions in a foreign currency shall be recorded in an entity‘s functional
currency by applying to the foreign currency amount the exchange rate between the functional currency
al
and the foreign currency at the date of the cash flow. The cash flows of a foreign subsidiary shall be
translated at the exchange rates between the functional currency and the foreign currency at the dates of
the cash flows.
b
lo
Interest and dividends
G
Cash flows from interest and dividends received and paid shall each be disclosed separately. Each shall be
classified in a consistent manner from period to period as either operating, investing or financing
activities.
A
Interest paid and interest and dividends received may be classified as operating cash flows because they
C
enter into the determination of profit or loss. Alternatively, interest paid and interest and dividends
received may be classified as financing cash flows and investing cash flows respectively, because they are
AC
costs of obtaining financial resources or returns on investments.
Dividends paid may be classified as a financing cash flow because they are a cost of obtaining financial
resources. Alternatively, dividends paid may be classified as a component of cash flows from operating
activities in order to assist users to determine the ability of an entity to pay dividends out of operating
cash flows.
Taxes on income
Cash flows arising from taxes on income shall be separately disclosed and shall be classified as cash flows
from operating activities unless they can be specifically identified with financing and investing activities.
195 | P a g e
Other disclosures
All entities should disclose, together with a commentary by management, any other information
likely to be of importance.
(a) Restrictions on the use of or access to any part of cash equivalents.

(b) The amount of undrawn borrowing facilities which are available.
(c) Cash flows which increased operating capacity compared to cash flows which merely maintained
operating capacity.
CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF CASH FLOWS
The special features of a consolidated statement of cash flows
A consolidated statement of cash flows is prepared largely from the consolidated statement of financial
x
position, statement of comprehensive income (or income statement) and statement of changes in equity.
Bo
The rules for preparing a group statement of cash flows are similar to the rules for a statement of cash
flows for an individual entity.
However, there are additional items in a consolidated statement of cash flows that are not found in the
adjustments to profit before tax) relating to:

b al
statement of cash flows of an individual company. The most significant of these are cash flows (or
 Non-controlling interests
lo
 Associates

G
And acquiring or disposing of subsidiaries during the year.

A
C
AC
196 | P a g e
Illustrative format
It might be useful to look at the format of a consolidated statement of cash flows, to see where these items
appear. The indirect method is used here to present the cash flows from operating activities.
Entity XYZ
x
Bo
b al
lo
G
A
C
AC
197 | P a g e
Exchange rate differences
A gain or loss arising from exchange rate differences is not a cash flow item. When the indirect method is
used to present cash flows from operating activities, it is therefore necessary to make an adjustment to get
from 'profit' to 'cash flow'.
 A loss arising from exchange rate differences (shown in the example above as a 'foreign exchange
loss') must be added back.
 A gain arising from exchange rate differences must be subtracted.
Cash flows to the non-controlling interest
The non-controlling interest represents a third party so dividends paid to the non-controlling interest are
reflected as a cash outflow. This payment should be presented separately and classified as ‗Cash flows
from financing activities‘
x
Bo
b al
lo
G
The dividend paid of $120,000 will be disclosed as a cash flow from financing activities.
Associates and the group statement of cash flows

A
When a group has an interest in an associate entity, the consolidated statement of cash flows must show
C
the cash flows that occur between the associate and the group. The consolidated statement of cash flows
shows the effect on the group's cash position of transactions between the group and its associate.
AC
Share of profit (or loss) of an associate
In the consolidated statement of comprehensive income or the income statement, the group profit
includes the group's share of the profits of associates.
These profits are not a cash flow item. When the indirect method is used to present the cash flows from
operating activities, an adjustment is therefore needed to get from 'profit' to 'cash flow'.
 The group's share of the profit of an associate must be deducted from profit.
 The group's share of the loss of an associate must be added to profit.
198 | P a g e
Cash flows involving associates
The cash flows that might occur between a group and an associate, for inclusion in the consolidated
statement of cash flows are as follows:
 Investing activities
- Cash paid to acquire shares in an associate during the year
- Cash received from the disposal of shares in an associate during the year
- Dividends received from an associate during the year.
 Financing activities
- Cash paid as a new loan to or from an associate during the year
- Cash received as a repayment of a loan to or from an associate during the year.
Note that dividends received from an associate are shown as cash flows from investing activities; whereas
x
dividends paid to non-controlling interests in subsidiaries are (usually) shown as cash flows from
Bo
financing activities.
Dividends received from the associate must be disclosed as a separate cash flow classified as ‗Cash flows
from investing activities‘.
The cash receipt can be calculated as follows:

b al
lo
G
A
C
AC
Acquisitions and disposals of subsidiaries in the statement of cash flows
Acquisition of a subsidiary in the statement of cash flows
When a subsidiary is acquired:
 The group gains control of the assets and liabilities of the subsidiary, which might include some cash
and cash equivalents, and
 The group pays for its share of the subsidiary, and the purchase consideration might consist partly or
entirely of cash.
199 | P a g e
If the subsidiary is acquired or disposed of during the accounting period the net cash effect of the
purchase or sale transaction should be shown separately under ‗Cash flows from investing activities‘. The
net cash effect will be the cash purchase price/cash disposal proceeds net of any cash or cash equivalents
acquired or disposed of.
Inventory, trade receivables, trade payables
When a subsidiary has been acquired, the working capital brought into the group (receivables plus
inventory minus trade payables of the acquired subsidiary) is paid for in the purchase price to acquire the
subsidiary. As we have seen, this is treated as a separate item in the investing activities section of the
statement of cash flows.
To avoid double counting of the effects of the working capital in the subsidiary at the acquisition date, we
need to deduct from the value in the closing statement of financial position, or add to the value in the
opening statement of financial position:
 The receivables in the net assets of the subsidiary acquired, as at the acquisition date
x
 The inventory in the net assets of the subsidiary acquired, as at the acquisition date, and
Bo
 The trade payables in the net assets of the subsidiary acquired, as at the acquisition date
Purchases of Non-Current Assets

b al
When non-current assets are at carrying amount (net book value)
When non-current assets are shown at their carrying amount (net book value) and a subsidiary has been
lo
acquired during the year, purchases of non-current assets (assumed to be cash payments) are calculated
as follows. (Figures have been included in the table for illustrative purposes.)
G
A
C
AC
200 | P a g e
When non-current assets are at cost
When non-current assets are shown at cost and a subsidiary has been acquired during the year, purchases
of non-current assets (assumed to be cash payments) are calculated as follows. (Again, figures have been
included in the table for illustrative purposes.)
x
Bo
Disposal of a Subsidiary in the Statement of Cash Flows
The procedures for reporting the cash effect of disposals of subsidiaries in a group statement of cash flows
are similar to those used for acquisitions, except that the process applies in reverse.
b al
In the group statement of cash flows, the cash received from the disposal is the cash actually received
from the disposal, minus any cash in the subsidiary at the disposal date.
lo
A note to the statement of cash flows should show the details of the disposal, including the cash received
from the sale minus the cash in the subsidiary at the disposal date.
G
Note:
A
You should remember the assets and liabilities disposed of, and the non-controlling interest that leaves
C
the group on the disposal, to avoid double counting the other cash flow items in the statement of cash
flows.
AC
201 | P a g e
IAS 24 – RELATED PARTY TRANSACTIONS
OBJECTIVE
The objective of this Standard is to ensure that an entity‘s financial statements contain the disclosures
necessary to draw attention to the possibility that its financial position and profit or loss may have been
affected by the existence of related parties and by transactions and outstanding balances, including
commitments, with such parties.
SCOPE
This Standard shall be applied in:
(a) Identifying related party relationships and transactions;

(b) Identifying outstanding balances, including commitments, between an entity and its related parties;
x
(c) Identifying the circumstances in which disclosure of the items in (a) and (b) is required; and
Bo
(d) Determining the disclosures to be made about those items.
DEFINITIONS
b al
A related party is a person or entity that is related to the entity that is preparing its financial statements
(in this Standard referred to as the ‗reporting entity‘).
lo
(a) A person or a close member of that person‘s family is related to a reporting entity if that person:
G
(i) has control or joint control over the reporting entity;

(ii) has significant influence over the reporting entity; or
A
(iii) is a member of the key management personnel of the reporting entity or of a parent of the
reporting entity.
C
(b) An entity is related to a reporting entity if any of the following conditions applies:
AC
(i) The entity and the reporting entity are members of the same group (which means that each
parent, subsidiary and fellow subsidiary is related to the others).
(ii) One entity is an associate or joint venture of the other entity (or an associate or joint venture
of a member of a group of which the other entity is a member).
(iii) Both entities are joint ventures of the same third party.
(iv) One entity is a joint venture of a third entity and the other entity is an associate of the third
entity.
(v) The entity is a post-employment benefit plan for the benefit of employees of either the
reporting entity or an entity related to the reporting entity. If the reporting entity is itself such
a plan, the sponsoring employers are also related to the reporting entity.
(vi) The entity is controlled or jointly controlled by a person identified in (a).
(vii) A person identified in (a)(i) has significant influence over the entity or is a member of the key
management personnel of the entity (or of a parent of the entity).
202 | P a g e
A related party transaction is a transfer of resources, services or obligations between a reporting

entity and a related party, regardless of whether a price is charged.
Close members of the family of a person are those family members who may be expected to
influence, or be influenced by, that person in their dealings with the entity and include:
(a) That person‘s children and spouse or domestic partner;

(b) Children of that person‘s spouse or domestic partner; and
(c) Dependants of that person or that person‘s spouse or domestic partner.
Compensation includes all employee benefits (as defined in IAS 19 Employee Benefits) including
employee benefits to which IFRS 2 Share-based Payment applies.
Employee benefits are all forms of consideration paid, payable or provided by the entity, or on behalf of
the entity, in exchange for services rendered to the entity.
It also includes such consideration paid on behalf of a parent of the entity in respect of the entity.
x
Compensation includes:
Bo
(a) Short-term employee benefits, such as wages, salaries and social security contributions, paid annual
leave and paid sick leave, profit-sharing and bonuses (if payable within twelve months of the end of
the period) and non-monetary benefits (such as medical care, housing, cars and free or subsidised
goods or services) for current employees;
al
(b) Post-employment benefits such as pensions, other retirement benefits, post-employment life
insurance and post-employment medical care;
b
(c) Other long-term employee benefits, including long-service leave or sabbatical leave, jubilee or other
lo
long-service benefits, long-term disability benefits and, if they are not payable wholly within twelve
months after the end of the period, profit-sharing, bonuses and deferred compensation;
G
(d) Termination benefits; and

(e) Share-based payment.
A
Control is the power to govern the financial and operating policies of an entity so as to obtain benefits
C
from its activities.

AC
Joint control is the contractually agreed sharing of control over an economic activity.
Key management personnel are those persons having authority and responsibility for planning,
directing and controlling the activities of the entity, directly or indirectly, including any director (whether
executive or otherwise) of that entity.
Significant influence is the power to participate in the financial and operating policy decisions of an
entity, but is not control over those policies. Significant influence may be gained by share ownership,
statute or agreement.
Government refers to government, government agencies and similar bodies whether local, national or
international.
A government-related entity is an entity that is controlled, jointly controlled or significantly

influenced by a government.
203 | P a g e
DISCLOSURE
Relationships between parents and subsidiaries. Regardless of whether there have been
transactions between a parent and a subsidiary, an entity must disclose the name of its parent and, if
different, the ultimate controlling party.
Management compensation. Disclose key management personnel compensation in total and for each
of the following categories:
 Short-term employee benefits

 Post-employment benefits
 Other long-term benefits
 Termination benefits
 Share-based payment benefits
ox
Key management personnel are those persons having authority and responsibility for planning, directing,
and controlling the activities of the entity, directly or indirectly, including any directors (whether
executive or otherwise) of the entity.
lB
Related party transactions. If there have been transactions between related parties, disclose the
nature of the related party relationship as well as information about the transactions and outstanding
ba
balances necessary for an understanding of the potential effect of the relationship on the financial
statements. These disclosures would be made separately for each category of related parties and would
include:
lo
 The amount of the transactions
G
 The amount of outstanding balances, including terms and conditions and guarantees
 Provisions for doubtful debts related to the amount of outstanding balances
 Expense recognised during the period in respect of bad or doubtful debts due from
A
related parties
C
The disclosures shall be made separately for each of the following categories:
AC
(a) The parent;

(b) Entities with joint control or significant influence over the entity;
(c) Subsidiaries;
(d) Associates;
(e) Joint ventures in which the entity is a venturer;
(f) Key management personnel of the entity or its parent; and
(g) Other related parties.
Items of a similar nature may be disclosed in aggregate except when separate disclosure is necessary for
an understanding of the effects of related party transactions on the financial statements of the entity
A reporting entity is exempt from the disclosure requirements in relation to related party transactions and
outstanding balances, including commitments, with:
(a) a government that has control, joint control or significant influence over the reporting entity; and
204 | P a g e
(b) Another entity that is a related party because the same government has control, joint control or
significant influence over both the reporting entity and the other entity.
If a reporting entity applies the exemption, it shall disclose the following about the transactions and
related outstanding balances:
(a) the name of the government and the nature of its relationship with the reporting entity (i.e. control,
joint control or significant influence);
(b) the following information in sufficient detail to enable users of the entity‘s financial statements to
understand the effect of related party transactions on its financial statements:
(i) The nature and amount of each individually significant transaction; and
(ii) For other transactions that are collectively, but not individually, significant, a qualitative or
quantitative indication of their extent.
x
NOTE: This topic is very important for Ethics based questions.
Bo
b al
lo
G
A
C
AC
205 | P a g e
IAS 34-INTERIM FINANCIAL REPORTING
OBJECTIVE
The objective of this Standard is to prescribe the minimum content of an interim financial report and to
prescribe the principles for recognition and measurement in complete or condensed financial statements
for an interim period.
SCOPE
This Standard does not mandate which entities should be required to publish interim financial reports,
how frequently, or how soon after the end of an interim period.
Publicly traded entities are encouraged:
(a) To provide interim financial reports at least as of the end of the first half of their financial year; and
x
(b) To make their interim financial reports available not later than 60 days after the end of the interim
Bo
period.
DEFINITIONS
Interim period is a financial reporting period shorter than a full financial year.
b al
Interim financial report means a financial report containing either a complete set of financial
statements (as described in IAS 1 Presentation of Financial Statements (as revised in 2007)) or a set of
lo
condensed financial statements (as described in this Standard) for an interim period.
G
Minimum components of an interim financial report

An interim financial report shall include, at a minimum, the following components:
(a) a condensed statement of financial position;
A
(b) a condensed statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income, presented as either;
(c) a condensed statement of changes in equity;
C
(d) a condensed statement of cash flows; and

AC
(e) Selected explanatory notes.
FORM AND CONTENT OF INTERIM FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
The condensed statement of financial position should include, as a minimum, each of the major
components of assets, liabilities and equity as were in the statement of financial position at the end of the
previous financial year, thus providing a summary of the economic resources of the entity and its financial
structure.
The condensed statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income should include, as
a minimum, each of the component items of income and expense as are shown in profit or loss for the
previous financial year, together with the earnings per share and diluted earnings per share.
The condensed statement of cash flows should show, as a minimum, the three major sub-totals of
cash flow as required in statements of cash flows by IAS 7, namely: cash flows from operating activities,
cash flows from investing activities and cash flow from financing activities.
206 | P a g e
The condensed statement of changes in equity should include, as a minimum, each of the major
components of equity as were contained in the statement of changes in equity for the previous financial
year of the entity.
Significant events and transactions
An entity shall include in its interim financial report an explanation of events and transactions that are
significant to an understanding of the changes in financial position and performance of the entity since
the end of the last annual reporting period. Information disclosed in relation to those events and
transactions shall update the relevant information presented in the most recent annual financial report.
The following is a list of events and transactions for which disclosures would be required if they are
significant: the list is not exhaustive.
 Accounting policy changes

 Seasonality or cyclicality of operations
x
 Unusual and significant items
 Changes in estimates
Bo
 Issuances, repurchases, and repayments of debt and equity securities
 Dividends paid
 A few items of segment information (for those entities required by IFRS 8 to report segment


information annually)
al
Significant events after the end of the interim period
Business combinations
b

lo
Long-term investments
 Restructurings and reversals of restructuring provisions

G
Discontinued operations
 Changes in contingent liabilities and contingent assets
 Corrections of prior period errors
A
 Write-down of inventory to net realisable value

 Impairment loss on property, plant, and equipment; intangibles; or other assets, and reversal of such
C
impairment loss

AC
Litigation settlements
 Any debt default or any breach of a debt covenant that has not been corrected subsequently
 Related party transactions
 Acquisitions and disposals of property, plant, and equipment
 Commitments to purchase property, plant, and equipment
Periods for which interim financial statements are required to be presented
Interim reports shall include interim financial statements (condensed or complete) for periods as follows:
(a) Statement of financial position as of the end of the current interim period and a comparative
statement of financial position as of the end of the immediately preceding financial year.
(b) Statement of profit or loss and comprehensive income for the current interim period and
cumulatively for the current financial year to date, with comparative statements of comprehensive
income for the comparable interim periods (current and year-to-date) of the immediately preceding
financial year.
207 | P a g e
(c) Statement of changes in equity cumulatively for the current financial year to date, with a
comparative statement for the comparable year-to-date period of the immediately preceding financial
year.
(d) Statement of cash flows cumulatively for the current financial year to date, with a comparative
statement for the comparable year-to-date period of the immediately preceding financial year.
If the company's business is highly seasonal, IAS 34 encourages disclosure of financial information for
the latest 12 months, and comparative information for the prior 12-month period, in addition to the
interim period financial statements.
Materiality
In deciding how to recognise, measure, classify, or disclose an item for interim financial reporting
purposes, materiality shall be assessed in relation to the interim period financial data.
In making assessments of materiality, it shall be recognised that interim measurements may rely on
estimates to a greater extent than measurements of annual financial data.
x
Bo
RECOGNITION AND MEASUREMENT
Accounting Policies
al
The same accounting policies should be applied for interim reporting as are applied in the entity's annual
financial statements, except for accounting policy changes made after the date of the most recent annual
b
financial statements that are to be reflected in the next annual financial statements.
lo
Measurement
G
Measurements for interim reporting purposes should be made on a year-to-date basis, so that the
frequency of the entity's reporting does not affect the measurement of its annual results.
A
 Revenues received seasonally, cyclically, or occasionally within a financial year shall not be
C
anticipated or deferred as of an interim date if anticipation or deferral would not be appropriate

at the end of the entity‘s financial year.
AC
Some entities consistently earn more revenues in certain interim periods of a financial year than
in other interim periods, for example, seasonal revenues of retailers. Such revenues are
recognised when they occur.
 Costs incurred unevenly during the financial year shall be anticipated or deferred for interim
reporting purposes if, and only if, it is also appropriate to anticipate or defer that type of cost at the
end of the financial year.
 Employer payroll taxes and insurance contributions on an annual basis
 Major planned periodic maintenance or overhaul expected to occur late in the year is not anticipated
 Year-end bonuses are anticipated for interim reporting purposes if, and only if:
o The bonus is a legal obligation, or past practice would make the bonus a constructive
obligation and the
o Entity has no realistic alternative but to make the payments; and
o A reliable estimate of the obligation can be made.
208 | P a g e
 Holiday pay: If an enforceable obligation on the employer, then any unpaid accumulated holiday pay
may be accrued in the interim financial report.
 Intangible assets: Entities are required to apply the definition and recognition criteria for an
intangible asset in the same way in an interim period as in an annual period.
 Other planned but irregularly occurring costs are generally are discretionary, even though they are
planned and tend to recur from year to year.
 Depreciation and amortization are based only on assets owned during that interim period. They
should not take into account asset acquisitions or disposals planned for later in the financial year.
 Use of estimates: All material relevant financial information being appropriately disclosed.
DISCLOSURE IN ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
If an estimate of an amount reported in an interim period is changed significantly during the financial
interim period in the financial year but a separate financial report is not published for that period, the
nature and amount of that change must be disclosed in the notes to the annual financial statements.
x
Bo
b al
lo
G
A
C
AC
209 | P a g e
INTERPRETATION OF FINANCIAL STATEMENTS AND RATIO
ANALYSIS
Ratio analysis is a technique whereby complicated information is summarised to a common denominator

so that a meaningful comparison of the company's performance and financial position can be made.
Financial statements provide important financial information for people who do not have access to the
internal accounts. For example, current and potential shareholders can see how much profit a company
has made, the value of its assets, and the level of its cash reserves. Although these figures are useful they
do not mean a great deal by themselves. If the user is to make any real sense of the figures in the financial
statements, they need to be properly analysed using accounting ratios and then compared with either the
previous year‘s ratios, or measured against averages for the industry.
x
Bo
b al
lo
G
A
C
AC
The scenario of a performance appraisal question can take many forms.
210 | P a g e
Vertical or trend analysis
A company's performance may be compared to its previous period's performance. Past results may be
adjusted for the effects of price changes. This is referred to as trend or vertical analysis. A weakness of this
type of comparison is that there are no independent benchmarks to determine whether the chosen
company's current year results are good or bad. Just because a company's results are better than its
results in the previous financial period - it does not mean the results are good. It may be that its results in
the prior year were particularly poor.
Horizontal analysis
To try to overcome the problem of vertical analysis, it is common to compare a company's performance
for a particular period with the performance of an equivalent company for the same period. This
introduces an independent yardstick to the comparison. However, it is important to pick a similar sized
company that operates in the same industry. Again, this type of analysis is not without criticism - it may
be that the company selected as a comparator may have performed particularly well or particularly poorly.
x
Industry average comparison
Bo
This type of analysis compares a company's results (ratios) to a compilation of the average of many other
similar types of company. Such schemes are often operated on a subscription basis whereby subscribing
companies calculate specified ratios and submit them to the scheme. In return they receive the average of
the same ratios from all equivalent companies in the scheme. This has the advantage of anonymity and
avoids the bias of selecting a single company.
b al
The context of the analysis needs to be kept in mind. A student may be asked to compare two companies
as a basis for selecting one (presumably the better performing one) for an acquisition. Alternatively, a
lo
shareholder may be asking for advice on how their investment in a company has performed. A bank may
be considering offering a loan to a company and requires advice. It may be that the chief executive asks for
G
the chief accountant‘s opinion on your company's results
WHAT IS THE OBJECTIVE OF FINANCIAL STATEMENTS?

A
C
To provide information about the financial position, performance and financial adaptability of an
enterprise that is useful to a wide range of users for assessing the stewardship of management and for
AC
making economic decisions
211 | P a g e
x
Bo
Who are these users and what information do they want?
b al
lo
Note that most users will be interested in what has happened in the past, and what may happen in the
G
future!
OVERVIEW
A
C
AC
212 | P a g e
Calculating a ratio is easy, and usually is little more than dividing one number by another. Indeed, the
calculations are so basic that they can be programmed into a spreadsheet. The real skill comes in
interpreting the results and using that information. Saying
That a ratio has increased because the top line in the calculation has increased (or the bottom line
decreased) is rather pointless: this is simply translating the calculation into words. Use the mnemonic
RATIO to remind yourself to keep asking the following questions:
¤ Reason – why has this change occurred?

¤ Accident – is the change real or simply an accident of timing?
¤ Test – what can be done to test our conclusions? What other work should we do?
¤ Implications – what does this change mean? Liquidity crisis? Poor management etc?
¤ Other information – is this consistent with other information?
EXAM TECHNIQUE:
• RATIO ANALYSIS-----------use appendices to show calculations / always show formula used
x
COMMENTS (cause) & CONSEQUENCES (effect)
3 steps
Bo
- The gearing ratio has moved from......}
- The gearing ratio measures.................} What is the overall picture?
- The move may be due to................}

b al
lo
G
A
C
AC
INTERPRETATION OF RATIOS
Ratios can generally be broken down into several key areas: profitability, liquidity, gearing and
investment.
PROFITABILITY
Profitability ratios, as their name suggests, measure the organisation‘s ability to deliver profits. Profit is
necessary to give investors the return they require, and to provide funds for reinvestment in the business.
Three ratios are commonly used.
213 | P a g e
Return on capital employed (ROCE)
Profit before interest and tax

Shareholders' equity + debt
This ratio is generally considered to be the primary profitability ratio as it shows how well a business has
generated profit from its long term financing. An increase in ROCE is generally considered to be an
improvement.
So, Return on capital employed (sometimes known as return on investment or ROI) measures the return
that is being earned on the capital invested in the business. It measures how efficiently and effectively
management has deployed the resources available to it, irrespective of how those resources have been
financed.
Candidates are sometimes confused about which profit and capital figures to use. What is important is to
compare like with like. Operating profit (profit before interest) represents the profit available to pay
interest to debt investors and dividends to shareholders. It is therefore compared with the long-term debt
x
and equity capital invested in the business (non current liabilities + total equity). By similar logic, if we
wished to calculate return on ordinary shareholders funds (the return to equity holders), we would use
Bo
profit after interest and tax divided by total equity).
A return on capital is necessary to reward investors for the risks they are taking by investing in the
company. As mentioned earlier, generally, the higher the ROCE figure, the better it is for investors. It
b al
should be compared with returns on offer to investors on alternative investments of a similar risk.
Movements in return on capital employed are best interpreted by examining profit margins and asset
turnover in more detail (often referred to as the secondary ratios) as ROCE is made up of these
lo
component parts. For example, an improvement in ROCE could be due to an improvement in margins or
more efficient use of assets.
G
Asset turnover
A
Revenue
Total assets - current liabilities
C
AC
Asset turnover shows how efficiently management have utilised assets to generate revenue. When looking
at the components of the ratio a change will be linked to either a movement in revenue, a movement in net
assets, or both.
There are many factors that could both improve and deteriorate asset turnover. For example, a significant
increase in sales revenue would contribute to an increase in asset turnover or, if the business enters into a
sale and lease back agreement, then the asset base would become smaller, thus improving the result.
In other words, this ratio measures the ability of the organisation to generate sales from its capital
employed. A possible variant is non-current asset turnover (revenue ÷ non-current assets). Generally the
higher the better, but in later studies you will consider the problems caused by overtrading (operating a
business at a level not sustainable by its capital employed). Commonly a high asset turnover is
accompanied with a low return on sales and vice versa. Retailers generally have high asset turnovers
accompanied by low margins: Jack Cohen, the founder of Tesco, famously used the motto ‘Pile it high and
sell it cheap‘!
214 | P a g e
Profit margins
Gross profit
Revenue
The gross profit margin looks at the performance of the business at the direct trading level. Typically
variations in this ratio are as a result of changes in the selling price/sales volume or changes in cost of
sales. For example, cost of sales may include inventory write downs that may have occurred during the
period due to damage or obsolescence, exchange rate fluctuations or import duties.
Gross margin on the other hand focuses on the organisation‘s trading activities. Once again, in simple
terms, the higher the better, with poor performance often being explained by prices being too low or costs
being too high.
Changes in the gross profit percentage ratio can be caused by a number of factors. For example, a
decrease may indicate greater competition in the market and therefore lower selling prices and a lower
gross profit or, alternatively, an increase in the cost of purchases. An increase in the gross profit
x
percentage may indicate that the company is in a position to exploit the market and charge higher prices
for its products or that it is able to source its purchases at a lower cost.
Bo
Operating profit
Revenue
al
The operating profit margin (or net profit margin) is generally calculated by comparing the profit before
interest and tax of a business to revenue, but, beware in the exam as sometimes the examiner specifically
b
requests the calculation to include profit before tax.
lo
Analysing the operating profit margin enables you to determine how well the business has managed to
control its indirect costs during the period. In the exam when interpreting operating profit margin it is
G
advisable to link the result back to the gross profit margin. For example, if gross profit margin
deteriorated in the year then it would be expected that operating margin would also fall.
A
However, if this is not the case, or the fall is not so severe, it may be due to good indirect cost control or
perhaps there could be a one-off profit on disposal distorting the operating profit figure.
C
AC
The relationship between the gross and the net profit percentage gives an indication of how well a
company is managing its business expenses. If the net profit percentage has decreased over time while the
gross profit percentage has remained the same, this might indicate a lack of internal control over
expenses.
LIQUIDITY
This measures the ability of the organisation to meet its short-term financial obligations. Liquidity refers
to the amount of cash a company can generate quickly to settle its debts. A reasonable level of liquidity is
essential to the survival of a company, as poor cash control is one of the main reasons for business failure.
The two commonly used ratios are Current ratio and Quick ratio.
215 | P a g e
Current ratio
Current assets
Current liabilities
The current ratio compares liabilities that fall due within the year with cash balances, and assets that
should turn into cash within the year. It assesses the company‘s ability to meet its short-term liabilities.
The current ratio considers how well a business can cover the current liabilities with its current assets.
Therefore, this ratio compares a company‘s liquid assets (ie cash and those assets held which will soon be
turned into cash) with short-term liabilities (payables/creditors due within one year). The higher the ratio
the more liquid the company. As liquidity is vital, a higher current ratio is normally preferred to a lower
one.
Traditionally textbooks tell us that this ratio should exceed 2.0:1 for a company to be able to safely meet
its current liabilities should they fall due. However this ideal will vary from industry to industry. For
ox
example, a business in the service industry would have little or no inventory and therefore could have a
current ratio of less than 1. This does not necessarily mean that it has liquidity problems so it is better to
compare the result to previous years or industry averages. Many companies operate safely at below the 2:1
lB
level.
A current ratio of less than one is often considered alarming as there might be going concern worries, but
ba
you have to look at the type of business before drawing conclusions. In a supermarket business, inventory
will probably turn into cash in a stable and predictable manner, so there will always be a supply of cash
available to pay the liabilities.
lo
A very high current ratio is not necessarily good. It could indicate that a company is too liquid. Cash is
often described as an ‘idle asset‗ because it earns no return, and carrying too much cash is considered
G
wasteful. A high ratio could also indicate that the company is not making sufficient use of cheap short-
term finance and it ratio may suggest that funds are being tied up in cash or other liquid assets, and may
not be earning the highest returns possible.
A
Quick ratio (sometimes referred to as acid test ratio)

C
AC
Current assets - inventory

Current liabilities
A stricter test of liquidity is the acid test ratio (also known as the quick ratio) which excludes
inventory/stock as a current asset. This approach can be justified because for many companies
inventory/stock cannot be readily converted into cash. In a period of severe cash shortage, a company
may be forced to sell its inventory/stock at a discount to ensure sales.
The quick ratio excludes inventory as it takes longer to turn into cash and therefore places emphasis on
the business's 'quick assets' and whether or not these are sufficient to cover the current liabilities. Here
the ideal ratio is thought to be 1:1 but as with the current ratio, this will vary depending on the industry in
which the business operates.
When assessing both the current and the quick ratios, look at the information provided within the
question to consider whether or not the company is overdrawn at the year-end. The overdraft is an
additional factor indicating potential liquidity problems and this form of finance is both expensive (higher
rates of interest) and risky (repayable on demand).
216 | P a g e
In practice a company‘s current ratio and acid test should be considered alongside the company‘s
operating cashflow. A healthy cashflow will often compensate for weak liquidity ratios.
Caution should always be exercised when trying to draw definite conclusions on the liquidity of a
company, as both the current ratio and the acid test ratio use figures from the Statement of financial
position. The Statement of financial position is only a ‗snapshot‘ of the financial position at the end of a
specific period. It is possible that the Statement of financial position figures are not representative of the
liquidity position during the year. This may be due to exceptional factors, or simply because the business
is seasonal in nature and the Statement of financial position figures represent the cash position at just one
particular point in the cycle.
Receivables collection period (in days)
Receivables x 365
Credit sales
The receivables/debtors collection period (in days or months) provides an indication of how
x
successful (or efficient) the debt collection process has been. For liquidity purposes the faster money is
collected the better. Therefore, it is preferable to have a short credit period for receivables as this will aid a
Bo
business's cash flow. However, some businesses base their strategy on long credit periods. When too high,
it may be that some irrecoverable (bad) debts have not been provided for, or an indication of worsening
credit control. It may also be deliberate, e.g. the company has decided to offer three-months' credit in the
current year, instead of two as in previous years. It may do this to try to stimulate higher sales and be
b al
more competitive than similar entities offering shorter credit periods.
If the receivables days are shorter compared to the prior period it could indicate better credit control or
potential settlement discounts being offered to collect cash more quickly whereas an increase in credit
lo
periods could indicate a deterioration in credit control or potential bad debts. However, too much
pressure on customers to pay quickly may damage a company‘s ability to generate sales.
G
Payables collection period (in days)

A
Payables x 365
Credit purchases*
C
*(or use cost of sales if purchases figure is not available)

AC
Payable days measures the average amount of time taken to pay suppliers. Because the purchases figure is
often not available to analysts external to the business, the cost of sales figure is often used to
approximate purchases.
An increase in payables days could indicate that a business is having cash flow difficulties and is therefore
delaying payments using suppliers as a free source of finance. If the payables‘ period is too long, it may be
an indication of poor liquidity (perhaps at the overdraft limit), and there may be a danger of further or
renewed credit being refused by suppliers. It is important that a business pays within the agreed credit
period to avoid conflict with suppliers. If the payables days are reducing this indicates suppliers are being
paid more quickly. This could be due to credit terms being tightened or taking advantage of early
settlement discounts being offered.
217 | P a g e
Inventory days
Closing (or average) inventory x 365

Cost of sales
It measures how long a company carries inventory before it is sold. Therefore, the inventory/stock
turnover period indicates the average number of days that inventory/stock is held for. A company
needs to carefully plan and manage its inventory/stock levels. Ideally, it must avoid tying up too much
capital in inventory/stock, yet the inventory/stock levels must always be sufficient to meet customer
demand.
Generally the lower the number of days that inventory is held the better as holding inventory for long
periods of time constrains cash flow and increases the risk associated with holding the inventory. The
longer inventory is held the greater the risk that it could be subject to theft, damage or obsolescence.
However, a business should always ensure that there is sufficient inventory to meet the demand of its
customers. Too little inventory can result in production stoppages and dissatisfied customers.
ox
If the holding period is long, it may be an indication of obsolete stock or poor sales achievement. Sales
may have fallen (perhaps due to an economic recession), but the company has been slow to cut back on
production, or an unnecessary build up of inventory levels.
lB
A change in the inventory/stock turnover period can be a useful indicator of how well a company is doing.
Inventory turnover can also be calculated using the following formula. It shows the above inventory days
in terms of inventory turnover times.
ba
Inventory turnover:
lo
Cost of sales____________
G
(Average or closing) inventory

A
Liquidity problems may also be caused by 'overtrading'. In some ways this is a symptom of the success of
the business. It is usually a lack of adequate financing and may be solved by an injection of capital.
C
GEARING/ CAPITAL GEARING

AC
Company directors often spend a great deal of time and money to make this ratio appear in line with
acceptable levels.
Current and potential investors will be interested in a company‘s financing arrangements. The extent to
which a company is financed by outside parties is referred to as gearing. The level of gearing in a company
is an important factor in assessing risk. A company that has borrowed money obviously has a
commitment to pay future interest charges and make capital repayments. This can be a financial burden
and possibly increase the risk of insolvency. Most companies will be geared to some extent.
The gearing ratio measures the company‘s commitments to its long-term lenders against the long-term
capital in the company. The level of gearing will be influenced by a number of factors, for example the
attitude of the owners and managers to risk, the availability of equity funds, and the type of industry in
which the company operates.
Its main importance is that as borrowings rise, risk increases (in many ways) and as such, further
borrowing is difficult and expensive. Many companies have limits to the amount of borrowings they are
218 | P a g e
permitted to have. These may be in the form of debt covenants imposed by lenders or they may be
contained in a company's Articles, such as a multiple of shareholders funds.
Measures of gearing
Gearing is basically a comparison of debt to equity. Preference shares are usually treated as debt for this
purpose. There are two alternatives:
Debt or Debt
Equity Debt + equity
Also known as leverage. Capital gearing looks at the proportions of owner‘s capital and borrowed capital
used to finance the business. Many different definitions exist; the two most commonly used ones are given
above. When necessary in the exam, you will be told which definition to use.
A large proportion of borrowed capital is risky as interest and capital repayments are legal obligations and
must be met if the company is to avoid insolvency. The payment of an annual equity dividend on the other
x
hand is not a legal obligation. Despite its risks, borrowed capital is attractive to companies as lenders
Bo
accept a lower rate of return than equity investors due to their secured positions. Also interest payments,
unlike equity dividends, are corporation tax deductible.
Levels of capital gearing vary enormously between industries. Companies requiring high investment in
tangible assets are commonly highly geared. Consequently, it is difficult to generalise about when capital
of debt exceeds the proportion of equity.

b al
gearing is too high. However, most accountants would agree that gearing is too high when the proportion
lo
The gearing ratio is of particular importance to a business as it indicates how risky a business is perceived
to be based on its level of borrowing. As borrowing increases so does the risk as the business is now liable
to not only repay the debt but meet any interest commitments under it. In addition, to raise further debt
G
finance could potentially be more difficult and more expensive.
If a company has a high level of gearing it does not necessarily mean that it will face difficulties as a result
A
of this. For example, if the business has a high level of security in the form of tangible non-current assets
and can comfortably cover its interest payments () a high level of gearing should not give an investor
C
cause for concern.

AC
Interest cover
Interest cover = Profit before interest and tax
Interest
This is sometimes known as income gearing. It looks at how many times a company‘s operating profits
exceed its interest payable. The higher the figure, the more likely a company is to be able to meet its
interest payments. Anything in excess of four is usually considered to be safe.
As mentioned above, the interest cover ratio measures the amount of profit available to cover the
interest payable by the company. The lower the level of interest cover the greater the risk to lenders that
interest payments will not be met. If interest payments and capital repayments are not paid when they fall
due there can be serious consequences for a company. In the event of a default, a lender may have the
right to seize the assets on which the loan is secured and sell them to repay the amount outstanding.
Where lenders do not have security on their loan, they could still apply to the courts for the winding up of
a company so that assets can be liquidated and debts repaid.
219 | P a g e
INVESTMENT RATIOS
Earnings per share
Profit after tax and preference dividends
Number of equity shares in issue
The earnings per share ratio of a company represents the relationship between the earnings made
during an accounting period (and available to shareholders) and the number of shares issued. For
ordinary shareholders, the amount available will be represented by the net profit after tax (less any
preference dividend where applicable).
Many investment analysts regard the earnings per share ratio as a fundamental measure of a company‘s
performance. The trend in earnings per share over time is used to help assess the investment potential of
a company‘s shares. However, an attempt should be made to take into account the effect of a company
increasing its retained earnings. Most companies retain a significant proportion of the funds they
ox
generate, and hence their earnings per share will increase even if there is no increase in profitability.
In isolation, this ratio is meaningless for inter-company comparisons. Its major usefulness is as part of the
lB
P/E ratio, and as a measure of profit trends.
Price/earnings ratio ba
Market price of equity share
lo
EPS
G
This is calculated by dividing a company's market price by its EPS. Say the price of a company's shares is
$2.40, and its last reported EPS was 20c. It would have a P/E ratio of 12. The mechanics of the movement
of a company's P/E ratio are complex, but if this company's EPS improved to 24c in the following year, it
A
would not mean that its P/E ratio would be calculated as 10 ($2.40/24c). It is more likely that its share
price would increase such that it maintained or even improved its P/E ratio. If the share price increased to
C
say $2.88, the P/E ratio would remain at 12 ($2.88/24c). This demonstrates the real importance of EPS in
the way it has a major influence on a company's share price.
AC
The price earnings ratio compares the benefits derived from owning a share with the cost of purchasing
such a share. It provides a clear indication of the value placed by the capital market on those earnings and
what it is prepared to pay for participation. It reflects the capital market assessment of both the amount
and the risk of these earnings, albeit subject to overall market and economic considerations.
Earning yield
________EPS____________
Market price per equity share
This is a relatively 'old' ratio which has been superseded by the P/E ratio. It is in fact its reciprocal.
Earnings yield is the EPS/share price x 100. In the above example, a P/E ratio of 12 would be equivalent
to an earnings yield of 8.3%.
220 | P a g e
Dividend yield
Ordinary dividends appropriated in period
Market price of equity shares
This is similar to the above except that the dividend per share is substituted for the EPS. It is a crude
measure of the return to shareholders, but it does ignore capital growth which is often much higher than
the return for dividends.
The dividend yield compares the amount of dividend per share with the market price of a share, and
provides a direct measure of the return on investment in the shares of a company. Investors are able to
use this ratio to assess the relative merits of different investment opportunities.
Dividend cover
Profit after tax and preference dividends
x
Bo
Ordinary dividends appropriated in period
This is the number of times the current year's dividend could have paid out of the current year's profit
available to ordinary shareholders. It is a measure of security. A high figure indicates high levels of
al
security. In other words, profits in future years could fall substantially and the company would still be
able to pay the current level of dividends. An alternative view of a high dividend cover is that it indicates
that the company operates a low dividend distribution policy.
b
lo
The dividend cover ratio focuses on the security of the current rates of dividends, and therefore
provides a measure of the likelihood that those dividends will be maintained in the future. It does this by
G
measuring the proportion represented by current rates of dividends of the profits from which such
dividends can be declared without drawing on retained earnings. The higher the ratio, the more profits
can decline without dividends being affected.
A
LIMITATIONS OF RATIO ANALYSIS

C
1. It is an oversimplification of a harsh business world

2. Ratios are based on highly subjective accounting figures
AC
3. Historical cost accounts do not take into account the impact of inflation
4. Ratios do not make allowances for external factors: economic or political
5. Users are more interested in future prospects rather than past events
Specific problems IN FR Exam
When marking this style of question there are some common weaknesses that are identified by examiner,
some of which are highlighted below:
 Limited knowledge of ratio calculations

 Appraisal not linked to scenario
 Poor understanding of the topic
 Limited understanding of what accounting information represents
 Lack of commercial awareness
 Discursive elements often not attempted
 Inability to come to a conclusion
 Poor English.
221 | P a g e
The majority of questions that feature performance appraisal have an accompanying scenario to the
question requirement. A weak answer will make no attempt to refer to this information in the appraisal
and, therefore, will often score few marks. It is important that you carefully consider this information and
incorporate it into your appraisal because it has been provided for a reason. Do not simply list all the
possibilities of why a ratio may have changed; link the reason to the scenario that you have been provided
with.
Exam approach
In an exam there is a (time) limit to the amount of ratios that may be calculated. A structured approach is
useful where the question does not specify which ratios to calculate:
 limit calculations to important areas and avoid duplication (eg inventory turnover and inventory
holding periods)
 it is important to come to conclusions, as previously noted, candidates often get carried away with
the ratio calculations and fail to comment on them
 often there are some 'obvious' conclusions that must be made (eg liquidity has deteriorated
x
dramatically, or a large amount of additional non-current assets have been purchased without a
proportionate increase in sales).
Bo
b al
lo
G
A
C
AC
222 | P a g e
SMALL AND MEDIUM SIZED ENTITIES (SMES)

REPORTING REQUIREMENTS OF SMES
International accounting standards are written to meet the needs of investors in international capital
markets. Most companies adopting IFRS are large listed entities. The IASB has not stated that IFRSs only
aimed at quoted companies, but certainly the majority of adopters are large entities. In many countries
IFRSs are used as national GAAP which means that unquoted small and medium-sized entities (SMEs)
have to apply them.
A SME is often owned and managed by a small number of entrepreneurs, and may be a family-owned and
family-run business. Large companies, in contrast, are run by professional boards of directors, who must
be held accountable to their shareholders.
Some commentators suggest that SMEs and public entities should be allowed to use simplified or
differing standards as the nature of their business is different from large quoted entities.
x
The principal aim when developing accounting standards for small to medium-sized enterprises (SMEs) is
Bo
to provide a framework that generates relevant, reliable and useful information which should provide a
high quality and understandable set of accounting standards suitable for SMEs.
Approaches/Options for IASB in Developing IFRS for SMEs
al
There were several approaches, which could have been taken in developing standards for SMEs.
b
lo
 One course of action would have been for GAAP for SMEs to be developed on a national basis, with
IFRS focusing on accounting for listed company activities. The main issue would have been that the
G
practices developed for SMEs may not have been consistent and may have lacked comparability
across national boundaries. Additionally, if a SME had wished to list its shares on a capital market,
the transition to IFRS would have been more difficult.
A
 Another approach would have been to detail the exemptions given to smaller entities in the
C
mainstream IFRS. In this case, an appendix would have been included within the standard detailing
the exemptions given to smaller enterprises.
AC
 A third approach would have been to introduce a separate set of standards comprising all the issues
addressed in IFRS, which are relevant to SMEs.
Issuance of IFRS for SMEs
In July 2009, the International Accounting Standards Board (IASB) issued the IFRS for Small and
Medium-sized Entities (IFRS for SMEs). This standard provides an alternative framework that can be
applied by eligible entities in place of the full set of International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRSs).
The IFRS for SMEs is a self-contained standard, incorporating accounting principles based on existing
IFRSs which have been simplified to suit the entities that fall within its scope.
The Standard is organised by topic with the intention that the standard would be helpful to preparers and
users of SME financial statements. The IFRS for SMEs and full IFRSs are separate and distinct
frameworks. Entities that are eligible to apply the IFRS for SMEs, and that choose to do so, must apply
that Standard in full and cannot choose the most suitable accounting policy from full IFRS or IFRS for
SMEs.
223 | P a g e
Due to big differences between SMEs and large quoted companies, it is not clear whether there is any
reason why SMEs should comply with IFRSs. There are arguments in favour of using SMEs, and
arguments against.
Arguments against the use of IFRSs by SMEs
There are several reasons why SMEs should not adopt IFRSs for the preparation of their financial
statements.
 Some IFRSs deal with subjects that are of little or no relevance to SMEs, such as accounting standards
on consolidation, associates, joint ventures, deferred tax, construction contracts and standards that
deal with complex issues of fair value measurement.
 The costs of complying with IFRSs can be high. For SMEs, the cost is proportionately much higher,
and it is doubtful whether the benefits of complying with IFRSs would justify the costs.
 There are not many users of financial statements of SMEs, and they use the financial statements for a
smaller range of decisions, compared to investors in international capital markets. So would it be a
x
waste of time (as well as cost) to comply with IFRSs?
Bo
Arguments in Favour of the use of IFRSs by SMEs
There are also reasons why SMEs should adopt IFRSs for the preparation of their financial statements.

al
If SMEs use different accounting rules and requirements to prepare their financial statements, there
b
will be a ‗two-tier‘ system of accounting. This could make it difficult to compare results of larger and
lo
smaller companies, should the need arise. Confidence in the quality of financial reporting might be
affected adversely.
G
 If SMEs prepared financial statements in accordance with their national GAAP, it will be impossible
to compare financial statements of companies in different countries. If SMEs grow in size and
eventually obtain a stock market quotation, they will have some difficulty in the transition from
A
national GAAP to IFRSs.

 It has also been argued that full statutory accounts for SMEs would be in the public interest, and
C
might help to protect other stakeholders in the company (such as suppliers, customers, lenders and
employees).
AC
IFRS for SMEs
The IFRS for SMEs is designed to facilitate financial reporting by small and medium-sized entities in a
number of ways:
(a) It provides significantly less guidance than full IFRS.

(b) Many of the principles for recognising and measuring assets, liabilities, income and expenses in full
IFRSs are simplified.
(c) Where full IFRSs allow accounting policy choices, the IFRS for SMEs allows only the easier option.
(d) Topics not relevant to SMEs are omitted.
(e) Significantly fewer disclosures are required.
(f) The standard has been written in clear language that can easily be translated
224 | P a g e
Scope
The IFRS is suitable for all entities except those whose securities are publicly traded and financial
institutions such as banks and insurance companies. Although it has been prepared on a similar basis to
IFRS, it is a stand-alone product and will be updated on its own timescale.
There are no quantitative thresholds for qualification as a SME; instead, the scope of the IFRS is
determined by a test of public accountability.
Effective date
In May 2015, the IASB completed its first comprehensive review of IFRS for SMEs and issued limited
amendments; these are effective on 1 January 2017 with early application permitted.
The IFRS will be revised only once every three years. It is hoped that this will further reduce the reporting
x
burden for SMEs.
Bo
DEFINITIONS
Small and medium-sized entities are entities that:


Do not have public accountability, and
b al
Publish general purpose financial statements for external users. Examples of internal users include
owners who are not involved in managing the business, existing and potential creditors, and credit
lo
rating agencies. General purpose financial statements are those that present fairly financial
position, operating results, and cash flows for external capital providers and others.
G
An entity has public accountability if:

A
 Its debt or equity instruments are traded in a public market or it is in the process of issuing such
C
instruments; or
 It holds assets in a fiduciary capacity for a broad group of outsiders as one of its primary businesses
AC
(e.g. banks, mutual fund, securities brokers/dealers and insurance companies).
The standard does not contain a limit on the size of an entity that may use the IFRS for SMEs provided
that it does not have public accountability. Nor is there a restriction on its use by a public utility, not-for-
profit entity, or public sector entity. A subsidiary whose parent or group uses full IFRSs may use the IFRS
for SMEs if the subsidiary itself does not have public accountability. The standard does not require any
special approval by the owners of an SME for it to be eligible to use the IFRS for SME. Listed companies,
no matter how small, may not use the IFRS for SMEs.
Key Features of the IFRS for SMEs
A complete set of financial statements of an entity reporting under the IFRS for SMEs is similar to that
required by full IFRS and comprises:
 A statement of financial position

 Either a single statement of comprehensive income, or a separate income statement and a separate
statement of comprehensive income
225 | P a g e
 A statement of changes in equity
 A statement of cash flows
 Notes including a summary of significant accounting policies
 Comparative information
The IFRS for SMEs imposes a lesser burden on SMEs due to:
 Some topics in IFRSs being omitted because they are not relevant to typical SMEs
 The simplification of many of the recognition and measurement requirements available in full IFRSs
 Substantially fewer disclosures
Accounting Policies
For situations where the IFRS for SMEs does not provide specific guidance, it provides a hierarchy for
determining a suitable accounting policy. An SME must consider, in descending order:
x
 The guidance in the IFRS for SMEs on similar and related issues.
Bo
 The definitions, recognition criteria and measurement concepts in Section 2 Concepts and Pervasive
Principles of the standard.
Omitted Topics b al
There are a number of accounting standards and disclosures that may not be relevant for the users of SME
financial statements. As a result the standard does not address the following topics:
lo
 Earnings per share
G
 Interim accounting
 Segment reporting
 Insurance (because entities that issue insurance contracts are not eligible to use the standard) and
A
 Assets held for sale

C
Examples of options in full IFRS not included in the IFRS for SMEs
AC
 Revaluation model for intangible assets

 Choice between cost and fair value models for investment property (measurement depends on the
circumstances)
 Proportionate consolidation for investments in jointly controlled entities
 Options for government grants
SIMPLIFICATIONS
Following are the differences in IFRSs for SMEs from regular Standards. Remaining treatments are
significantly same in both.
Investments in associates and joint ventures

 Can be measured at cost unless there is a published price quotation (Then fair value must be used).
 Jointly controlled entities can be accounted for using the cost model, the equity method or the fair
value model (proportionate consolidation is not allowed)
226 | P a g e
Investment properties
 Must be measured at fair value (cost model not allowed, unless fair value cannot be measured reliably
without undue cost or effort)
 If fair value cannot be calculated then must be treated as property, plant and equipment
Property, plant and equipment

 Historical cost-depreciation-impairment model or revaluation model
 Residual value, useful life and depreciation need to be reviewed only if there is an indication they may
have changed since the most recent annual reporting date (full IFRSs require an annual review).
 Impairment testing and reversal
Borrowing costs
 All borrowing costs must be recognised as expense when incurred (cannot be capitalised)
Intangible assets
x
 Revaluation not allowed
 Research and development costs must be recognised as expenses (cannot be capitalised)
Bo
 Indefinite-life intangibles are amortised over their useful lives, but if useful life cannot be reliably
estimated then use the management‘s best estimate but not more than 10 years
Business combinations and Goodwill

 Acquisition (purchase) method used.
b al
 Acquisition costs are capitalized in the cost of investment
 Goodwill is amortised over its useful life (10 years if this can‘t be estimated reliably )
lo
 Contingent considerations are included as part of the cost of investment if it is probable that the
amount will be paid and its fair value can be measured reliably.
G
Leases
A
 Lease classified either as finance lease or operating lease and treated accordingly
 If a sale and leaseback results in a finance lease, the seller should not recognise any excess as a profit,
C
but recognise the excess over the lease term. If a sale and leaseback results in an operating lease, and
the transaction was at fair value, the seller shall recognise any profits immediately.
AC
Government grants
 All grants are measured at the fair value of the asset received or receivable
Financial instruments
The standard eliminates the 'available-for-sale' and 'held-to maturity' classifications of IAS 39, Financial
instruments: recognition and measurement. All financial instruments are measured at amortised cost
using the effective interest method except that investments in non-convertible and non-puttable ordinary
and preference shares that are publicly traded or whose fair value can otherwise be measured reliably
without undue cost or effort are measured at fair value through profit or loss. All amortised cost
instruments must be tested for impairment. At the same time the standard simplifies the hedge
accounting and derecognition requirements. However, SMEs can choose to apply IAS 39 in full if they so
wish.
227 | P a g e
Defined benefits plans
 The projected unit credit method is only used when it could be applied without undue cost or effort.
 Otherwise, en entity can simplify its calculation:
 Ignore estimated future salary increases
 Ignore future service of current employees (assume closure of plan)
 Ignore possible future in-service mortality
 Plan introductions, changes, curtailments, settlements: Immediate recognition (no deferrals)
 For group plans, consolidated amount may be allocated to parent and subsidiaries on a reasonable
basis
 Actuarial gains and losses may be recognised in profit or loss or as an item of other
comprehensive income – but No deferral of actuarial gains or losses, including no corridor
approach and all past service cost is recognised immediately in profit or loss
Financial statements Presentation
In full IFRSs, a statement of changes in equity is required, presenting a reconciliation of equity items
between the beginning and end of the period. Same is the requirement for SMEs. However, if the only
ox
changes to the equity during the period are a result of profit or loss, payment of dividends, correction of
prior-period errors or changes in accounting policy, a combined statement of income and retained
earnings can be presented instead of both a statement of comprehensive income and a statement of
lB
changes in equity.
Assets held for sale ba

 Assets held for sale are not covered in IFRSs for SMEs, the decision to sell an asset is considered
an impairment indicator.
lo
Transition
G
The standard also contains a section on transition, which allows all of the exemptions in IFRS 1, First-time
Adoption of International Financial Reporting Standards. It also contains 'impracticability' exemptions for
A
comparative information and the restatement of the opening statement of financial position.
C
As a result of the above, the IFRS requires SMEs to comply with less than 10% of the volume of
accounting requirements applicable to listed companies complying with the full set of IFRSs.
AC
Application criteria
There is no universally agreed definition of an SME. No single definition can capture all the dimensions of
a small or medium-sized business, or cannot be expected to reflect the differences between firms, sectors,
or countries at different levels of development.
Most definitions based on size use measures such as number of employees, net assets total, or annual
turnover. However, none of these measures apply well across national borders. The IFRS for SMEs is
intended for use by entities that have no public accountability (ie its debt or equity instruments are not
publicly traded).
Ultimately, the decision regarding which entities should use the IFRS for SMEs stays with national
regulatory authorities and standard setters. These bodies will often specify more detailed eligibility
criteria. If an entity opts to use the IFRS for SMEs, it must follow the standard in its entirety - it cannot
cherry pick between the requirements of the IFRS for SMEs and those of full IFRSs.
228 | P a g e
The International Accounting Standards Board (IASB) makes it clear that the prime users of IFRSs are the
capital markets. This means that IFRSs are primarily designed for quoted companies and not SMEs. The
vast majority of the world's companies are small and privately owned, and it could be argued that IFRSs
are not relevant to their needs or to their users. It is often thought that small business managers perceive
the cost of compliance with accounting standards to be greater than their benefit.
Advantages of the IFRS for SMEs

(a) It is virtually a 'one stop shop'.
(b) It is structured according to topics, which should make it practical to use.
(c) It is written in an accessible style.
(d) There is considerable reduction in disclosure requirements.
(e) Guidance not relevant to private entities is excluded.
Disadvantages of the IFRS for SMEs

(a) It does not focus on the smallest companies.
(b) The scope extends to 'non-publicly accountable' entities. Potentially, the scope is too wide.
x
(c) The standard will be onerous for small companies.
Bo
Explanation
The main argument for separate SME accounting standards is the undue cost burden of reporting, which
is proportionately heavier for smaller firms. The cost burden of applying the full set of IFRSs may not be
al
justified on the basis of user needs. Further, much of the current reporting framework is based on the
needs of large business, so SMEs perceive that the full statutory financial statements are less relevant to
the users of SME accounts. SMEs also use financial statements for a narrower range of decisions, as they
b
have less complex transactions and therefore less need for a sophisticated analysis of financial statements.
lo
Thus, the disclosure requirements in the IFRS for SMEs are also substantially reduced when compared
with those in full IFRSs partly because they are not considered appropriate for users' needs and for cost-
benefit considerations. Many disclosures in full IFRSs are more relevant to investment decisions in capital
G
markets than to the transactions undertaken by SMEs.
There are arguments against different reporting requirements for SMEs in that it may lead to a two-tier
A
system of reporting. Entities should not be subject to different rules, which could give rise to different
'true and fair views'.
C
AC
The IFRS for SMEs is a self-contained set of accounting principles that are based on full IFRSs, but that
have been simplified so that they are suitable for SMEs. The standard has been organised by topic with
the intention that the standard would be user-friendly for preparers and users of SME financial
statements.
The IFRS for SMEs and full IFRSs are separate and distinct frameworks. Entities that are eligible to apply
the IFRS for SMEs, and that choose to do so, must apply that standard in full and cannot chose the most
suitable accounting policy from full IFRS or IFRS for SMEs.
However, the standard for SMEs is naturally a modified version of the full standard, and not an
independently developed set of standards. They are based on recognised concepts and pervasive
principles and they will allow easier transition to full IFRS if the SME decides to become a public listed
entity. In deciding on the modifications to make to IFRS, the needs of the users have been taken into
account, as well as the costs and other burdens imposed upon SMEs by the IFRS. Relaxation of some of
the measurement and recognition criteria in IFRS had to be made in order to achieve the reduction in
these costs and burdens. Some disclosure requirements are intended to meet the needs of listed entities,
or to assist users in making forecasts of the future. Users of financial statements of SMEs often do not
make such kinds of forecasts. Small companies pursue different strategies, and their goals are more likely
to be survival and stability rather than growth and profit maximisation.
229 | P a g e
The stewardship function is often absent in small companies, with the accounts playing an agency role
between the owner-manager and the bank.
Where financial statements are prepared using the standard, the basis of presentation note and the
auditor's report will refer to compliance with the IFRS for SMEs. This reference may improve access to
capital. The standard also contains simplified language and explanations of the standards.
In the absence of specific guidance on a particular subject. An SME may, but is not required to, consider
the requirements and guidance in full IFRSs dealing with similar issues. The IASB has produced full
implementation guidance for SMEs.
The IFRS for SMEs is a response to international demand from developed and emerging economies for a
rigorous and common set of accounting standards for smaller and medium-sized businesses that is much
simpler than full IFRSs. The IFRS for SMEs should provide improved comparability for users of accounts
while enhancing the overall confidence in the accounts of SMEs, and reducing the significant costs
involved of maintaining standards on a national basis.
x
Bo
b al
lo
G
A
C
AC
230 | P a g e
SPECIALISED, NOT-FOR-PROFIT AND PUBLIC SECTOR

ENTITIES
TYPES OF ENTITY
Most of this study text is about the financial statements of profit-making entities, such as limited liability
companies.
Other types of entity also prepare and publish financial statements. These entities include:
 Not-for-profit entities: such as charities, clubs and societies. Each of these organisations is set up
for a specific purpose. For example, a charity might be set up to campaign for the protection of the
natural environment or to help the poor.
 Public sector entities: these include central government bodies; local government bodies; and
other organisations that operate for the benefit of the general public, such as state schools and
hospitals. A public sector entity is owned by the state or by the general public.
x
Bo
Many different types of entity could be described under these headings. These entities are different from
limited liability companies, partnerships and sole traders in one vital respect. They do not primarily exist
to make a profit.
interchangeably.
OBJECTIVES OF SPECIALISED ENTITIES

b al
In practice, the terms 'specialised entity', 'not-for-profit entity' and 'public benefit entity' are often used
lo
The main objective of large listed entities is to maximise their profits in order to provide a return to their
G
owners (investors) in the form of a dividend. This may not be their only objective (for example, they may
provide employment to the local community, or aim to operate in a socially responsible way), but it is
their main objective.
A
The objective of owner managed businesses (small privately owned entities) is also to make a profit.
C
In contrast, the main objective of a specialised entity is to carry out the activities for which it has been
AC
created. Again, this may not be the only objective, because all entities need some form of income. Many
large charities, for example, carry out trading activities. However, making a profit is not the main aim. In
fact, most not-for-profit entities will aim to break even, rather than to generate a surplus of income over
expenditure.
In some public sector entities, performance is measured in terms of whether the entity provides value for
money from the resources it has available. Assessment of performance will look at how well the resources
have been used and it is often done using the 3 E's - economy, effectiveness and efficiency.
Economy means buying goods and services at a cheap price, so that the entity is not paying too much for
its input costs, which could include accommodation, staff and other items.
Efficiency means operating so that inputs are used in the best possible way to provide a maximum
output. In the case of a hospital, it may be making sure that the required service is provided at the lowest
cost and wastage is kept to a minimum.
Effectiveness means that an organisation has met its goals by using the right resources at the right time.
231 | P a g e
Accounting standards and specialised entities
International accounting standards are designed for profit-making entities.
Whether they are relevant to not-for-profit entities will depend on the way in which they have to report
and the information that they have to provide. There is a great deal of variation from organisation to
organisation and from country to country.
In some countries, charities and public sector bodies are required to follow accounting standards
specifically designed for the purpose (in the UK these are called Statements of Recommended Practice.)
Alternatively, the form and content of financial statements and the accounting treatments to be followed
may be prescribed by law. IASs and IFRSs are probably largely irrelevant for these entities.
Some not-for-profit entities may be able to draw up accounts in any form that its members or officers
wish. Many not-for-profit entities prepare accounts on a cash basis, rather than on an accruals basis.
Public sector bodies may also use cash accounting. (This was the case in the UK until fairly recently.) IASs
and IFRSs require accruals accounting.
x
Bo
In some countries, public sector bodies and many charities are increasingly expected to apply
commercial-style accounting practices. Even for those entities that are not formally required to adopt
them, IASs and IFRSs are a useful source of information on current best practice.
THE NOT-FOR-PROFIT SECTOR: REGULATORY FRAMEWORK

b al
The IASB and the FASB are working on a framework for reporting, which includes not-for-profit
entities.
lo
The International Public Sector Accounting Standards Board (IPSAB) is developing a set of International
G
Public Sector Accounting Standard based on IFRS.
Regulation of public not-for-profit entities, principally local and national governments and governmental
A
agencies, is by the International Public Sector Accounting Standards Board (IPSAB), which comes under
the International Federation of Accountants (IFAC).
C
Statement of Financial Activities

AC
In addition to a statement of financial position, charities also produce a Statement of Financial Activities
(SOFA), an Annual Report to the Charity Commission and sometimes an income and expenditure
account. The Statement of Financial Activities is the primary statement showing the results of the
charity's activities for the period.
The SOFA shows Incoming resources, Resources expended, and the resultant Net movement in funds.
Under incoming resources, income from all sources of funds are listed. These can include:
Subscription or membership fees

 Public donations
 Donations from patrons
 Government grants
 Income from sale of goods
 Investment income
 Publication sales
232 | P a g e
 Royalties
The resources expended will show the amount spent directly in furtherance of the Charity's objects. It will
also show items which form part of any statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income, such
as salaries, depreciation, travelling and entertaining, audit and other professional fees. These items can be
very substantial.
Charities, especially the larger charities, now operate very much in the way that profit-making entities do.
They run high-profile campaigns which cost money and they employ professional people who have to be
paid. At the same time, their stakeholders will want to see that most of their donation is not going on
running the business, rather than achieving the aims for which funds were donated.
One of the problems charities experience is that, even although the accruals basis is being applied, they
will still have income and expenditure recognised in different periods, due to the difficulty of correlating
them. The extreme example is a campaign to persuade people to leave money to the charity in their will.
The costs will have to be recognised, but there is no way to predict when the income will arise.
x
Bo
Exam Approach
In the exam, you may be given a scenario involving a not-for-profit entity or public sector entity and asked
to advise on a particular transaction. In many ways your advice should be no different for a not-for-profit
al
entity as for a commercial profit-making entity, but you will need to be aware of the context of the
question and the fact that the objectives of a not for profit entity differ from a standard trading entity.
b
Users of the financial statements of a not-for-profit entity are almost always interested in the way that the
lo
entity manages and uses its resources.
G
For example:
 A charity may be managed by trustees on behalf of its supporters and those who benefit from its
A
activities.
C
 A public sector organisation is managed by elected officials on behalf of the general public.
AC
Performance measurement of non- profit organisation
Additionally, if you have to interpret any information relating to not-for-profit and public sector entities
then make sure you are aware who the users of that information are and what they will be interested in.
Typically, users will want to know whether:
 The entity has enough finance to achieve its objectives

 The money raised is being spent on the activities for which it was intended
 The public are receiving value for money (in the case of a public sector entity)
 Services are being provided economically, efficiently and effectively (in the case of a public sector
entity)
 The level of spending is reasonable in relation to the services provided.
Additionally, standard ratios may not be suitable for these entities so you may have to look at other
measures, such as non-financial rations including:
233 | P a g e
 The average time that hospital patients wait for treatment
 The number of schools built in an area
 Serious crimes per 1,000 of the population
 Number of complaints by members of the public in a given period
 Number of visits made to museums and art galleries in an area.
Entity Reconstructions
 You need to identify when an entity may no longer be viewed as a going concern and why a
reconstruction might be an appropriate alternative to liquidation.
 You will not need to suggest a scheme of reconstruction, but you will need an outline of the
accounting treatment.
Background
Most of a study text on financial accounting is inevitably concerned with profitable, even expanding
x
businesses. It must of course be recognised that some companies fail. From a theoretical discounted cash
Bo
flow viewpoint, a company should be wound up if the expected return on its value in liquidation is less
than that required. In practice (and in law), a company is regarded as insolvent if it is unable to pay its
debts. This term needs some qualification. It is not uncommon, for example, to find a company that
continues to trade and pays its creditors on time despite the fact that its liabilities exceed its assets. On the
other hand, a company may be unable to meet its current liabilities although it has substantial sums
b al
locked up in assets which cannot be liquidated sufficiently quickly.
The procedures and options open to a failing company will depend on the degree of financial difficulties it
faces. If the outlook is hopeless, liquidation may be the only feasible solution. However, many firms in
lo
serious financial positions can be revived to the benefit of creditors, members and society. When
considering any scheme of arrangement it is important to remember that the protection of creditors is
G
usually of paramount importance. The position of the shareholders and in particular, the protection of
class rights, must be considered but the creditors come first. This section considers some possibilities, but
local legislation will govern these situations.
A
Going concern. The entity is normally viewed as a going concern, that is, as continuing in operation for
C
the foreseeable future. It is assumed that the entity has neither the intention nor the necessity of
liquidation or of curtailing materially the scale of its operations. (Framework) It is generally assumed that
AC
the entity has no intention to liquidate or curtail major operations. If it did, then the financial statements
would be prepared on a different (disclosed) basis. Indications that an entity may no longer be a going
concern include the following (from International Standard on Auditing, ISA 570 Going concern):
(a) Financial indicators, e.g. recurring operating losses, net liability or net current liability position,
negative cash flow from operating activities, adverse key financial ratios, inability to obtain financing
for essential new product development or other essential investments, default on loan or similar
agreements, arrear as in dividends, denial of usual trade credit from suppliers, restructuring of debt,
non-compliance with statutory capital requirements, need to seek new sources or methods of
financing or to dispose of substantial assets.
(b) Operating matters, e.g. loss of key management without replacement, loss of a major market, key
customers, licence, or principal suppliers, labour difficulties, shortages of important supplies or the
emergence of a highly successful competitor.
(c) Other matters, e.g. pending legal or regulatory proceedings against the entity, changes in law or
regulations that may adversely affect the entity; or uninsured or underinsured catastrophe such as a
drought, earthquake or flood.
234 | P a g e
Internal reconstructions
A company may be able to enter into any type of scheme regarding either its creditors or its shareholders
as long as the scheme does not conflict with general law or any particular statutory provision.
For a reconstruction of this type to be considered worthwhile in the first place, the business must have
some future otherwise it might be better for the creditors if the company went into liquidation. In any
scaling down of claims from creditors and loan stock holders, two conditions should be met.
(a) A reasonable chance of successful operations

(b) Fairness to parties
Transfer of Assets to a New Company
Another form of reconstruction is by means of voluntary liquidation whereby the liquidator transfers the
x
assets of the company to a new company in exchange for shares or other securities in the new company.
The old company may be able to retain certain of its assets, usually cash, and make a distribution to the
Bo
shareholders of the old company who still have an interest in the undertaking through their shareholding
in the new company. There may be various rules governing the protection of non-controlling
shareholders.
al
Such a procedure would be applied to the company which is proposed to be or is in course of being wound
up voluntarily. A company in liquidation must dispose of its assets (other than cash) by sale in order to
b
pay its debts and distribute any surplus to its members. The special feature of this kind of reconstruction
is that the business or property of Company P is transferred to Company Q in exchange for shares of the
lo
latter company which are allotted direct or distributed by the liquidator to members of Company P.
Obviously the creditors of Company P will have to be paid cash.
G
Finding the cash to pay creditors and to buy out shareholders who object to the scheme is often the major
drawback to a scheme of this kind. It is unlikely to be used much because the same result can be more
A
satisfactorily achieved by a takeover: Company Q simply acquires the share capital of Company P, which
becomes its subsidiary, and the assets and liabilities are transferred from the subsidiary to the new
C
holding company. In this situation usually no cash has to be found (although obviously there is no
guarantee of success).
AC
The advantage of transferring a business from one company to another (with the same shareholders in the
end) is that by this means the business may be moved away from a company with a tangled history to a
new company which makes a fresh start. As explained above this procedure can also be used to effect a
merger of two companies each with an existing business.
Accounting procedures for a transfer to a new company
The basic procedure when transferring the undertaking to a new company is as follows.
(a) To close off the ledger accounts in the books of the old company.
(b) To open up the ledger accounts in the books of the new company.
The basic procedure is as follows.
Step 1 Open a realisation account and transfer in all the assets and liabilities to be taken over by the
new company at book value.
235 | P a g e
Step 2 Open a sundry members account with columns for ordinary and preference shareholders.
Transfer in the share capital, reserve balances, assets written off and gains and losses on realisation.
Step 3 With the purchase consideration for the members:
DEBIT Sundry members a/c
CREDIT Realisation a/c
Take any profit or loss on realisation to the sundry members account (ordinary).
Step 4 In the new company, open a purchase of business account:

CREDIT it with assets taken over
(DEBIT asset accounts)
x
DEBIT it with liabilities taken over
Bo
(CREDIT liabilities a/cs)
DEBIT it with the purchase consideration

(CREDIT shares, loan stock etc)
b
Any balance is goodwill or a gain on a bargain purchase.
al
lo
G
A
C
AC
236 | P a g e
CURRENT DEVELOPMENTS
This Chapter includes topics currently under debate and all recent changes and standards issued by the
IASB. The following have been incorporated in the chapter:
1. Practice Statement Management Commentary

2. IFRS 1 First Time Adoption of International Financial Reporting Standards
3. Convergence with US GAAP
4. IAS 21 – Does it need amending
5. The IASB‘s Principles of Disclosure Initiative
6. Future trends in sustainability reporting
IFRS PRACTICE STATEMENT: MANAGEMENT COMMENTARY
What is management commentary?
x
Bo
Management commentary is a narrative report that provides a context within which to interpret the
financial position, financial performance and cash flows of an entity. It also provides management with an
opportunity to explain its objectives and its strategies for achieving those objectives. Users routinely use
the type of information provided in management commentary to help them evaluate an entity‘s prospects
al
and its general risks, as well as the success of management‘s strategies for achieving its stated objectives.
For many entities, management commentary is already an important element of their communication
with the capital markets, supplementing as well as complementing the financial statements.
b
lo
Objective
G
The objective of the Practice Statement is to assist management in presenting useful management
commentary that relates to financial statements that have been prepared in accordance with International
A
Financial Reporting Standards (IFRSs).

C
Scope
AC
The Practice Statement applies only to management commentary and not to other information presented
in either the financial statements or the broader financial reports.
Framework for the presentation of management commentary
Purpose
 Management commentary should provide users of financial statements with integrated information
that provides a context for the related financial statements. Such information explains management‘s
view not only about what has happened, including both positive and negative circumstances, but also
why it has happened and what the implications are for the entity‘s future.
 Management commentary complements and supplements the financial statements by communicating
integrated information about the entity‘s resources and the claims against the entity and its resources,
and the transactions and other events that change them.
237 | P a g e
 Management commentary should also explain the main trends and factors that are likely to affect the
entity‘s future performance, position and progress. Consequently, management commentary looks
not only at the present, but also at the past and the future.
Principles
In aligning with those principles, management commentary should include:
(a) Forward-looking information; and

(b) Information that possesses the qualitative characteristics described in the Conceptual Framework for
Financial Reporting.
Management commentary should provide information to help users of the financial reports to assess the
performance of the entity and the actions of its management relative to stated strategies and plans for
progress. That type of commentary will help users of the financial reports to understand, for example:
x
(a) The entity‘s risk exposures, its strategies for managing risks and the effectiveness of those strategies;
Bo
(b) How resources that are not presented in the financial statements could affect the entity‘s operations;
and
(c) How non-financial factors have influenced the information presented in the financial statements.
Presentation
b al
Management commentary should be clear and straightforward. The form and content of management
lo
commentary will vary between entities, reflecting the nature of their business, the strategies adopted by
management and the regulatory environment in which they operate.
G
Elements of management commentary

A
Although the particular focus of management commentary will depend on the facts and circumstances of
the entity, management commentary should include information that is essential to an understanding of:
C
(a) The nature of the business;

AC
(b) Management‘s objectives and its strategies for meeting those objectives;
(c) The entity‘s most significant resources, risks and relationships;
(d) The results of operations and prospects; and
(e) The critical performance measures and indicators that management uses to evaluate the entity‘s
performance against stated objectives.
Application date
An entity may apply this Practice Statement to management commentary presented prospectively from 8
December 2010.
238 | P a g e
IFRS 1: FIRST-TIME ADOPTION OF INTERNATIONAL

REPORTING STANDARDS
A first-time adopter of IFRSs is an entity that presents IFRS financial statements for the first time, and
fully complies with the requirements of IFRSs.
The special requirements for a first-time adopter are set out in IFRS 1.
 A first-time adopter must adjust its statement of financial position produced under 'local GAAP' to a
statement of financial position produced using IFRSs.
 This adjustment should be made by 'retrospective application' of the IFRSs.
 In order to make adjustments to move from a statement of financial position prepared under local
GAAP to a statement of financial position prepared with IFRSs, a number of prior year adjustments
must be made for all the accounting policy changes. These adjustments are made in the financial
statements by adjusting the opening reserves in the first-time adopter's opening IFRS statement of
x
financial position. These adjustments are usually made to the accumulated profits reserve (retained
Bo
profits reserve).
Opening statement of financial position of a first-time adopter
al
The retrospective application of IFRSs means that adjustments are made to the first-time adopter's
opening statement of financial position. This is the entity's statement of financial position at the date of
transition to IFRSs.
b
lo
IFRS 1 defines the date of transition to IFRSs as 'the beginning of the earliest period for which an entity
presents full comparative information under IFRS in its first IFRS financial statements.'
G
IFRS 1 also states that an entity must use the same accounting policies in its opening IFRS statement of
financial position and throughout all the financial periods presented in its first IFRS financial statements.
A
These should be the IFRSs that apply as at the reporting date for the first IFRS financial statements (and
any previous versions of IFRSs that may have applied at earlier dates should not be used).
C
AC
Opening IFRS statement of financial position: exemptions from IFRSs
The general rule in IFRS 1 is that in the opening IFRS statement of financial position, a first-time adopter
must:
239 | P a g e
 recognise all assets and liabilities whose recognition is required by IFRSs
 Not recognise assets or liabilities if IFRSs do not permit such recognition
 Re-classify items recognised under the previous GAAP as one type of asset, liability or component of
equity if IFRSs require that they should be classified differently
 Apply IFRSs in measuring all assets and liabilities.
Main exemptions from applying IFRS in the opening IFRS statement of financial
position
(a) Property, plant and equipment, investment properties and intangible assets
 Fair value/previous GAAP revaluation may be used as a substitute for cost at date of transition to
IFRSs.
(b) Business combinations
For business combinations prior to the date of transition to IFRSs:
 The same classification (acquisition or uniting of interests) is retained as under previous GAAP.
 For items requiring a cost measure for IFRSs, the carrying value at the date of the business
x
combination is treated as deemed cost and IFRS rules are applied from thereon.
Bo
 Items requiring a fair value measure for IFRSs are revalued at the date of transition to IFRS.
The carrying value of goodwill at the date of transition to IFRSs is the amount as reported under previous
GAAP.
(c) Employee benefits

b al
 Unrecognised actuarial gains and losses can be deemed zero at the date of transition to IFRSs.
lo
IAS 19 is applied from then on.
(d) Cumulative translation differences on foreign operations
G
 Translation differences (which must be disclosed in a separate translation reserve under IFRS)
may be deemed zero at the date of transition to IFRS. IAS 21 is applied from then on.
(e) Adoption of IFRS by subsidiaries, associates and joint ventures
A
If a subsidiary, associate or joint venture adopts IFRS later than its parent, it measures its assets and
C
liabilities:
AC
 Either: At the amount that would be included in the parent‘s financial statements, based on the
parent‘s date of transition
 Or: At the amount based on the subsidiary (associate or joint venture)‘s date of transition.
Presentation and disclosure by a first-time adopter
IFRS 1 requires that a first-time adopter must include at least one year of comparative information in its
first IFRS financial statements. (This is why the date of transition to IFRS cannot be later than the
beginning of the previous financial year).
IFRS 1 also requires a first-time adopter to disclose the following reconciliations:
 A reconciliation of equity that was reported under the previous GAAP with the equity reported under
IFRSs, for both of the following dates: (1) the date of transition to IFRS and (2) the end of the last
financial period in which the entity presented its financial statements under the previous GAAP.
240 | P a g e
 For example, suppose that a first-time adopter presents just one year of comparative information, and
prepared its first IFRS financial statements for the year to 31 December 2005. The reconciliation of
equity between 'old GAAP' and IFRSs should be made for both 1 January 2004 and 31 December
2004.
 A reconciliation of the profit or loss reported under the previous GAAP and the profit or loss using
IFRSs, for the entity's most recent financial period before adopting IFRSs.
 If the entity recognises impairment losses for the first time in its opening IFRS statement of financial
position, it should provide the information that would have been required by IAS 36 Impairment of
assets if the impairment losses had been recognised in the financial period beginning with the date of
transition to IFRS.
x
Bo
b al
lo
G
A
C
AC
241 | P a g e
CONVERGENCE WITH IFRS AND IMPROVEMENTS TO IFRSS
International Harmonisation
Comparable, transparent, and reliable financial information is fundamental for the smooth functioning of
capital markets. In the global arena, the need for comparable standards of financial reporting has become
paramount because of the dramatic growth in the number, reach, and size of multinational corporations,
foreign direct investments, cross-border purchases and sales of securities, as well as the number of foreign
securities listings on the stock exchanges. However, because of the social, economic, legal, and cultural
differences among countries, the accounting standards and practices in different countries vary widely.
The credibility of financial reports becomes questionable if similar transactions are accounted for
differently in different countries.
To improve the comparability of financial statements, harmonization of accounting standards is

advocated. Harmonization strives to increase comparability between accounting principles by setting
limits on the alternatives allowed for similar transactions. Harmonization differs from standardization in
x
that the latter allows no room for alternatives even in cases where economic realities differ.
Bo
Advantages and disadvantages of harmonisation
There are some strong arguments in favour of the harmonisation of accounting standards in all countries
of the world, and in particular for the convergence of US GAAP and IFRSs.
strong as the arguments in favour.

b al
However, there are also some arguments against harmonisation -even though these are probably not as
lo
Advantages of harmonisation
G
1. Investors and analysts of financial statements can make better comparisons between the financial
position, financial performance and financial prospects of entities in different countries. This is very
important, in view of the rapid growth in international investment by institutional investors.
A
2. For international groups, harmonisation will simplify the preparation of group accounts. If all entities
C
in the group share the same accounting framework, there should be no need to make adjustments for
consolidation purposes.
AC
3. If all entities are using the same framework for financial reporting, management should find it easier
to monitor performance within their group.
4. Global harmonisation of accounting framework may encourage growth in cross-border trading,
because entities will find it easier to assess the financial position of customers and suppliers in other
countries.
5. Access to international finance should be easier, because banks and investors in the international
financial markets will find it easier to understand the financial information presented to them by
entities wishing to raise finance.
Disadvantages of harmonisation
1. National legal requirements may conflict with the requirements of IFRSs. Some countries may have
strict legal rules about preparing financial statements, as the statements are prepared mainly for tax
purposes. Consequently, laws may need re-writing to permit the accounting policies required by
IFRSs.
2. Some countries may believe that their framework is satisfactory or even superior to IFRSs. This has
been a problem with the US, although currently is not as much of an issue as in the past.
242 | P a g e
3. Cultural differences across the world may mean that one set of accounting standards will not be
flexible enough to meet the needs of all users.
Convergence with US GAAP
The IASB and the US Financial Accounting Standards Board (FASB) have been working together since
2002 to achieve convergence of IFRSs and US generally accepted accounting principles (GAAP).
A common set of high quality global standards remains a priority of both the IASB and the
FASB.
In September 2002 the IASB and the FASB agreed to work together, in consultation with other national
and regional bodies, to remove the differences between international standards and US GAAP. This
decision was embodied in a Memorandum of Understanding (MoU) between the boards known as
the Norwalk Agreement.
The boards‘ commitment was further strengthened in 2006 when the IASB and FASB set specific
milestones to be reached by 2008 (A roadmap for convergence 2006 – 2008).
x
Bo
Norwalk Agreement (MoU)
At their joint meeting in Norwalk, Connecticut, USA on September 18, 2002, the Financial Accounting
Standards Board (FASB) and the International Accounting Standards Board (IASB) each acknowledged
al
their commitment to the development of high-quality, compatible accounting standards that could be
used for both domestic and cross-border financial reporting.
b
To achieve compatibility, the FASB and IASB (together, the ―Boards‖) agree, as a matter of high priority,
lo
to undertake a short-term project aimed at removing a variety of individual differences between U.S.
G
GAAP and International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRSs, which include International Accounting
Standards, IASs);
A
In 2008 the two boards issued an update to the MoU, which identified a series of priorities and
milestones to complete the remaining major joint projects by 2011, emphasising the goal of joint projects
C
to produce common, principle-based standards instead of 'rule based approach' followed by FASB.
AC
Common conceptual framework
In October 2004 the IASB and FASB agreed to develop a common conceptual framework which would be
a significant step towards harmonisation of future standards. The project has been divided into two
phases:
(a) The initial focus is on particular aspects of the frameworks dealing with objectives, qualitative
characteristics, elements, recognition, and measurement, giving priority to issues affecting projects
for new/ revised Standards.
(b) Later, they will consider the applicability of those concepts to other sectors, beginning with not for
profit entities in the private sector.
Memorandum of understanding
In February 2006, the two Boards signed a 'Memorandum of Understanding'. This laid down a
'roadmap of convergence' between IFRSs and US GAAP in the period 2006-2008.
243 | P a g e
The aim was to remove by 2009 the requirement for foreign companies reporting under IFRSs listed on a
US stock exchange to have to prepare a reconciliation to US GAAP.
Events moved faster than expected, and in November 2007 the US Securities and Exchange Commission
(SEC) decided to allow non-US filers to report under IFRSs for years ended after 15 November 2007 with
no reconciliation to US GAAP.
Consultation is also underway on the possibility of the use of IFRSs by US filers. In November 2008, the
SEC published a proposal, titled Roadmap for the Potential Use of Financial Statements Prepared in
accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards by U.S. Issuers. The proposed roadmap sets
out milestones that, if achieved, could lead to the adoption of IFRSs in the US in 2014.
It also proposes to permit the early adoption of IFRSs from 2010 for some US entities.
FASB/IASB projects
x
Bo
Some of the main results of the convergence project between FASB and the IASB have been:
(a) The issue of IFRS 5 Non-current assets held for sale and discontinued operations
(b) The issue of IFRS 8 Operating segments
al
(c) Revision of IAS 23 Borrowing costs, to align with US GAAP
(d) Revision of IAS 1 Presentation of financial statements and an agreement on common wording to be
used in accounting standards
b
lo
(e) Revision of IFRS 3 Business combinations and IAS 27 Consolidated and separate financial statements
(f) The issue of IFRS 9 Financial instruments, exposure drafts on impairment and hedging
G
(g) There are also Discussion Papers, Exposure drafts or completed/revised IFRSs on the following
topics:
i. Conceptual Framework
A
ii. Financial statements presentation

C
iii. Leases
iv. Revenue Recognition
AC
v. Fair value measurement

vi. Income taxes
vii. Pension accounting
244 | P a g e
IAS 21 – DOES IT NEED AMENDING

The International Accounting Standards Board (IASB) recently initiated a research project, which
examined a previous research. This research considered whether any work on IAS 21, The Effects of
Changes in Foreign Exchange Rates, was appropriate. The following text looks at some of the issues raised
by the project in the context of IAS 21.
The foreign exchange market is affected by many factors, and in countries with a floating exchange rate,
their foreign exchange rates are inevitably exposed to volatility due to the effects of the different factors
influencing the market. For example, the ongoing problem of Greece repaying its enormous debts has
significantly affected the value of the euro.
As the barriers to international flows of capital are further relaxed, the volatility of the foreign exchange
market is likely to continue. This volatility affects entities that engage in foreign currency transactions and
there has been a resultant call in some quarters to amend IAS 21.
IFRS 7, Financial Instruments: Disclosure requires disclosure of market risk, which is the risk that the fair
x
value or cashflows of a financial instrument will fluctuate due to changes in market prices. Market risk
Bo
reflects, in part, currency risk. In IFRS 7, the definition of foreign currency risk relates only to financial
instruments. IFRS 7 and IAS 21 have a different conceptual basis. IFRS 7 is based upon the distinction
between financial/non-financial elements, whereas IAS 21 utilises the monetary/non-monetary
distinction.
al
The financial/non-financial distinction determines whether an item is subject to foreign currency risk
under IFRS 7, whereas translation in IAS 21 uses monetary/non-monetary distinction, thereby possibly
b
causing potential conceptual confusion. Foreign currency risk is little mentioned in IAS 21 and on
lo
applying the definition in IFRS 7 to IAS 21, non-financial instruments could be interpreted as carrying no
foreign currency risk. Under IAS 21, certain monetary items include executory contracts, which do not
meet the definition of a financial instrument. These items would be translated at the closing rate, but as
G
such items are not financial instruments, they could be deemed not to carry foreign currency risk under
IFRS 7.
A
Foreign currency translation should be conceptually consistent with the conceptual framework. IAS 21
was issued in 1983 with the objective of prescribing how to include foreign currency transactions and
C
foreign operations in the financial statements of an entity and how to translate financial statements into a
presentation currency.
AC
There is little conceptual clarification of the translation requirements in IAS 21. The requirements of IAS
21 can be divided into two main areas: the reporting of foreign currency transactions in the functional
currency; and the translation to the presentation currency. Exchange differences arising from monetary
items are reported in profit or loss in the period, with one exception which is that exchange differences
arising on monetary items that form part of the reporting entity‘s net investment in a foreign operation
are recognised initially in other comprehensive income, and in profit or loss on disposal of the net
investment.
However, it would be useful to re-examine whether it is more appropriate to recognise a gain or loss on a
monetary item in other comprehensive income instead of profit or loss in the period and to define the
objective of translation. Due to the apparent lack of principles in IAS 21, difficulty could arise in
determining the nature of the information to be provided on translation.
There is an argument that the current accounting standards might not reflect the true economic substance
of long-term monetary assets and liabilities denominated in foreign currency because foreign exchange
rates at the end of the reporting period are used to translate amounts that are to be repaid in the future.
IAS 21 states that foreign currency monetary amounts should be reported using the closing rate with gains
245 | P a g e
or losses recognised in profit or loss in the period in which they arise, even when the rate is abnormally
high or low.
There are cases where an exchange rate change is likely to be reversed, and thus it may not be appropriate
to recognise foreign exchange gains or losses of all monetary items as realised gains or losses. Thus there
is an argument that consideration should be given as to whether foreign exchange gains or losses should
be recognised in profit or loss or in other comprehensive income (OCI) based on the distinction between
current items and non-current items.
Any potential fluctuation in profit or loss account would be reduced by recognising in OCI those foreign
exchange gains or losses of non-current items with a high possibility of reversal. Furthermore, the
question would arise as to whether these items recognised in OCI could be reclassified.
However, the IASB is currently determining via its conceptual framework project the purpose and nature
of OCI, as there is no obvious principle that drives gains and losses out of profit or loss and into OCI, and
there is no shared view among the IASB‘s constituents about what should be in profit or loss and what
should be in OCI.
ox
IAS 21 does provide some guidance on non-monetary items by stating that when a gain or loss on a non-
monetary item is recognised in OCI, any exchange component of that gain or loss shall be recognised in
lB
OCI.
Conversely, when a gain or loss on a non-monetary item is recognised in profit or loss, any exchange
component of that gain or loss shall be recognised in profit or loss.
ba
Long-term liabilities
lo
In the case of long-term liabilities, although any translation gains must be recognised in profit or loss, and
treated as part of reported profit, in some jurisdictions, these gains are treated as unrealised for the
G
purpose of computing distributable profit.
The reasoning is that there is a greater likelihood in the case of long-term liabilities that the favourable
A
fluctuation in the exchange rate will reverse before repayment of the liability falls due.
C
As stated already, IAS 21 requires all foreign currency monetary amounts to be reported using the closing
AC
rate; non-monetary items carried at historical cost are reported using the exchange rate at the date of the
transaction and non-monetary items carried at fair value are reported at the rate that existed when the
fair values were determined. As monetary items are translated at the closing rate, although the items are
not stated at fair value, the use of the closing rate does provide some fair value information. However, this
principle is not applied to non-monetary items as, unless an item is measured at fair value, the
recognition of a change in the exchange rate appears not to provide useful information.
A foreign operation is defined in IAS 21 as a subsidiary, associate, joint venture, or branch whose activities
are based in a country or currency other than that of the reporting entity. Thus the definition of a foreign
operation is quite restrictive. It is possible to conduct operations in other ways; for example, using a
foreign broker. Therefore, the definition of a foreign operation needs to be based upon the substance of
the relationship and not the legal form.
Although the exchange rate at the transaction date is required to be used for foreign currency transactions
at initial recognition, an average exchange rate may also be used. The date of a transaction is the date on
which the transaction first qualifies for recognition in accordance with International Financial Reporting
Standards. For practical reasons, a rate that approximates to the actual rate at the date of the transaction
is often used. For example, an average rate for a week or a month might be used for all transactions in
246 | P a g e
each foreign currency occurring during that period. However, if exchange rates fluctuate significantly, the
use of the average rate for a period is inappropriate.
Average exchange rate
A question arises as to which exchange rate to use and therefore it would be useful to have more specific
guidance on the use of the average exchange rate. IAS 21 allows a certain amount of flexibility in
calculating the average rate. The determination of the average rate depends upon factors such as the
frequency and value of transactions, the period over which the rate will apply and the nature of the
entity‘s systems. There are a large number of methods that can be used to calculate the average rate, but
no guidance is given in IAS 21 as to how such a rate is determined.
The IASB has completed its initial assessments on this project and decided that narrow scope
amendments were unnecessary. In May 2015, it had no plans to undertake any additional work and is to
remove this project from the research programme, subject to feedback in the next agenda consultation.
x
Bo
b al
lo
G
A
C
AC
247 | P a g e
THE IASB’S PRINCIPLES OF DISCLOSURE INITIATIVE
The International Accounting Standards Board (IASB) has published a comprehensive discussion paper
(DP) setting out the Board's preliminary views on disclosure principles that should be included in a
general disclosure standard or in or in non-mandatory guidance on the topic.
Background
For the years 2017-2021 the IASB has chosen "Better communication" as its central theme, and in
addition to the primary financial statements project and the IFRS Taxonomy this also includes the
disclosure initiative. A related project is also the Conceptual Framework project. In fact, some concepts
and financial reporting issues have been moved back and forth between different projects of this group.
The disclosure initiative itself is made up of a number of projects:
 Amendments to IAS 1 to remove barriers to the exercise of judgement and amendments to
ox
IAS 7 to improve disclosure of liabilities from financing activities have already been completed.
 Guidance on the application of materiality has been split into two projects and will see a
final practice statement and an exposure draft of proposed amendments to IAS 1 and IAS 8
lB
published in June.
The IASB's project on the principles of disclosure ba

The objective of the principles of disclosure project is to help preparers to communicate information more
effectively, to improve disclosures for users of financial statements, and to help the Board to develop
disclosure requirements in standards. Since IAS 1 Presentation of Financial Statements contains general
lo
requirements for disclosures in the financial statements, the project uses the IAS 1 requirements as a
starting point to see whether parts of IAS 1 can be amended to reach the project's objective or whether a
G
new disclosure standard should be developed to replace parts of IAS 1 (both options a subsumed under
the expression "general disclosure standard" throughout the DP).
A
Summary of main proposals

C
Contents. The DP contains 110 pages and is divided into eight sections accompanied by an appendix. The
paper is preceded by an executive summary describing the reasons behind publishing the DP, its reach,
AC
the main content of the document, the preliminary views of the Board, the terminology used, and the next
steps. The paper itself is structured as follows:
The key issues dealt with in each section are summarised below.
248 | P a g e
x
Bo
b al
lo
G
A
C
AC
249 | P a g e
x
Bo
b al
lo
G
A
C
AC
250 | P a g e
DISCLOSURE INITIATIVE (AMENDMENTS TO IAS 1)
Background
As a result of the IASB‘s Agenda Consultation 2011, the IASB received a request to review the disclosure
requirements within the existing standards and to develop a disclosure framework.
The IASB has considered elements of presentation and disclosure as part of its revision of the Conceptual
Framework for Financial Reporting. In addition, and to complement the work being done in relation to
the Conceptual Framework project, the IASB started its Disclosure Initiative project during 2013. The
Disclosure Initiative is a portfolio of projects affecting existing IFRSs, as well as other implementation
and research projects.
The amendments to IAS 1 have resulted predominately from decisions made during the Disclosure
Initiative project, with one additional proposal, regarding the presentation of an entity‘s share of other
comprehensive income (OCI) from equity accounted interest in associates and joint ventures, arising from
a submission received by the IFRS Interpretations Committee.
x
Bo
Summary of the proposals
The amendments made to IAS 1 are designed to address concerns expressed by constituents about
existing presentation and disclosure requirements and to encourage entities to use judgement in the
al
application of IAS 1 when considering the layout and content of their financial statements.
In addition, an amendment is made to IAS 1 to clarify the presentation of an entity‘s share of other
b
comprehensive income (OCI) from its equity accounted interests in associates and joint ventures. The
lo
amendment requires an entity‘s share of other comprehensive income to be split between those items that
will and will not be reclassified to profit or loss, and presented in aggregate as single line items within
G
those two groups.
This would result in amendments to various paragraphs of IAS 1:

A
Materiality and aggregation (paragraphs 29 to 31)

C
Statement of financial position (paragraphs 54 to 55A), and statement of profit or loss and other
comprehensive income (paragraphs 82 and 85 to 85B)
AC
Notes to the financial statements (paragraphs 112 to 116)

Accounting policies (paragraphs 117 to 121)
Equity accounted investments (paragraph 82A).
Materiality and aggregation

Information is not to be aggregated or disaggregated in a manner that obscures material information and
reduces the understandability of financial statements (e.g. aggregating items that have different natures
or functions or overwhelming useful information with immaterial information)
Materiality applies to all four primary financial statements and the notes to the financial statements.
Even when a standard contains a list of specific minimum disclosure requirements, preparers need to
assess whether each required disclosure is material, and consequently whether presentation or disclosure
of that information is warranted. This combines with the existing definition of materiality in IAS 1.7,
which requires consideration of items both individually and collectively, because a group of immaterial
items may, when combined, be material. Preparers also need to consider whether particularly significant
items mean that disclosures, in addition to minimum requirements specified in IFRSs, are required to
provide an appropriate amount of information.
251 | P a g e
Statement of financial position, and statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive
income
It is clarified that the requirements to present specific line items in the ‗statement of profit or loss and
other comprehensive income‘ and ‗statement of financial position‘ can be met by disaggregating these line
items if this is relevant to an understanding of the entity‘s financial position and performance.
New requirements are introduced when an entity presents subtotals in primary statements in accordance
with IAS 1.55 and 85. The amendments clarify that additional subtotals must be made up of items
recognised in accordance with IFRSs, need to be presented and labelled in a manner that makes the
subtotals understandable and consistent from period to period, and are not permitted to be displayed with
more prominence than the subtotals and totals required by IFRSs.
Notes
It is emphasised that understandability and comparability of financial statements should be considered by
an entity when deciding the order in which the notes are presented.
It is clarified that entities have flexibility for the order of the notes, which do not necessarily need to be
x
presented in the order listed in IAS 1.114 (e.g. it may be decided to give more prominence to areas that the
entity considers to be most relevant to its financial performance and position, such as grouping together
Bo
Disclosure of accounting policies
The examples in IAS 1.120 of accounting policies for income taxes and foreign exchange gains and losses
always expect these specific policies to be disclosed.

b al
have been removed, because the examples were unclear about why a user of financial statements would
Equity accounted investments

lo
This amendment clarifies the presentation of an entity‘s share of other comprehensive income (OCI) from
G
equity accounted associates and joint ventures.
The amendment would require entities to include two separate line items in OCI for those items, being
A
amounts that will and will not be reclassified to profit or loss.

C
What the amendments mean

AC
Respondents to the IASB‘s Agenda Consultation 2011 asked the IASB to review the disclosure
requirements of existing IFRSs and to develop a disclosure framework. A number of these requests arose
from the increasing length of many financial statements prepared in accordance with IFRS, and disclosure
overload in those financial statements.
In 2013, to complement work being carried out to revise the Conceptual Framework, the IASB started its
Disclosure Initiative. This is made up of a number of short and medium term projects, and on-going
activities, which are looking at how to improve presentation and disclosure principles in existing IFRSs.
The materiality requirements of IAS 1 have been amended to emphasise that information should not be
aggregated or disaggregated in a way that obscures material information. The changes also highlight that
materiality applies to all aspects of financial statements, including the primary financial statements, the
notes and specific disclosures required by individual IFRSs. The purpose is to encourage entities (and
others involved in the preparation and review of financial statements) to give careful consideration to
presentation requirements, and to the items that need to be included in financial statements.
The content of primary statement line items has been clarified, including that as well as aggregating
immaterial items, individual lines that contain significant items may need to be disaggregated. Additional
252 | P a g e
guidance has also been added for the use of subtotals, requiring that these are derived using amounts that
are reported in accordance with IFRS.
The amendment related to the submission to the IFRS Interpretations Committee and addresses
uncertainty about, and diversity in, the presentation of an entity‘s share of other comprehensive income
(OCI) from equity accounted associates and joint ventures. The effect is to include two separate line items
in OCI for items that will, and for items that will not, be reclassified to profit or loss.
What should entities do in response to the amendments?
Disclosure overload and the increased complexity of financial reporting have been key drivers in the
IASB‘s decision to start its Disclosure Initiative. The amendments are designed to encourage entities to
improve the understandability, comparability and clarity of their financial statements.
Although the amendments do not introduce many new requirements to IAS 1 (and are not inconsistent
with its existing guidance), they would encourage additional thought to be given to the content and layout
of financial statements. Entities may wish to revisit:
x

Bo
Their application of materiality
 The level of aggregation and disaggregation of line items in the financial statements
 The use of subtotals
 Presenting information in an orderly and logical manner



al
The order of the notes to the financial statements
The content and presentation of accounting policies
b
The amount of information to disclose for material transactions so that the economic substance of
the transaction can be adequately explained
lo
 Which accounting policies are significant to users of financial statements in understanding
specific transactions.
G
The focus on disclosing material and relevant information are likely to require on going application of
judgement. Entities may also consider engagement with their auditors and shareholders as part of their
A
process of determining which disclosures are material and relevant for the current reporting period.
C
Entities with interests in associates and/or joint ventures should note that the amendments may result in
a different presentation of items within OCI.
AC
253 | P a g e
FUTURE TRENDS IN SUSTAINABILITY REPORTING
Global Reporting Initiative (GRI) and international think tank and strategic advisory firm
SustainAbility have published the latest insights from the GRI Corporate Leadership Group
on Reporting 2025 which explored four key trends fundamental to the UN Sustainable
Development Goals: climate change, human rights, wealth inequality, and data and
technology.
ContentThe insights, captured in the report Future Trends in Sustainability Reporting provide
practical guidance to reporting organizations working to respond to the risks and opportunities that we
face on our path to a sustainable future.
The publication presents key information on each sustainability trend. Highlights from the report include:
Climate change: There was clear consensus in the group that it is not a matter of if business should or
can act on climate change but how, and how fast they deliver change. Companies are solution providers:
they are expected to be part of the solutions, from new energy models to efficiencies in the production and
x
distribution of goods. Furthermore, clear and ambitious science-based targets are needed, and greater
Bo
company and country engagement is expected.
Human rights: Expectations of corporate reporting on the many facets of human rights are growing:
human rights due diligence is now the expected minimum. Investors, rating agencies and regulators are
al
increasingly seeking this information. Key human rights issues set to receive greater focus include labor
rights and issues linked to natural resources. The group highlighted that modern slavery is a new form of
severe labor abuse and is leading to a broader movement from a focus on audit and compliance to due
b
diligence and collaboration. Conflict over natural resource wealth is also becoming a more recognized
lo
issue with land rights increasingly disputed.
G
Wealth inequality: Various challenges for business related to wealth inequality were discussed,
including radically increasing the share of value captured by workers and small-scale producers - for
instance, achieving living wages for laborers and living incomes for small-scale producers. Eliminating
economic gender inequality and gender discrimination is also becoming a key issue, as is tackling the
A
race-to-the-bottom on public governance to attract investment. Calls to end the era of tax havens are
increasingly expected, and breaking market concentration and addressing the unequal distribution of
C
power will become imperative.

AC
Data and Technology: When it comes to corporate reporting, data and technology are often seen as an
opportunity and a challenge in equal measure. Challenges include securing sufficient internal buy-in;
promoting the culture and creating awareness for good use of the internal systems that deliver high-
quality, comparable data; lack of availability of sensitive and confidential data; and a need for more
analytical tools to better understand data. Opportunities include online reporting; embedding
sustainability data into targets and performance management systems; monitoring and providing
feedback loops to data providers; and better understanding the dynamics and other demands on the data
to improve the information channels and lower the burden for colleagues.
254 | P a g e
EXPOSRURE DRAFTS
EXPOSURE DRAFT 2016/01

DEFINITION OF A BUSINESS AND ACCOUNTING
FOR PREVIOUSLY HELD INTERESTS
Background
Defining a business is important because the financial reporting requirements for the acquisition of a
business are different from the requirements for the purchase of a group of assets that does not constitute
a business.
The Post-Implementation Review (PIR) of IFRS 3 Business Combinations carried out by the IASB
identified difficulties in applying the definition of a business.
IFRS 3 resulted from a joint project between the Board and the FASB, and the requirements in IFRS and
x
USGAAP regarding business combinations are substantially converged. The proposed amendments to
Bo
IFRS 3 and the Proposed Accounting Standards Update Clarifying the Definition of a Business (issued by
the FASB in November 2015) are based on substantially converged tentative conclusions.
The IASB was also informed that there is diversity in practice in accounting for previously held interests
in the assets and liabilities of a joint operation in two types of transactions: those in which an entity
business that is a joint operation.

b al
obtains control of a business that is a joint operation and those in which it obtains joint control of a
lo
The proposed amendments to IFRS 3 Business Combinations and IFRS
11 Joint Arrangements are intended to clarify the definition of a business and the accounting for these
G
types of transactions involving joint operations.
IFRS 3 BUSINESS COMBINATIONS ACCOUNTING FOR PREVIOUSLY HELD INTERESTS

A
C
The IASB proposes to clarify that, when an entity obtains control of a business that is a joint operation,
the entity applies the requirements for a business combination achieved in stages, including remeasuring
previously held interests in the assets and liabilities of the joint operation to fair value.
AC
It is proposed to apply the amendment to business combinations for which the acquisition date is on or
after the beginning of the first annual reporting period beginning on or after the effective date of the
amendment, with early application permitted.
Definition of a business
The Board proposes:
a) To be considered a business, an acquired set of activities and assets must include, at a minimum,
an input and a substantive process that together have the ability to contribute to the creation of
outputs;
b) To remove the statement that a set of activities and assets is a business if market participants can
replace the missing elements and continue to produce outputs;
c) To revise the definition of outputs to focus on goods and services provided to customers and to
remove the reference to the ability to reduce costs;
d) To consider a set of activities and assets not to be a business if, at the transaction date,
substantially all of the fair value of the gross assets acquired is concentrated in a single
identifiable asset or group of similar identifiable assets;
e) To add guidance to help determine whether a substantive process has been acquired;
255 | P a g e
f) To add examples to help with the interpretation of what is considered a business; and
g) That an entity would not be required to apply the proposed amendments to transactions that
occur before the effective date of the amendments.
Minimum requirements to be a business
The Board decided that to be considered a business, an acquisition must include, at a minimum, an input
and a substantive process that together contribute to the ability to create outputs, i.e. it is not necessary
for all of the inputs and processes needed to create outputs to be acquired for the set of activities and
assets to be a business.
Market participant capable of replacing missing elements
It was noted that, currently, some sets of activities and assets may be considered to be a business for
market participants who could integrate the set of activities and assets into their existing processes.
However, the same set of activities and assets may not be considered a business from the perspective of
x
other market participants.
Bo
It is proposed that the ability of some market participants to integrate an acquired set of activities and
assets should not be considered in determining whether the acquisition is a business combination. The
Board believes that the assessment should be based on what has been acquired, rather than on how a
market participant could potentially integrate the acquired activities and assets.
b
set of assets and activities to be a business are met.
al
The proposed amendments would provide new tests to assess whether the minimum requirements for a
lo
Definition of output
G
It is proposed to narrow the definition of outputs to focus on goods and services provided to customers.
A
The proposed definition excludes:

C
a) Returns in the form of lower costs; and

b) Other economic benefits provided directly to investors or other owners, members or participants.
AC
This is consistent with how outputs are discussed in IFRS 15 Revenue from Contracts with Customers.
However, the Board decided to include in the definition other types of outputs due to the fact that not all
entities have revenues that are within the scope of IFRS 15.
The proposed changes to the definition of outputs would narrow the types of outputs to be considered.
Fair value of the assets acquired is concentrated in a single asset.
It is proposed to provide a screening test that will make it easier in some cases to determine, without
further analysis, that a set of activities and assets acquired does not constitute a business.
It is proposed that further assessment of whether a set of activities and assets is a business would not be
appropriate if substantially all of the fair value of the gross assets acquired is concentrated in a single
identifiable asset or group of similar identifiable assets.
The Board decided that it was not necessary to provide further guidance for application of the term
‗substantially all‘.
256 | P a g e
It is important to note that the proposed screening test refers to the fair value of the gross assets acquired
and not to the fair value of the total consideration paid or net assets. This is important, for example, when
the net assets acquired include a significant component of debt or liabilities.
Evaluating whether an acquired process is substantive
Rather than trying to develop a single definition of what a substantive process is, it is proposed to add
guidance to determine whether a process that has been acquired is substantive.
The clarifications propose two similar but distinct tests of acquired processes depending on whether the
acquired set of activities and assets has outputs.
a) The acquired set of activities and assets does not have outputs
In these cases, the definition of a business is met only if the inputs acquired include both an organised
workforce that performs a process that is critical to the creation of output and another input (or inputs)
that is (or are) intended to be developed into outputs. The Board believes that the intellectual capacity of
x
an organized workforce, i.e. their capacity to perform a process even if the process is not documented, is a
process.
Bo
b) The acquired set of activities and assets has outputs
When the acquired set of activities and assets has outputs, there is more evidence that the acquired set is a
of inputs acquired.
b al
business. Because inputs are already being converted into outputs, it is not important to consider the type
The IASB considers that it is only in some limited circumstances that an organised workforce is not
lo
required in order to conclude that the set of activities and assets is a business. These circumstances are:
G
a) The set has outputs; and

b) The acquired set includes a process (or a group of processes) that is unique or scarce, or is
difficult to replace.
A
IFRS 11 JOINT ARRANGEMENTS

C
Accounting for previously held interests

AC
The IFRS Interpretations Committee noted that there is diversity in practice in accounting for previously
held interests in the assets and liabilities of a joint operation when an investor obtains joint control of a
business that is a joint operation. The issue is whether an entity applies the principles on accounting for a
business combination achieved in stages to those previously held interests when the investors obtains
joint control.
The transaction subject to analysis is analogous to a transaction that results in an investment in an

associate becoming an investment in a joint venture and vice versa. As stated in IAS 28 Investment in
Associates and Joint Ventures, an investor does not apply the principles on accounting for a business
combination achieved in stages to those previously held interests.
The Board proposes that, when an investor obtains joint control of a business that is a joint operation, the
entity should not remeasure previously held interests in the assets and liabilities of the joint operation.
257 | P a g e
IFRS PRACTICE STATEMENT APPLICATION OF MATERIALITY

IN FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
Background
During various stages of its Disclosure Initiative project, the IASB has been informed that there are
difficulties around the practical application of materiality, with inappropriate assessments leading to
irrelevant information being included, and material information being excluded, from financial
statements. It has been suggested that a contributing factor is the lack of guidance in materiality in
IFRS.
The concept of materiality links to the objective of general purpose financial reporting, which is to provide
x
financial information about the reporting entity that is useful to existing and potential investors, lenders
and other creditors in making decisions about providing resources to the entity.
Bo
Whether information is material or not is a matter of judgement that depends on facts and circumstances
affecting each entity. The (draft) Practice Statement aims to illustrate the types of factors that
management should take into account when considering whether information is material or not. It is
Aspects of the Exposure Draft to comment

b al
important to note that materiality should be considered within the context of a specific entity.
lo
Form of the guidance
G
A Practice Statement is not a Standard. The IASB‘s reasoning for issuing guidance on applying the
concept of materiality in the financial statements in the form of a non-mandatory Practice Statement is
A
based on the following:

C
 The (draft) Practice Statement will help to promote a greater understanding of the role of
materiality in IFRS and how it should be applied in preparing financial statements
AC
 If mandatory guidance was issued in a Standard, concerns could arise about creating conflicts
with national legal frameworks
 The IASB would not prohibit an entity from providing additional information in order to meet
local requirements in a jurisdiction
 Issuing mandatory guidance in a Standard could risk appearing prescriptive an detract from the
need for judgement to be applied
 the IASB observed that issuing guidance as a separate non-mandatory document would help to
emphasise that the concept of materiality is pervasive throughout IFRS
 The IASB decided that a Practice Statement was preferable to educational material because it will
be subject to full due process (including public consultation) and it will be more accessible and
formal because it would be included in the IFRS Bound Volume.
258 | P a g e
Content of the (draft) Practice Statement
The (draft) Practice Statement proposes guidance in three main areas:
a. Characteristics of materiality
b. How to apply the concept of materiality in practice when presenting and disclosing
information in the financial statements
c. How to assess whether omissions and misstatements of information are material to the
The IASB has requested comments on:
 Whether any additional content should be included in the (draft) Practice Standard
 Whether the guidance will be understandable by, and helpful to, preparers of financial statements
 Whether there is any content with which respondents do not agree
 Whether any paragraphs/sections are unnecessary
x
 Whether any aspects of the guidance will conflict with any legal requirements related to
Bo
materiality within constituents‘ jurisdictions.
b al
lo
G
A
C
AC
259 | P a g e
CONCEPTUAL FRAMEWORK FOR FINANCIAL REPORTING

ED/2015/3 Conceptual Framework for Financial Reporting sets out the revised Conceptual Framework
structured into an introduction, eight chapters, and two appendices:
 Objective of general purpose financial reporting (GPFR)

 Qualitative characteristics of useful financial information
 General purpose financial statements (GPFS) and reporting entities
 Elements of financial statements
 Recognition and derecognition
 Measurement
 Presentation and disclosure
 Concepts of capital and capital maintenance1
x
The key proposals in each chapter are summarised below:
Bo
Introduction. The first section offers background information. It also describes the purpose of the
conceptual framework and its status within the hierarchy of IASB pronouncements. The ED explains that
the Conceptual Framework's primary purpose is to assist the IASB in developing and revising IFRSs (even
al
though it may be useful to parties other than the IASB) and that the framework does not override any
specific IFRS. Should the IASB decide to issue a new or revised pronouncement that is in conflict with the
framework, the IASB will highlight the fact and explain the reasons for the departure going forward.
b
lo
Chapter 1 - The objective of general purpose financial reporting. This is the first of the two
chapters that were finalised as part of the joint project with the FASB in 2010, so there are only limited
G
changes. In essence, the IASB's proposals in this chapter aim at giving prominence to the importance of
providing information that is needed to assess management's stewardship of the entity's resources.
A
Chapter 2 - Qualitative characteristics of useful financial information. This is the second of the
two chapters that were finalised as part of the joint project with the FASB in 2010 (published as Chapter 3
C
in the 2010 Conceptual Framework). Again, proposed changes are limited. However, the IASB proposes to
reintroduce an explicit reference to the notion of prudence and states that the exercise of prudence
AC
supports neutrality. Prudence is defined as the exercise of caution when making judgements under
conditions of uncertainty. The chapter also contains a proposed addition that would clarify that faithful
representation means representation of the substance of an economic phenomenon instead of
representation of its legal form only.
Chapter 3 - Financial Statements and the reporting entity.The ED states the objective of financial
statements (to provide information about an entity's assets, liabilities, equity, income and expenses that is
useful to financial statements users in assessing the prospects for future net cash inflows to the entity and
in assessing management's stewardship of the entity's resources) and sets out the going concern
assumption. Interestingly, the ED only mentions two statements explicitly: the statement of financial
position and the statement(s) of financial performance (the latter being the former statement of
comprehensive income); the statement of cash flows and the statement of changes in equity go
unmentioned. The chapter also discusses the definition of a reporting entity and the boundary of a
reporting entity. It also states the IASB's conviction that, generally, consolidated financial statements are
more likely to provide useful information to users of financial statements than unconsolidated financial
statements.
260 | P a g e
Chapter 4 - The elements of financial statements. The main focus of this chapter is on the
definitions of assets, liabilities, and equity as well as income and expenses. The definitions are quoted
below:
Asset. An asset is a present economic resource controlled by the entity as a result of past events. An
economic resource is a right that has the potential to produce economic benefits.
Liability. A liability is a present obligation of the entity to transfer an economic resource as a result of
past events.
Equity. Equity is the residual interest in the assets of the entity after deducting all its liabilities.
Income. Income is increases in assets or decreases in liabilities that result in increases in equity, other
than those relating to contributions from holders of equity claims.
Expenses. Expenses are decreases in assets or increases in liabilities that result in decreases in equity,
other than those relating to distributions to holders of equity claims.
x
Bo
Note that, other than in the DP, the IASB has backed away from changes in the definitions liabilities and
equity that would address the problems that arise in classifying instruments with characteristics of both
liabilities and equity. Exploring those problems has been transferred to the IASB's research project on
financial instruments with the characteristics of equity.
al
Chapter 5 - Recognition and derecognition. The ED states that only items that meet the definition
of an asset, a liability or equity are recognised in the statement of financial position and only items that
b
meet the definition of income or expenses are to be recognised in the statement(s) of financial
lo
performance. However, their recognition depends on three criteria: their recognition provides users of
financial statements with (1) relevant information about the asset or the liability and about any income,
expenses or changes in equity, (2) a faithful representation of the asset or the liability and of any income,
G
expenses or changes in equity, and (3) information that results in benefits exceeding the cost of providing
that information. Nevertheless, the ED also maintains that whether the information provided is useful to
users depends on the item and the specific facts and circumstances and requires judgement and possibly
A
varying recognition requirements between standards. Derecognition requirements as presented in the ED

are driven by two aims: the assets and liabilities retained after the transaction or other event that led to
C
derecognition must be presented faithfully and the change in the entity's assets and liabilities as a result of
that transaction or other event must also be presented faithfully. The ED also describes alternatives when
AC
it is not possible to achieve both aims.
Chapter 6 - Measurement. This chapter is dedicated to the description of different measurement bases
(historical cost and current value (fair value and value in use/fulfilment value)), the information that they
provide and their advantages and disadvantages. A table offers an overview of the information provided
by various measurement bases. The ED also sets out factors to consider when selecting a measurement
basis (relevance, faithful representation, enhancing qualitative characteristics, and factors specific to
initial measurement) and points out that consideration of the objective of financial reporting, the
qualitative characteristics of useful financial information and the cost constraint are likely to result in the
selection of different measurement bases for different assets, liabilities and items of income and expense.
Appendix A of the ED supplements Chapter 6 and describes cash-flow-based measurement techniques for
cases when a measure determined using a measurement basis cannot be observed.
Chapter 7 - Presentation and disclosure. In this chapter, the ED discusses concepts that determine
what information is included in the financial statements and how that information should be presented
and disclosed. The statement of statement of comprehensive income is newly described as "statement of
financial performance", however, the ED does not specify whether this statement should consist of a
single statement or two statements, it only requires that a total or subtotal for profit or loss must be
261 | P a g e
provided. Notably, the ED does not define profit or loss, thus the question of what goes into profit or loss
or into other comprehensive income is still unanswered.
Chapter 8 - Concepts of capital and capital maintenance. The proposals in this chapter were
taken over from the existing Conceptual Framework with minor changes for consistency of terminology.
The IASB states that it would consider revising the description and discussion of capital maintenance if it
were to carry out a future project on accounting for high inflation. However, it also states that no such
work is currently planned.
x
Bo
b al
lo
G
A
C
AC
262 | P a g e
TECHNICAL ARTICLES
Following are some important technical articles provided by the examining team of SBR. These are very
important from exam point of view.
1. MEASUREMENT
2. GIVING INVESTORS WHAT THEY NEED
3. THE DEFINITION AND DISCLOSURE OF CAPITAL
4. CONCEPTS OF PROFIT OR LOSS AND OTHER COMPREHENSIVE INCOME
5. WHAT DIFFERENTIATES PROFIT OR LOSS FROM OTHER COMPREHENSIVE INCOME?
6. WHEN DOES DEBT SEEM TO BE EQUITY?
x
Bo
b al
lo
G
A
C
AC
263 | P a g e
MEASUREMENT
The relevance of information provided by a particular measurement method depends on how it affects the
financial statements. The cost should be justified by the benefits of reporting that information to existing
and potential users. The different measures used should be the minimum necessary to provide relevant
information and there should be infrequent changes with any necessary changes clearly explained.
Further it makes sense for comparability and consistency purposes, to use the same method for initial and
subsequent measurement unless there is a good reason from not doing so.
The existing Conceptual Framework provides very little guidance on measurement, which constitutes a
serious gap in the Framework. A single measurement basis may not provide the most relevant
information to users and therefore IFRSs adopt a mixed measurement basis, which includes fair value,
historical cost, and net realisable value. Different information from different measurement bases may be
relevant in different circumstances. A particular measurement bases may be easier to understand, more
verifiable and less costly to implement. However, if different measurement bases are used, it can be
argued that the totals in financial statements have little meaning. Those that prefer a single measurement
ox
method favour the use of current values to provide the most relevant information.
A business that is profit orientated has processes to transform market input values (inventory for
lB
example) into market output values.(sales of finished products).Thus it makes sense that current values
should play a key role in measurement. Current market value would appear to be the most relevant
measure of assets and liabilities for financial reporting purposes.
ba
The IASB favour a mixed measurement approach whereby the most relevant measurement method is
selected. It appears that investors feel that this approach is consistent with how they analyse financial
lo
statements and that the problems of mixed measurement are outweighed by the greater relevance
achieved. In recent standards, it seems that the IASB felt that fair value would not provide the most
relevant information in all circumstances. For example, IFRS 9 requires the use of cost in some cases and
G
fair value in other cases, while IFRS 15 essentially applies cost allocation.
A factor to be considered when selecting a measurement basis is the degree of measurement uncertainty.
A
The Exposure Draft on the Conceptual Framework states that for some estimates, a high level of
measurement uncertainty may outweigh other factors to such an extent that the resulting information
C
may have little relevance. Most measurement is uncertain and requires estimation. For example,
recoverable value for impairment, depreciation estimates and fair value measures at level 2 and 3 under
AC
IFRS 13.Consequently, the IASB believes that the level of uncertainty associated with the measurement of
an item should be considered when assessing whether a particular measurement basis provides relevant
information.
Measurement uncertainty could be considered too great with the result that the entity may not recognise
the asset or liability. An example of this would be research activities. However, sometimes a measure with
a high degree of uncertainty provides the most relevant information about an item. For example, financial
instruments for which prices are not observable. The IASB thinks that the level of measurement
uncertainty that makes information lack relevance depends on the circumstances and can only be decided
when developing particular standards.
It would be easier if measurement bases were categorised as either historical cost or current value. The
Exposure Draft on the Conceptual Framework describes these two categories but also states that cash-
flow-based measurement techniques are generally used to estimate the measure of an asset or a liability as
part of a prescribed measurement basis. Cash-flow-based measurement can be used to customise
measurement bases, which can result in more relevant information but it may also be more difficult for
users to understand. As a result the Exposure Draft does not identify those techniques as a separate
category.
264 | P a g e
There are several areas of debate about measurement. For example, should any discussion of
measurement bases include the use of entry and exit values, entity-specific values and the role of deprival
value. Again should an entity‘s business model affect the measurement of its assets and liabilities. Many
would advocate that different measurement methods should be applied that are dependent both on the
nature of assets and liabilities and also, importantly, on how these are used in the business. For example,
property can be measured at historical cost or fair value depending upon the business model.
In order to meet the objective of financial reporting, information provided by a particular measurement
basis must be useful to users of financial statements. A measurement basis achieves this if the information
is relevant and faithfully represents what it essentially is supposed to represent. In addition, the
measurement basis needs to provide information that is comparable, verifiable, timely and
understandable. The IASB believes that when selecting a measurement basis, the amount is more relevant
if the way in which an asset or a liability contributes to future cash flows is considered. The IASB
considers that the way in which an asset or a liability contributes to future cash flows depends, in part, on
the nature of the business activities.
There are many different ways in which an asset or liability can be measured. Historical cost seems to be
the easiest of these measures but even here, complexity can arise where there is a deferred payment or a
x
payment, which involves an asset exchange. Subsequent accounting after initial recognition is not
Bo
necessarily straightforward with historical cost as such matters as impairment of assets have to be taken
into account and the latter is dependent upon rules, which can be sometimes subjective.
Current values have a variety of alternative valuation methods. These include market value, value-in-use
al
and fulfilment value. Of these various methods, there is less ambiguity around current market prices as
with any other measure of current value, there is likely to be specific rules in place to avoid inconsistency.
In the main, the details of how these different measurement methods are applied, are set out in each
accounting standard.
b
lo
G
A
C
AC
265 | P a g e
GIVING INVESTORS WHAT THEY NEED
Often the advice to investors is to focus upon cash and cash flow when analysing corporate reports.
However insufficient financial capital can cause liquidity problems and sufficiency of financial capital is
essential for growth. Discussion of the management of financial capital is normally linked with entities
that are subject to external capital requirements but it is equally important to those entities which do not
have regulatory obligations.
WHAT IS IT?
Financial capital is defined in various ways. The term has no accepted definition having been interpreted
as equity held by shareholders or equity plus debt capital including finance leases. This can obviously
affect the way in which ‗capital‘ is measured which has an impact on return on capital employed (ROCE).
An understanding of what an entity views as capital and its strategy for capital management is important
to all companies and not just banks and insurance companies. Users have diverse views of what is
ox
important in their analysis of capital. Some focus on historical invested capital, others on accounting
capital and others on market capitalisation.
lB
INVESTOR NEEDS
Investors have specific but different needs for information about capital depending upon their approach
ba
to the valuation of a business. If the valuation approach is based upon a dividend model, then shortage of
capital may have an impact upon future dividends. If ROCE is used for comparing the performance of
entities, then investors need to know the nature and quantity of the historical capital employed in the
lo
business. There is diversity in practice as to what different companies see as capital and how it is
managed.
G
There are various requirements for entities to disclose information about ‗capital‘. In drafting IFRS 7,
Financial Instruments: Disclosures, the IASB considered whether it should require disclosures about
capital. In assessing the risk profile of an entity, the management and level of an entity‘s capital is an
A
important consideration.
C
The IASB believes that disclosures about capital are useful for all entities, but they are not intended to
AC
replace disclosures required by regulators as their reasons for disclosure may differ from those of the
IASB. As an entity‘s capital does not relate solely to financial instruments, the IASB has included these
disclosures in IAS V1, Presentation of Financial Statements rather than IFRS 7. IFRS 7 requires some
specific disclosures about financial liabilities, it does not have similar requirements for equity
instruments.
The IASB considered whether the definition of ‗capital‘ is different from the definition of equity in IAS 32,
Financial Instruments; Presentation. In most cases disclosure capital would be the same as equity but it
might also include or exclude some elements. The disclosure of capital is intended to give entities the
ability to describe their view of the elements of capital if this is different from equity.
IAS 1 DISCLOSURES
As a result, IAS 1 requires an entity to disclose information that enables users to evaluate the entity‘s
objectives, policies and processes for managing capital. This objective is obtained by disclosing qualitative
and quantitative data. The former should include narrative information such as what the company
manages as capital, whether there are any external capital requirements and how those requirements are
incorporated into the management of capital.
266 | P a g e
Some entities regard some financial liabilities as part of capital whilst other entities regard capital as
excluding some components of equity for example those arising from cash flow hedges. The IASB decided
not to require quantitative disclosure of externally imposed capital requirements but rather decided that
there should be disclosure of whether the entity has complied with any external capital requirements and,
if not, the consequences of non-compliance. Further there is no requirement to disclose the capital targets
set by management and whether the entity has complied with those targets, or the consequences of any
non-compliance.
EXAMPLES
Examples of some of the disclosures made by entities include information as to how gearing is managed,
how capital is managed to sustain future product development and how ratios are used to evaluate the
appropriateness of its capital structure. An entity bases these disclosures on the information provided
internally to key management personnel.
If the entity operates in several jurisdictions with different external capital requirements such that an
aggregate disclosure of capital would not provide useful information, the entity may disclose separate
x
information for each separate capital requirement.
Bo
Besides the requirements of IAS 1, the IFRS Practice Statement Management Commentary suggests that
management should include forward-looking information in the commentary when it is aware of trends,
uncertainties or other factors that could affect the entity‘s capital resources.
COMPANIES ACT
b al
Additionally, some jurisdictions refer to capital disclosures as part of their legal requirements. In the UK,
Section 414 of the Companies Act 2006 deals with the contents of the Strategic Report and requires a
lo
‗balanced and comprehensive analysis‘ of the development and performance of the business during the
period and the position of the company at the end of the period.
G
The section further requires that to the extent necessary for an understanding of the development,
performance or position of the business, the strategic report should include an analysis using key
A
performance indicators. It makes sense that any analysis of a company‘s financial position should include
consideration of how much capital it has and its sufficiency for the company‘s needs.
C
The Financial Reporting Council Guidance on the Strategic Report suggests that comments should appear
AC
in the report on the entity‘s financing arrangements such as changes in net debt or the financing of long-
term liabilities.
CAPITALISATION TABLE
In addition to the annual report, an investor may find details of the entity‘s capital structure where the
entity is involved in a transaction, such as a sale of bonds or equities.
It is normal for an entity to produce a capitalisation table in a prospectus showing the effects of the
transactions on the capital structure. The table shows the ownership and debt interests in the entity but
may show potential funding sources, and the effect of any public offerings.
The capitalisation table may present the pro forma impact of events that will occur as a result of an
offering such as the automatic conversion of preferred stock, the issuance of common stock, or the use of
the offering proceeds for the repayment of debt or other purposes. The IASB does not require such a table
to be disclosed but it is often required by securities regulators.
267 | P a g e
For example, in the US, the table is used to calculate key operational metrics. Amedica Corporation
announced in February 2016 that it had ‗made significant advancements in its ongoing initiative toward
improving its capitalisation table, capitalisation, and operational structure‘.
It can be seen that information regarding an entity‘s capital structure is spread across several documents
including the management commentary, the notes to financial statements, interim accounts and any
document required by securities regulators.
DEBT AND EQUITY
Essentially there are two classes of capital reported in financial statements, namely debt and equity.
However, debt and equity instruments can have different levels of right, benefit and risks.
When an entity issues a financial instrument, it has to determine its classification either as debt or as
equity. The result of the classification can have a significant effect on the entity‘s reported results and
financial position. Liability classification impacts upon an entity‘s gearing ratios and results in any
payments being treated as interest and charged to earnings. Equity classification may be seen as diluting
ox
existing equity interests.
IAS 32 sets out the nature of the classification process but the standard is principle based and sometimes
lB
the outcomes are surprising to users. IAS 32 does not look to the legal form of an instrument but focuses
on the contractual obligations of the instrument.
ba
IAS 32 considers the substance of the financial instrument, applying the definitions to the instrument‘s
contractual rights and obligations. The variety of instruments issued by entities makes this classification
difficult with the application of the principles occasionally resulting in instruments that seem like equity
being accounted for as liabilities. Recent developments in the types of financial instruments issued have
lo
added more complexity to capital structures with the resultant difficulties in interpretation and
understanding.
G
The IASB has undertaken a research project with the aim of improving accounting for financial
instruments that have characteristics of both liabilities and equity. The IASB has a major challenge in
A
determining the best way to report the effects of recent innovations in capital structure.
C
DIVERSITY AND DIFFICULTY

AC
There is a diversity of thinking about capital, which is not surprising given the issues with defining equity,
the difficulty in locating sources of information about capital and the diversity of business models in an
economy.
Capital needs are very specific to the business and are influenced by many factors such as debt covenants,
and preservation of debt ratings. The variety and inconsistency of capital disclosures does not help the
decision making process of investors. Therefore the details underlying a company‘s capital structure are
essential to the assessment of any potential change in an entity‘s financial flexibility and value.
268 | P a g e
THE DEFINITION AND DISCLOSURE OF CAPITAL
Why does it matter anyway?
This article is useful to those candidates studying for SBR, Strategic Business Reporting. It is structured in
two parts: first, it considers what might be included as the capital of a company and, second, why this
distinction is important for the analysis of financial information.
Essentially, there are two classes of capital reported in financial statements: debt and equity. However,
debt and equity instruments can have different levels of right, benefit and risks. When an entity issues a
financial instrument, it has to determine its classification either as debt or as equity. The result of the
classification can have a significant effect on the entity‘s reported results and financial position. Liability
classification impacts upon an entity‘s gearing ratios and results in any payments being treated as interest
and charged to earnings. Equity classification may be seen as diluting existing equity interests.
IAS 32, Financial Instruments: Presentation sets out the nature of the classification process but the
x
standard is principle-based and sometimes the outcomes that result from its application are surprising to
Bo
users. IAS 32 does not look to the legal form of an instrument but focuses on the contractual obligations of
the instrument. IAS 32 considers the substance of the financial instrument, applying the definitions to the
instrument‘s contractual rights and obligations.
MORE COMPLEXITY b al
The variety of instruments issued by entities makes this classification difficult with the application of the
principles occasionally resulting in instruments that seem like equity being accounted for as liabilities.
lo
Recent developments in the types of financial instruments issued have added more complexity to capital
structures with the resultant difficulties in interpretation and understanding. Consequently, the
G
classification of capital is subjective which has implications for the analysis of financial statements.
To avoid this subjectivity, investors are often advised to focus upon cash and cash flow when analysing
A
corporate reports. However, insufficient financial capital can cause liquidity problems and sufficiency of
financial capital is essential for growth. Discussion of the management of financial capital is normally
C
linked with entities that are subject to external capital requirements, but it is equally important to those
entities that do not have regulatory obligations.
AC
Financial capital is defined in various ways but has no widely accepted definition having been interpreted
as equity held by shareholders or equity plus debt capital including finance leases. This can obviously
affect the way in which capital is measured, which has an impact on return on capital employed (ROCE).
An understanding of what an entity views as capital and its strategy for capital management is important
to all companies and not just banks and insurance companies. Users have diverse views of what is
important in their analysis of capital. Some focus on historical invested capital, others on accounting
capital and others on market capitalisation.
Investors have specific but different needs for information about capital depending upon their approach
to the valuation of a business. If the valuation approach is based upon a dividend model, then shortage of
capital may have an impact upon future dividends. If ROCE is used for comparing the performance of
entities, then investors need to know the nature and quantity of the historical capital employed in the
business. There is diversity in practice as to what different companies see as capital and how it is
managed.
There are various requirements for entities to disclose information about ‗capital‘. In drafting IFRS 7,
Financial Instruments: Disclosures, the IASB considered whether it should require disclosures about
capital. In assessing the risk profile of an entity, the management and level of an entity‘s capital is an
269 | P a g e
important consideration. The IASB believes that disclosures about capital are useful for all entities, but
they are not intended to replace disclosures required by regulators as their reasons for disclosure may
differ from those of the IASB. As an entity‘s capital does not relate solely to financial instruments, the
IASB has included these disclosures in IAS 1, Presentation of Financial Statements rather than IFRS 7.
IFRS 7 requires some specific disclosures about financial liabilities; it does not have similar requirements
for equity instruments.
The IASB considered whether the definition of capital is different from the definition of equity in IAS 32.
In most cases, capital would be the same as equity but it might also include or exclude some other
elements. The disclosure of capital is intended to give entities the ability to describe their view of the
elements of capital if this is different from equity.
As a result, IAS 1 requires an entity to disclose information that enables users to evaluate the entity‘s
objectives, policies and processes for managing capital. This objective is obtained by disclosing qualitative
and quantitative data. The former should include narrative information such as what the company
manages as capital, whether there are any external capital requirements and how those requirements are
incorporated into the management of capital. Some entities regard some financial liabilities as part of
capital, while other entities regard capital as excluding some components of equity – for example, those
ox
arising from cash flow hedges.
The IASB decided not to require quantitative disclosure of externally imposed capital requirements but
lB
rather decided that there should be disclosure of whether the entity has complied with any external capital
requirements and, if not, the consequences of non-compliance. Further, there is no requirement to
disclose the capital targets set by management and whether the entity has complied with those targets, or
ba
the consequences of any non-compliance.
Examples of some of the disclosures made by entities include information as to how gearing is managed,
lo
how capital is managed to sustain future product development and how ratios are used to evaluate the
appropriateness of its capital structure. An entity bases these disclosures on the information provided
G
internally to key management personnel. If the entity operates in several jurisdictions with different
external capital requirements, such that an aggregate disclosure of capital would not provide useful
information, the entity may disclose separate information for each separate capital requirement.
A
TRENDS
C
Besides the requirements of IAS 1, the IFRS Practice Statement Management Commentary suggests that
AC
management should include forward-looking information in the commentary when it is aware of trends,
uncertainties or other factors that could affect the entity‘s capital resources. Additionally, some
jurisdictions refer to capital disclosures as part of their legal requirements.
In the UK, Section 414 of the Companies Act 2006 deals with the contents of the Strategic Report and
requires a ‗balanced and comprehensive analysis‘ of the development and performance of the business
during the period and the position of the company at the end of the period. The section further requires
that to the extent necessary for an understanding of the development, performance or position of the
business, the strategic report should include an analysis using key performance indicators. It makes sense
that any analysis of a company‘s financial position should include consideration of how much capital it
has and its sufficiency for the company‘s needs. The Financial Reporting Council Guidance on the
Strategic Report suggests that comments should appear in the report on the entity‘s financing
arrangements such as changes in net debt or the financing of long-term liabilities.
In addition to the annual report, an investor may find details of the entity‘s capital structure where the
entity is involved in a transaction, such as a sale of bonds or equities. It is normal for an entity to produce
a capitalisation table in a prospectus showing the effects of the transactions on the capital structure. The
table shows the ownership and debt interests in the entity but may show potential funding sources and
the effect of any public offerings. The capitalisation table may present the pro forma impact of events that
270 | P a g e
will occur as a result of an offering such as the automatic conversion of preferred stock, the issuance of
common stock, or the use of the offering proceeds for the repayment of debt or other purposes.
The IASB does not require such a table to be disclosed but it is often required by securities regulators. For
example, in the USA, the table is used to calculate key operational metrics. Amedica Corporation
announced in February 2016 that it had ‗made significant advancements in its ongoing initiative toward
improving its capitalization table, capitalization, and operational structure‘.
It can be seen that information regarding an entity‘s capital structure is spread across several documents
including the management commentary, the notes to financial statements, interim accounts and any
document required by securities regulators.
The IASB has undertaken a research project with the aim of improving the accounting for financial
instruments that have characteristics of both liabilities and equity. This is likely to be a major challenge in
determining the best way to report the effects of recent innovations in capital structure.
There is a diversity of thinking about capital that is not surprising given the issues with defining equity,
x
the difficulty in locating sources of information about capital and the diversity of business models in an
economy. Capital needs are very specific to the business and are influenced by many factors, such as debt
Bo
covenants and preservation of debt ratings. The variety and inconsistency of capital disclosures does not
help the decision making process of investors.
Therefore, the details underlying a company‘s capital structure are essential to the assessment of any
al
potential change in an entity‘s financial flexibility and value. An appreciation of these issues and their
significance is important to candidates studying for SBR.
b
lo
G
A
C
AC
271 | P a g e
CONCEPTS OF PROFIT OR LOSS AND OTHER
COMPREHENSIVE INCOME
This article explains the current rules and the conceptual debate as to where in the statement of
comprehensive income, profits and losses should be recognised – ie when should they be recognised in
profit or loss and when in the other comprehensive income. Further, it explores the debate as to whether
it is appropriate to recognise profits or losses twice!
The performance of a company is reported in the statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive
income. IAS 1, Presentation of Financial Statements, defines profit or loss as ‗the total of income less
expenses, excluding the components of other comprehensive income‘. Other comprehensive income (OCI)
is defined as comprising ‗items of income and expense (including reclassification adjustments) that are
not recognised in profit or loss as required or permitted by other IFRSs‘. Total comprehensive income is
defined as ‗the change in equity during a period resulting from transactions and other events, other than
those changes resulting from transactions with owners in their capacity as owners‘.
ox
It is a myth, and simply incorrect, to state that only realised gains are included in profit or loss (P/L) and
that only unrealised gains and losses are included in the OCI. For example, gains on the revaluation of
land and buildings accounted for in accordance with IAS 16, Property Plant and Equipment (IAS 16 PPE),
lB
are recognised in OCI and accumulate in equity in Other Components of Equity (OCE). On the other
hand, gains on the revaluation of land and buildings accounted for in accordance with IAS 40, Investment
Properties, are recognised in P/L and are part of the Retained Earnings (RE). Both such gains are
ba
unrealised. The same point could be made with regard to the gains and losses on the financial asset of
equity investments. If such financial assets are designated in accordance with IFRS 9, Financial Instruments
(IFRS 9), at inception as Fair Value Through Other Comprehensive Income (FVTOCI) then the gains and
losses are recognised in OCI and accumulated in equity in OCE. Whereas if management decides not to
lo
make this election, then the investment will by default be designated and accounted for as Fair Value
Through Profit or Loss (FVTP&L) and the gains and losses are recognised in P/L and become part of RE.
G
There is at present no overarching accounting theory that justifies or explains in which part of the
statement gains and losses should be reported. The IASB‘s Conceptual Framework for Financial
A
Reporting is silent on the matter. So rather than have a clear principles based approach what we currently
have is a rules based approach to this issue. It is down to individual accounting standards to direct when
C
gains and losses are to be reported in OCI. This is clearly an unsatisfactory approach. It is confusing for
users.
AC
In July 2013 the International Accounting Standards Board (IASB) published a discussion paper on its
Conceptual Framework for Financial Reporting. This addressed the issue of where to recognise gains and
losses. It suggests that the P/L should provide the primary source of information about the return an
entity has made on its economic resources in a period. Accordingly the P/L should recognise the results of
transactions, consumption and impairments of assets and fulfilment of liabilities in the period in which
they occur. In addition the P/L would also recognise changes in the cost of assets and liabilities as well as
any gains or losses resulting from their initial recognition. The role of the OCI would then be to support
the P/L. Gains and losses would only be recognised in OCI if it made the P&L more relevant. In my view
whilst this may be an improvement on the current absence of any guidance it does not provide the clarity
and certainty users crave.
Recycling (the reclassification from equity to P&L)
Now let us consider the issue of recycling. This is where gains or losses are reclassified from equity to P/L
as a reclassification adjustment. In other words gains or losses are first recognised in the OCI and then in
a later accounting period also recognised in the P/L. In this way the gain or loss is reported in the total
comprehensive income of two accounting periods and in colloquial terms is said to be recycled as it is
272 | P a g e
recognised twice. At present it is down to individual accounting standards to direct when gains and losses
are to be reclassified from equity to P/L as a reclassification adjustment. So rather than have a clear
principles based approach on recycling what we currently have is a rules based approach to this issue.
This is clearly, again, an unsatisfactory approach but also as we shall see one addressed by the July 2013
IASB discussion paper on its Conceptual Framework for Financial Reporting
IAS 21, The Effects of Changes in Foreign Exchange Rates (IAS 21), is one example of a standard that
requires gains and losses to be reclassified from equity to P/L as a reclassification adjustment. When a
group has an overseas subsidiary a group exchange difference will arise on the re-translation of the
subsidiary‘s goodwill and net assets. In accordance with IAS 21 such exchange differences are recognised
in OCI and so accumulate in OCE. On the disposal of the subsidiary, IAS 21 requires that the net
cumulative balance of group exchange differences be reclassified from equity to P&L as a reclassification
adjustment – ie the balance of the group exchange differences in OCE is transferred to P/L to form part of
the profit on disposal.
IAS 16 PPE is one example of a standard that prohibits gains and losses to be reclassified from equity to
P/L as a reclassification adjustment. If we consider land that cost $10m which is treated in accordance
x
with IAS 16 PPE. If the land is subsequently revalued to $12m, then the gain of $2m is recognised in OCI
and will be taken to OCE. When in a later period the asset is sold for $13m, IAS 16 PPE specifically
Bo
requires that the profit on disposal recognised in the P/L is $1m – ie the difference between the sale
proceeds of $13m and the carrying value of $12m. The previously recognised gain of $2m is not
recycled/reclassified back to P/L as part of the gain on disposal. However the $2m balance in the OCE
reserve is now redundant as the asset has been sold and the profit is realised. Accordingly, there will be a
Double entry
b al
transfer in the Statement of Changes in Equity, from the OCE of $2m into RE.
lo
For those who love the double entry let me show you the purchase, the revaluation, the disposal and the
transfer to RE in this way.
G
A
C
AC
If IAS 16 PPE allowed the reclassification from equity to P&L as a reclassification adjustment, the profit
on disposal recognised in P&L would be $3m including the $2m reclassified from equity to P&L and the
last two double entries above replaced with the following.
273 | P a g e
IFRS 9 also prohibits the recycling of the gains and losses on FVTOCI investments to P/L on disposal. The
no reclassification rule in both IAS 16 PPE and IFRS 9 means that such gains on those assets are only ever
reported once in the statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income – ie are only included
once in total comprehensive income. However many users, it appears, rather ignore the total
comprehensive income and the OCI and just base their evaluation of a company‘s performance on the
P/L. These users then find it strange that gains that have become realised from transactions in the
accounting period are not fully reported in the P/L of the accounting period. As such we can see the
argument in favour of reclassification. With no reclassification the earnings per share will never fully
include the gains on the sale of PPE and FVTOCI investments.
ox
The following extract from the statement of comprehensive income summarises the current accounting
treatment for which gains and losses are required to be included in OCI and, as required, discloses which
gains and losses can and cannot be reclassified back to profit and loss.
lB
Extract from the statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income
ba
lo
G
A
C
AC
274 | P a g e
The future of reclassification
In the July 2013 discussion paper on the Conceptual Framework for Financial Reporting the role of the
OCI and the reclassification from equity to P/L is debated.
No OCI and no reclassification
It can be argued that reclassification should simply be prohibited. This would free the statement of profit
or loss and other comprehensive income from the need to formally to classify gains and losses between
P/L and OCI. This would reduce complexity and gains and losses could only ever be recognised once.
There would still remain the issue of how to define the earnings in earnings per share, a ratio loved by
investors, as clearly total comprehensive income would contain too many gains and losses that were non-
operational, unrealised, outside the control of management and not relating to the accounting period.
Narrow approach to the OCI
Another suggestion is that the OCI should be restricted, should adopt a narrow approach. On this basis
x
only bridging and mismatch gains and losses should be included in OCI and be reclassified from equity to
Bo
P/L.
A revaluation surplus on a financial asset classified as FVTOCI is a good example of a bridging gain. The
asset is accounted for at fair value on the statement of financial position but effectively at cost in P/L. As
such, by recognising the revaluation surplus in OCI, the OCI is acting as a bridge between the statement of
al
financial position and the P/L. On disposal reclassification ensures that the amount recognised in P/L will
be consistent with the amounts that would be recognised in P/L if the financial asset had been measured
at amortised cost.
b
lo
The effective gain or loss on a cash flow hedge of a future transaction is an example of a mismatch gain or
loss as it relates to a transaction in a future accounting period so needs to be carried forward so that it can
G
be matched in the P/L of a future accounting period. Only by recognising the effective gain or loss in OCI
and allowing it to be reclassified from equity to P/L can users to see the results of the hedging
relationship.
A
Broad approach to the OCI

C
A third proposition is for the OCI to adopt a broad approach, by also including transitory gains and losses.
AC
The IASB would decide in each IFRS whether a transitory remeasurement should be subsequently
recycled.
Examples of transitory gains and losses are those that arise on the remeasurement of defined benefit
pension funds and revaluation surpluses on PPE.
Conclusion
Whilst the IASB has not yet determined which approach will be adopted, its chairman Hans Hoogervorst
has gone on the record as saying ‗It is absolutely vital that the P/L contains all information that can be
relevant to investors and that nothing of importance gets left out… and… the IASB should be very
disciplined in its use of OCI as resorting to OCI too easily would undermine the credibility of net income
so the OCI should only be used as an instrument of last resort‘.
275 | P a g e
WHAT DIFFERENTIATES PROFIT OR LOSS FROM OTHER
COMPREHENSIVE INCOME?
The purpose of the statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income (OCI) is to show an
entity‘s financial performance in a way that is useful to a wide range of users so that they may attempt to
assess the future net cash inflows of an entity. The statement should be classified and aggregated in a
manner that makes it understandable and comparable. IFRS currently requires that the statement be
presented as either one statement, being a combined statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive
income or two statements, being the statement of profit or loss and the statement of profit or loss and
other comprehensive income. An entity has to show separately in OCI, those items which would be
reclassified (recycled) to profit or loss and those items which would never be reclassified (recycled) to
profit or loss. The related tax effects have to be allocated to these sections.
Profit or loss includes all items of income or expense (including reclassification adjustments) except those
items of income or expense that are recognised in OCI as required or permitted by IFRS. Reclassification
adjustments are amounts recycled to profit or loss in the current period that were recognised in OCI in the
current or previous periods. An example of items recognised in OCI that may be reclassified to profit or
ox
loss are foreign currency gains on the disposal of a foreign operation and realised gains or losses on cash
flow hedges. Those items that may not be reclassified are changes in a revaluation surplus under IAS 16,
Property, Plant and Equipment, and actuarial gains and losses on a defined benefit plan under IAS 19,
lB
Employee Benefits.
However, there is a general lack of agreement about which items should be presented in profit or loss and
ba
in OCI. The interaction between profit or loss and OCI is unclear, especially the notion of reclassification
and when or which OCI items should be reclassified. A common misunderstanding is that the distinction
is based upon realised versus unrealised gains. This lack of a consistent basis for determining how items
lo
should be presented has led to an inconsistent use of OCI in IFRS. It may be difficult to deal with OCI on a
conceptual level since the IASB are finding it difficult to find a sound conceptual basis. However, there is
G
urgent need for some guidance around this issue.
Opinions vary but there is a feeling that OCI has become a ‗dumping ground‘ for anything controversial
A
because of a lack of clear definition of what should be included in the statement. Many users are thought
to ignore OCI as the changes reported are not caused by the operating flows used for predictive purposes.
C
Financial performance is not defined in the Conceptual Framework but could be viewed as reflecting the
value the entity has generated in the period and this can be assessed from other elements of the financial
AC
statements and not just the statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income. Examples would
be the statement of cash flows and disclosures relating to operating segments. The presentation in profit
or loss and OCI should allow a user to depict financial performance including the amount, timing and
uncertainty of the entity‘s future net cash inflows and how efficiently and effectively the entity‘s
management have discharged their duties regarding the resources of the entity.
Reclassification: for and against
There are several arguments for and against reclassification. If reclassification ceased, then there would
be no need to define profit or loss, or any other total or subtotal in profit or loss, and any presentation
decisions can be left to specific IFRSs. It is argued that reclassification protects the integrity of profit or
loss and provides users with relevant information about a transaction that occurred in the period.
Additionally, it can improve comparability where IFRS permits similar items to be recognised in either
profit or loss or OCI.
Those against reclassification argue that the recycled amounts add to the complexity of financial
reporting, may lead to earnings management and the reclassification adjustments may not meet the
definitions of income or expense in the period as the change in the asset or liability may have occurred in
a previous period.
276 | P a g e
The original logic for OCI was that it kept income-relevant items that possessed low reliability from
contaminating the earnings number. Markets rely on profit or loss and it is widely used. The OCI figure is
crucial because it can distort common valuation techniques used by investors, such as the price/earnings
ratio. Thus, profit or loss needs to contain all information relevant to investors. Misuse of OCI would
undermine the credibility of net income. The use of OCI as a temporary holding for cash flow hedging
instruments and foreign currency translation is non-controversial.
However, other treatments such the policy of IFRS 9 to allow value changes in equity investments to go
through OCI, are not accepted universally.
US GAAP will require value changes in all equity investments to go through profit or loss. Accounting for
actuarial gains and losses on defined benefit schemes are presented through OCI and certain large US
corporations have been hit hard with the losses incurred on these schemes. The presentation of these
items in OCI would have made no difference to the ultimate settled liability but if they had been presented
in profit or loss, the problem may have been dealt with earlier. An assumption that an unrealised loss has
little effect on the business is an incorrect one.
x
The Discussion Paper on the Conceptual Framework considers three approaches to profit or loss and
reclassification. The first approach prohibits reclassification. The other approaches, the narrow and broad
Bo
approaches, require or permit reclassification. The narrow approach allows recognition in OCI for
bridging items or mismatched remeasurements. While the broad approach has an additional category of
‗transitory measurements‘ (for example, remeasurement of a defined benefit obligation) which would
allow the IASB greater flexibility. The narrow approach significantly restricts the types of items that would
IFRSs.
b al
be eligible to be presented in OCI and gives the IASB little discretion when developing or amending
A bridging item arises where the IASB determines that the statement of comprehensive income would
lo
communicate more relevant information about financial performance if profit or loss reflected a different
measurement basis from that reflected in the statement of financial position For example, if a debt
G
instrument is measured at fair value in the statement of financial position, but is recognised in profit or
loss using amortised cost, then amounts previously reported in OCI should be reclassified into profit or
loss on impairment or disposal of the debt instrument. The IASB argues that this is consistent with the
amounts that would be recognised in profit or loss if the debt instrument were to be measured at
A
amortised cost.
C
A mismatched remeasurement arises where an item of income or expense represents an economic

AC
phenomenon so incompletely that, in the opinion of the IASB, presenting that item in profit or loss would
provide information that has little relevance in assessing the entity‘s financial performance. An example of
this is when a derivative is used to hedge a forecast transaction; changes in the fair value of the derivative
may arise before the income or expense resulting from the forecast transaction. The argument is that
before the results of the derivative and the hedged item can be matched together, any gains or losses
resulting from the remeasurement of the derivative, to the extent that the hedge is effective and qualifies
for hedge accounting, should be reported in OCI. Subsequently, those gains or losses are reclassified into
profit or loss when the forecast transaction affects profit or loss. This allows users to see the results of the
hedging relationship.
The IASB‘s preliminary view is that any requirement to present a profit or loss total or subtotal could also
result in some items being reclassified. The commonly suggested attributes for differentiation between
profit or loss and OCI (realised/unrealised, frequency of occurrence, operating/non-operating,
measurement certainty/uncertainty, realisation in the short/long-term or outside management control)
are difficult to distil into a set of principles.
Therefore, the IASB is suggesting two broad principles, namely:
277 | P a g e
(a) Profit or loss provides the primary source of information about the return an entity has made on its
economic resources in a period.
(b) To support profit or loss, OCI should only be used if it makes profit or loss more relevant.
The IASB feels that changes in cost-based measures and gains or losses resulting from initial recognition
should not be presented in OCI and that the results of transactions, consumption and impairments of
assets and fulfilment of liabilities should be recognised in profit or loss in the period in which they occur.
As a performance measure, profit or loss is more used although there are a number of other performance
measures derived from the statement of profit or loss and OCI.
ox
lB
ba
lo
G
A
C
AC
278 | P a g e
WHEN DOES DEBT SEEM TO BE EQUITY?

The difference between debt and equity in an entity‘s statement of financial position is not easy to
distinguish for preparers of financial statements. Many financial instruments have both features with the
result that this can lead to inconsistency of reporting.
The International Accounting Standards Board (IASB) agreed with respondents from its public
consultation on its agenda (December 2012 report) that it needs greater clarity in its definitions of assets
and liabilities for debt instruments. This should therefore help eliminate some uncertainty when
accounting for assets and financial liabilities or non-financial liabilities. The respondents felt that defining
the nature of liabilities would advance the IASB‘s thinking on distinguishing between financial
instruments that should be classified as equity and those instruments that should be classified as
liabilities.
The objective of IAS 32, Presentation is to establish principles for presenting financial instruments as
liabilities or equity and for offsetting financial assets and liabilities. The classification of a financial
instrument by the issuer as either debt or equity can have a significant impact on the entity‘s gearing ratio,
x
reported earnings, and debt covenants. Equity classification can avoid such impact but may be perceived
Bo
negatively if it is seen as diluting existing equity interests. The distinction between debt and equity is also
relevant where an entity issues financial instruments to raise funds to settle a business combination using
cash or as part consideration in a business combination.
Understanding the nature of the classification rules and potential effects is critical for management and
al
must be borne in mind when evaluating alternative financing options. Liability classification normally
results in any payments being treated as interest and charged to earnings, which may affect the entity's
ability to pay dividends on its equity shares.
b
lo
The key feature of debt is that the issuer is obliged to deliver either cash or another financial asset to the
holder. The contractual obligation may arise from a requirement to repay principal or interest or
G
dividends. Such a contractual obligation may be established explicitly or indirectly but through the terms
of the agreement. For example, a bond that requires the issuer to make interest payments and redeem the
bond for cash is classified as debt. In contrast, equity is any contract that evidences a residual interest in
A
the entity‘s assets after deducting all of its liabilities. A financial instrument is an equity instrument only if
the instrument includes no contractual obligation to deliver cash or another financial asset to another
C
entity, and if the instrument will or may be settled in the issuer's own equity instruments.
AC
For instance, ordinary shares, where all the payments are at the discretion of the issuer, are classified as
equity of the issuer. The classification is not quite as simple as it seems. For example, preference shares
required to be converted into a fixed number of ordinary shares on a fixed date, or on the occurrence of an
event that is certain to occur, should be classified as equity.
A contract is not an equity instrument solely because it may result in the receipt or delivery of the entity‘s
own equity instruments. The classification of this type of contract is dependent on whether there is
variability in either the number of equity shares delivered or variability in the amount of cash or financial
assets received. A contract that will be settled by the entity receiving or delivering a fixed number of its
own equity instruments in exchange for a fixed amount of cash, or another financial asset, is an equity
instrument. This has been called the ‗fixed for fixed‘ requirement. However, if there is any variability in
the amount of cash or own equity instruments that will be delivered or received, then such a contract is a
financial asset or liability as applicable.
For example, where a contract requires the entity to deliver as many of the entity‘s own equity
instruments as are equal in value to a certain amount, the holder of the contract would be indifferent
whether it received cash or shares to the value of that amount. Thus, this contract would be treated as
debt.
279 | P a g e
Other factors that may result in an instrument being classified as debt are:
 Is redemption at the option of the instrument holder?

 Is there a limited life to the instrument?
 Is redemption triggered by a future uncertain event that is beyond the control of both the holder
and issuer of the instrument?
 Are dividends non-discretionary?
Similarly, other factors that may result in the instrument being classified as equity are whether the shares
are non-redeemable, whether there is no liquidation date or where the dividends are discretionary.
The classification of the financial instrument as either a liability or as equity is based on the principle of
substance over form. Two exceptions from this principle are certain puttable instruments meeting specific
criteria and certain obligations arising on liquidation. Some instruments have been structured with the
intention of achieving particular tax, accounting or regulatory outcomes, with the effect that their
substance can be difficult to evaluate.
ox
The entity must make the decision as to the classification of the instrument at the time that the
instrument is initially recognised. The classification is not subsequently changed based on changed
circumstances. For example, this means that a redeemable preference share, where the holder can request
lB
redemption, is accounted for as debt even though legally it may be a share of the issuer.
In determining whether a mandatorily redeemable preference share is a financial liability or an equity

ba
instrument, it is necessary to examine the particular contractual rights attached to the instrument's
principal and return elements. The critical feature that distinguishes a liability from an equity instrument
is the fact that the issuer does not have an unconditional right to avoid delivering cash or another
financial asset to settle a contractual obligation. Such a contractual obligation could be established
lo
explicitly or indirectly. However, the obligation must be established through the terms and conditions of
the financial instrument. Economic necessity does not result in a financial liability being classified as a
G
liability. Similarly, a restriction on the ability of an entity to satisfy a contractual obligation, such as the
company not having sufficient distributable profits or reserves, does not negate the entity's contractual
obligation.
A
Some instruments are structured to contain elements of both a liability and equity in a single instrument.
C
Such instruments – for example, bonds that are convertible into a fixed number of equity shares and carry
interest – are accounted for as separate liability and equity components. 'Split accounting' is used to
AC
measure the liability and the equity components upon initial recognition of the instrument. This method
allocates the fair value of the consideration for the compound instrument into its liability and equity
components. The fair value of the consideration in respect of the liability component is measured at the
fair value of a similar liability that does not have any associated equity conversion option. The equity
component is assigned the residual amount.
IAS 32 requires an entity to offset a financial asset and financial liability in the statement of financial
position only when the entity currently has a legally enforceable right of set-off and intends either to settle
the asset and liability on a net basis or to realise the asset and settle the liability simultaneously. An
amendment to IAS 32 has clarified that the right of set-off must not be contingent on a future event and
must be immediately available. It also must be legally enforceable for all the parties in the normal course
of business, as well as in the event of default, insolvency or bankruptcy. Netting agreements, where the
legal right of offset is only enforceable on the occurrence of some future event – such as default of a party
– do not meet the offsetting requirements.
Rights issues can still be classified as equity when the price is denominated in a currency other than the
entity‘s functional currency. The price of the right is denominated in currencies other than the issuer‘s
functional currency, when the entity is listed in more than one jurisdiction or is required to do so by law
280 | P a g e
or regulation. A fixed price in a non-functional currency would normally fail the fixed number of shares
for a fixed amount of cash requirement in IAS 32 to be treated as an equity instrument. As a result, it is
treated as an exception in IAS 32 and therefore treated as equity.
Two measurement categories exist for financial liabilities: fair value through profit or loss (FVTPL) and
amortised cost. Financial liabilities held for trading are measured at FVTPL, and all other financial
liabilities are measured at amortised cost unless the fair value option is applied.
The IASB and FASB have been working on a project to replace IAS 32 and converge IFRS and US GAAP
for a number of years. The ‗Financial instruments with characteristics of equity‘ project (‗FICE‘) resulted
in a discussion paper in 2008, but has been put on hold.
x
Bo
b al
lo
G
A
C
AC
281 | P a g e
INTEGRATED REPORTING <IR>
Introduction
In 2013, the International Integrated Reporting Council (IIRC) released a framework for integrated
reporting. This followed a three-month global consultation and trials in 25 countries.
The framework establishes principles and concepts that govern the overall content of an integrated report.
An integrated report sets out how the organisation‘s strategy, governance, performance and prospects,
which lead to the creation of value. There is no benchmarking for the above matters and the report is
aimed primarily at the private sector but it could be adapted for public sector and not-for-profit
organisations.
The aim is to give investors and shareholders a broader picture of how companies make
their money and their prospects in the short, medium and long term.
ox
Designed to be an approach to reporting which accurately conveys an organisation’s business model
and its sources of value creation over time, the IR model recognises six types of capital, with these being
lB
consumed by a business and also created as part of its business processes. It is the way that capitals are
consumed, transformed and created which is at the heart of the IR model.
Purpose of integrated report

ba
The primary purpose of an integrated report is to explain to providers of financial capital how an
lo
organisation creates value over time. An integrated report benefits all stakeholders interested in a
company‘s ability to create value, including employees, customers, suppliers, business partners, local
communities, legislators, regulators and policymakers, although it is not directly aimed at all
G
stakeholders. Providers of financial capital can have a significant effect on the capital allocation and
attempting to aim the report at all stakeholders would be an impossible task and would reduce the focus
and increase the length of the report. This would be contrary to the objectives of the report, which is value
A
creation.
C
Historical financial statements are essential in corporate reporting, particularly for compliance purposes,
but do not provide meaningful information regarding business value. Users need a more forward-looking
AC
focus without the necessity of companies providing their own forecasts and projections. Companies have
recognised the benefits of showing a fuller picture of company value and a more holistic view of the
organisation.
The International Integrated Reporting Framework will encourage the preparation of a report that shows
their performance against strategy, explains the various capitals used and affected, and gives a longer-
term view of the organisation. The integrated report is creating the next generation of the annual report as
it enables stakeholders to make a more informed assessment of the organisation and its prospects.
EXPLANATION
Definition: <IR> demonstrates how organisations really create value:
 It is a concise communication of an organisation‘s strategy, governance and performance
 It demonstrates the links between its financial performance and its wider social, environmental
and economic context
 It shows how organisations create value over the short, medium and long term
282 | P a g e
Integrated reporting is about integrating material financial and non-financial information to enable
investors and other stakeholders to understand how an organisation is really performing. An integrated
report looks beyond the traditional time frame and scope of the current financial report by addressing the
wider as well as longer-term consequences of decisions and action and by making clear the link between
financial and non-financial value. It is important that an integrated report demonstrates the link between
an organisation's strategy, governance and business model
An Integrated Report should be a single report which is the organization‘s primary report – in most
jurisdictions the Annual Report or equivalent.
PRINCIPLE-BASED FRAMEWORK
The IIRC has set out a principle-based framework rather than specifying a detailed disclosure and
measurement standard. This enables each company to set out its own report rather than adopting a
checklist approach. The culture change should enable companies to communicate their value creation
better than the often boilerplate disclosures under IFRS. The report acts as a platform to explain what
creates the underlying value in the business and how management protects this value. This gives the
x
report more business relevance rather than the compliance led approach currently used.
Bo
Integrated reporting will not replace other forms of reporting but the vision is that preparers will pull
together relevant information already produced to explain the key drivers of their business‘s value.
Information will only be included in the report where it is material to the stakeholder‘s assessment of the
business. There were concerns that the term ‘materiality’ had a certain legal connotation, with the result
al
that some entities may feel that they should include regulatory information in the integrated report.
However, the IIRC concluded that the term should continue to be used in this context as it is well
understood.
b
lo
The integrated report aims to provide an insight into the company‘s resources and relationships that are
known as the capitals and how the company interacts with the external environment and the capitals to
G
create value. These capitals can be financial, manufactured, intellectual, human, social and relationship,
and natural capital, but companies need not adopt these classifications.
A
Following are the capitals (resources and relationships) on which the organisation depends, how the
organisation uses them and its impact upon them!
C
Financial capital: This comprises the pool of funds available to the business, which includes both debt
AC
and equity finance. This description of financial capital focuses on the source of funds.
Manufactured capital. This is the human-created, production-oriented equipment and tools used in
production or service provision, such as buildings, equipment and infrastructure. Manufactured capital
draws a distinction is between inventory (as a short-term asset) and plant and equipment (tangible
capital).
Human capital: Is understood to consist of the knowledge, skills and experience of the company‘s
employees and managers, as they are relevant to improving operational performance.
Intellectual capital. This is a key element in an organisation‘s future earning potential, with a close link
between investment in R&D, innovation, human resources and external relationships, as these can
determine the organisation‘s competitive advantage.
Natural capital. This is any stock of natural resources or environmental assets which provide a flow of
useful goods or services, now and in the future.
283 | P a g e
Social and relationships capital. Comprises the relationships within an organisation, as well as those
between an organisation and its external stakeholders, depending on where social boundaries are drawn.
These relationships should enhance both social and collective well-being.
The purpose of this framework is to establish principles and content that governs the report, and to
explain the fundamental concepts that underpin them. The report should be concise, reliable and
complete, including all material matters, both positive and negative in a balanced way and without
material error.
Key components
Integrated reporting is built around the following key components:
1. Organisational overview and the external environment under which it operates

2. Governance structure and how this supports its ability to create value
3. Business model
4. Risks and opportunities and how they are dealing with them and how they affect the company‘s
ox
ability to create value
5. Strategy and resource allocation
6. Performance and achievement of strategic objectives for the period and outcomes
lB
7. Outlook and challenges facing the company and their implications
8. The basis of presentation needs to be determined, including what matters are to be included in
the integrated report and how the elements are quantified or evaluated.
ba
The framework does not require discrete sections to be compiled in the report but there should be a high
level review to ensure that all relevant aspects are included. The linkage across the above content can
create a key storyline and can determine the major elements of the report such that the information
lo
relevant to each company would be different.
G
RELATIONSHIP WITH STAKEHOLDERS
An integrated report should provide insight into the nature and quality of the organisation‘s relationships
A
with its key stakeholders, including how and to what extent the organisation understands, takes into
account and responds to their needs and interests. Further, the report should be consistent over time to
C
enable comparison with other entities.

AC
South African organisations have been acknowledged as among the leaders in this area of corporate
reporting with many listed companies and large state-owned companies having issued integrated reports.
An integrated report may be prepared in response to existing compliance requirements – for example, a
management commentary. Where that report is also prepared according to the framework, or even
beyond the framework, it can be considered an integrated report. An integrated report may be either a
standalone report or be included as a distinguishable part of another report or communication. For
example, it can be included in the company‘s financial statements.
The IIRC considered the nature of value and value creation. These terms can include the total of all the
capitals, the benefit captured by the company, the market value or cash flows of the organisation and the
successful achievement of the company‘s objectives. However, the conclusion reached was that the
framework should not define value from any one particular perspective because value depends upon the
individual company‘s own perspective. It can be shown through movement of capital and can be defined
as value created for the company or for others. An integrated report should not attempt to quantify value
as assessments of value are left to those using the report.
Many respondents felt that there should be a requirement for a statement from those ‗charged with
governance‘ acknowledging their responsibility for the integrated report in order to ensure the reliability
284 | P a g e
and credibility of the integrated report. Additionally, it would increase the accountability for the content
of the report.
The IIRC feels the inclusion of such a statement may result in additional liability concerns, such as
inconsistency with regulatory requirements in certain jurisdictions, and could lead to a higher level of
legal liability. The IIRC also felt that the above issues might result in a slower take-up of the report and
decided that those ‗charged with governance‘ should, in time, be required to acknowledge their
responsibility for the integrated report while, at the same time, recognising that reports in which they
were not involved would lack credibility.
There has been discussion about whether the framework constitutes suitable criteria for report
preparation and for assurance. The questions asked concerned measurement standards to be used for the
information reported and how a preparer can ascertain the completeness of the report.
There were concerns over the ability to assess future disclosures, and recommendations were made that
specific criteria should be used for measurement, the range of outcomes and the need for any confidence
intervals be disclosed. The preparation of an integrated report requires judgment but there is a
x
requirement for the report to describe its basis of preparation and presentation, including the significant
frameworks and methods used to quantify or evaluate material matters. Also included is the disclosure of
Bo
a summary of how the company determined the materiality limits and a description of the reporting
boundaries.
The IIRC has stated that the prescription of specific KPIs and measurement methods is beyond the scope
b al
of a principles-based framework. The framework contains information on the principle-based approach
and indicates that there is a need to include quantitative indicators whenever practicable and possible.
Additionally, consistency of measurement methods across different reports is of paramount importance.
There is outline guidance on the selection of suitable quantitative indicators.
lo
A company should consider how to describe the disclosures without causing a significant loss of
G
competitive advantage. The entity will consider what advantage a competitor could actually gain from
information in the integrated report, and will balance this against the need for disclosure.
A
Companies struggle to communicate value through traditional reporting. The framework can prove an
effective tool for businesses looking to shift their reporting focus from annual financial performance to
C
long-term shareholder value creation. The framework will be attractive to companies who wish to develop
their narrative reporting around the business model to explain how the business has been developed.
AC
SUMMARY – BENEFITS AND CHALLENGES
Benefits of <IR>
Integrated reporting gives a ‗dashboard‘ view of an organisation‘s activities and performance in this
broader context.
 Systems and Accountability. The need to report on each type of capital would create and
enhance a system of internal measurement which would record and monitor each type for the
purposes of reporting.
 Decision-making. The connections made through <IR> enable investors to better evaluate the
combined impact of the diverse factors, or ‗capitals‘, affecting the business.
 Reputation. The greater transparency and disclosure of <IR> should result in a decrease in
reputation risk, which in turn should result in a lower cost of, and easier access to, sources of
finance.
285 | P a g e
 Harmonisation. <IR> provides a platform for standard-setters and decision-makers to develop
and harmonise business reporting. This in turn should reduce the need for costly bureaucracy
imposed by central authorities.
 Communications. The information disclosed, once audited and published, would create a fuller
and more detailed account of the sources of added value, and threats to value (i.e. risks), for
shareholders and others.
 Relationships. The information will lead to a higher level of trust from, and engagement with, a
wide range of stakeholders.
Challenges in IR
 Progress towards IR will happen at different speeds in different countries as regulations and
directors duties vary across the globe
 Directors liability will increase as they will be reporting on the future and on evolving issues
 A balance will need to be created between benefits of reporting and the desire to avoid disclosing
competitive information
 It will take time to convince management to overcome focus on short term rewards.
x
Use of concepts of materiality in applying the IR Framework
Bo
Integrated reporting (IR) takes a broader view of business reporting, emphasising the need for entities to
provide
Information to help investors assess the sustainability of their business model. IR is a process which
results in
b al
Communication, through the integrated report, about value creation over time. An integrated report is a
lo
concise
Communication about how an organisation‘s strategy, governance, performance and prospects lead to the
G
creation of
A
Value over the short, medium and long term. The materiality definition for IR purposes would consider
that material
C
Matters are those which are of such relevance and importance that they could substantively influence the
AC
assessments of the intended report users. In the case of IR, relevant matters are those which affect or have
the potential to affect the organisation‘s ability to create value over time. For financial reporting purposes,
the nature or extent of an omission or misstatement in the organisation‘s financial statements determines
relevance. Matters which are considered material for financial reporting purposes, or for other forms of
reporting, may also be material for IR purposes if they are of such relevance and importance that they
could change the assessments of providers of financial capital with regard to the organisation‘s ability to
create value. Another feature of materiality for IR purposes is that the definition emphasises the
involvement of senior management and those charged with governance in the materiality determination
process in order for the organisation to determine how best to disclose its value creation development in a
meaningful and transparent way.
286 | P a g e
THE PROFESSIONAL AND ETHICAL DUTIES OF THE

ACCOUNTANT
Code of Ethics
x
Bo
b al
lo
G
A
C
AC
287 | P a g e
ox
lB
ba
lo
G
A
C
AC
a) Self-interest threat – the threat that a financial or other interest will inappropriately influence the
professional accountant‘s judgment or behavior;
b) Self-review threat – the threat that a professional accountant will not appropriately evaluate the
results of a previous judgment made or service performed by the professional accountant, or by
another individual within the professional accountant‘s firm or employing organization, on which the
accountant will rely when forming a judgment as part of providing a current service;
c) Advocacy threat – the threat that a professional accountant will promote a client‘s or employer‘s
position to the point that the professional accountant‘s objectivity is compromised;
d) Familiarity threat - the threat that due to a long or close relationship with a client or employer, a
professional accountant will be too sympathetic to their interests or too accepting of their work; and
e) Intimidation threat – the threat that a professional accountant will be deterred from acting
objectively because of actual or perceived pressures, including attempts to exercise undue influence
over the professional accountant.
288 | P a g e
Ethical theories
‘Absolutism’ /Dogmatic/non-consequentialist
Ethical absolutism is concerned with whether an action or conduct is right or wrong. Therefore, from the
standpoint of ethical absolutes, some things are always right and some things are always wrong, no matter
how one tries to rationalise them.
Ethical absolutism requires that individuals always defer to a set of rules to guide them in the ethical
decision-making process. It holds that whether an action is ethical does not depend on the view of the
person facing the dilemma; instead it depends on whether the action conforms to the given set of ethical
rules and standards.
Absolutism takes no account of who is making the ethical judgement, but defers to universal principles
x
which should guide anyone‘s behaviour in the situation, regardless of their background.
Bo
‘Relativism’ /pragmatic/consequentialist
Ethical relativism is the broad acceptance that nothing is objectively right or wrong, but depends on the
circumstances of the situation and the individuality of the person facing the situation or dilemma.
b al
It suggests that an ethical position held by one person may be viewed as right for them, but may be wholly
unacceptable to another person in the same situation. Relativism therefore insists that what is considered
lo
true by an individual replaces the search for an absolute truth by denying the existence of objective moral
standards. Rather, according to ethical relativism, individuals must evaluate actions on the basis of what
they feel is best for themselves.
G
Ethical relativism takes account of who is making the ethical decision and what their psychological,
A
cultural and moral background is and accepts that different people will form different moral opinions of
the most ethical approach to be taken in any given situation.
C
AC
289 | P a g e
Kohlberg’s Levels of Moral Development
Laurence Kohlberg devised a theory which explained the rationale behind human moral reasoning, where
he was less concerned about the actual decision taken but rather the cognitive process which arrived at
each judgement. Kohlberg described the development of individual moral and ethical reasoning through
three discrete levels: pre-conventional, conventional and post-conventional.
x
Bo
b al
lo
G
A
C
AC
290 | P a g e
x
Bo
b al
lo
G
A
C
AC
291 | P a g e
Corporate Citizenship
Corporate citizenship is an approach which can be adopted by any business with the aim of shaping its
core values so that they more closely align the decisions made each day by its directors, managers and
employees with the needs of the society in which the business operates.
There are three principles which take into account successful corporate citizenship:
(i) Minimising any harm caused to society by the decisions and actions of a business, which
could include avoiding harm to the natural environment as well as the social infrastructure.
(ii) Maximising any benefit created for society as a consequence of normal business activity. Any
successful business will stimulate local economic activity and increase employment, but a
good corporate citizen will do this with greater sensitivity to its environmental and social
impacts.
(iii) Remaining clearly accountable and responsive to a wide range of its stakeholders, thereby
combining business self-interest with a greater sense of responsibility towards society at
large.
x
Bo
By embracing the corporate citizenship agenda, an organisation is able to recognise its fundamental rights
and acknowledge that it has responsibilities towards the wider community.
Responsibilities of the business as a corporate citizen
al
Just as an individual has the responsibility to obey the law, fit in with the social and ethical norms of
society, and behave in an appropriate way, so does a business.
b
lo
Its responsibility is to always comply with the laws and social norms which apply in each country it deals
with. This extends to being a good employer, maintaining prompt payment of payables accounts,
G
encouraging good working conditions at supplier companies and similar areas of good business practice.
The 3 perspectives are:

A
1. limited view: stakeholders considered when in business‘ interest (main groups considered are
C
employees and local community)

2. Equivalent view: self interest is not primary motivation. Organization is focused on legal
AC
requirements and ethical fulfillment.

3. Extended view: Combination of self interest promoting the power that organizations have and wider
responsibility towards society.
292 | P a g e
Ethical decision making model

THE AMERICAN ACCOUNTING ASSOCIATION (AAA) MODEL
The American Accounting Association (AAA) model comes from a report for the AAA written by
Langenderfer and Rockness in 1990. In the report, they suggest a logical, seven-step process for decision
making, which takes ethical issues into account.
The model begins, at Step 1, by establishing the facts of the case. While perhaps obvious, this step means
that when the decision-making process starts, there is no ambiguity about what is under consideration.
Step 2 is to identify the ethical issues in the case. This involves examining the facts of the case and asking
what ethical issues are at stake.
The third step is an identification of the norms, principles, and values related to the case. This involves
placing the decision in its social, ethical, and, in some cases, professional behaviour context. In this last
x
context, professional codes of ethics or the social expectations of the profession are taken to be the norms,
Bo
principles, and values. For example, if stock market rules are involved in the decision, then these will be a
relevant factor to consider in this step.
In the fourth step, each alternative course of action is identified. This involves stating each one, without
al
consideration of the norms, principles, and values identified in Step 3, in order to ensure that each
outcome is considered, however appropriate or inappropriate that outcome might be.
b
Then, in Step 5, the norms, principles, and values identified in Step 3 are overlaid on to the options
lo
identified in Step 4. When this is done, it should be possible to see which options accord with the norms
and which do not.
G
In Step 6, the consequences of the outcomes are considered. Again, the purpose of the model is to make
the implications of each outcome unambiguous so that the final decision is made in full knowledge and
A
recognition of each one.

C
Finally, in Step 7, the decision is taken.

AC
293 | P a g e

SBR Revision Notes

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SBR Revision Notes

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

SBR Revision Notes

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

NOTES

(Association of Chartered Certified Accountants)

It is true to say that the Framework:

Advantages of a conceptual framework

 Financial statements are more consistent with each other

 Has a principles based approach

Disadvantages of a conceptual framework

OVERVIEW OF THE CONTENTS OF THE FRAMEWORK

THE FIVE ELEMENTS

asset, and so the accounting is a faithful presentation.

The recognition criteria of elements of financial statements

 An item that meets the definition of an element

Recap: Application of recognition criteria

Measurement issues for elements

Measurements of elements in financial statements

the normal course of business)

HISTORICAL COST ACCOUNTING

FINACIAL AND PHYSICAL CAPITAL MAINTENANCE

The IASB Conceptual Framework identifies two concepts of capital:

1. A financial concept of capital

Financial capital maintenance

Assets – Liabilities = Equity

Physical capital maintenance

which could be based on its units of output.

QUALITATIVE CHARACTERISTICS OF USEFUL FINANCIAL INFORMATION

Fundamental qualitative characteristics

Enhancing qualitative characteristics

Chapter 1, The objective of general purpose financial reporting

Chapter 2, The reporting entity

Chapter 5, Recognition and derecognition

 The item meets the definition of an asset or liability;

STANDARD SETTING PROCESS

The due process for developing an IFRS comprises of six stages:

1. Setting the agenda

PRINCIPLES VS RULES-BASED APPROACH

Rules-based accounting system

Principles-based accounting system

PREPARATION OF FINANCIAL STATEMENTS FOR COMPANIES

A complete set of financial statements comprises:

 A statement of financial position

THE STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL POSITION

Statement of Financial Position as at 31 December 20X8

 Will be settled within 12 months of the reporting date, or

STATEMENT OF CHANGES IN EQUITY

STATEMENT OF PROFIT OR LOSS AND OTHER COMPREHENSIVE INCOME

Property plant and equipment are tangible assets that:

 Initial recognition and measurement

PPE are recognized if

Elements of costs comprise:

 Its purchase price

 Professional fees (architects, engineers)

Measurement of self constructed and exchanged assets

 Cost of self-constructed assets will be the cost of its production

(a) The exchange transaction lacks commercial substance or

period that they are incurred.

MEASUREMENT SUBSEQUENT TO INITIAL RECOGNITION:

IAS 16 permits two accounting models:

Useful economic lives and residual value

MODELS FOR SUBSEQUENT MEASUREMENT